AGROPLUS 60-70-80 Repair Manual

WORKSHOP MANUAL
introduction
This publication is intended for the trained technician who must operate on our tractors.
It contains all general information relating to our tractor range, and in particular it highlights the inspection, overhauling
and adjustment procedures as well as the main instructions for dismantling and reassembling operations.
The workshop manual is a natural summary for the mechanic who has attended the vocational training and specialization courses, which are held every year at our Service School, to permit him to perform a precise and qualified work on
tractor.
Its contents are therefore an exhaustive reference book for the experienced mechanic who desires to refresh his memory on the sequence of the operations to be done. It is then good practice for every authorized dealer mechanic to
have at his disposal this publication, so that it may be consulted quickly when necessary.
We wish to thank in advance for the cooperation all thos people, who will let us have their suggestions in order to make
this publication more complete.
List of contents
Tractor configurations AGROPLUS 60 - 70 - 80 ......................................................................................................6
Dimensions and weights...........................................................................................................................................7
Prescribed lubricants and capacities ........................................................................................................................8
Conversion tables .....................................................................................................................................................9
Parts .......................................................................................................................................................................10
1 - ENGINE
................................................................................................................................................................................11
2 - CLUTCH
Gearshift clutch.......................................................................................................................................................12
General specifications ............................................................................................................................................12
Cecking clutch ........................................................................................................................................................16
Adjusting clutch control pedal .................................................................................................................................16
Bleeding air from the hydraulic circuit.....................................................................................................................16
Stripping the slave cylinder.....................................................................................................................................17
Stripping the master cylinder ..................................................................................................................................18
Diagnosing malfunctions ........................................................................................................................................20
POWERSHIFT unit, general specifications ............................................................................................................21
POWERSHIFT unit detach from the gear box ........................................................................................................24
Assembly of POWERSHIFT unit ...........................................................................................................................35
Re-assembly of the POWERSHIFT unit. ...............................................................................................................37
Fitting the oil manifolds of the POWERSHIFT unit ................................................................................................39
Diagnosing malfunctions ........................................................................................................................................44
3 - TRANSMISSION
General specifications ............................................................................................................................................45
Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................................................45
Speed change configurations .................................................................................................................................47
Section through transmission .................................................................................................................................51
Section through transmission with POWERSHIFT unit ..........................................................................................52
Separating the front gearbox from the engine ........................................................................................................61
Dismantling the gearbox .........................................................................................................................................62
Removal of the gearbox input and P.T.O. shafts ....................................................................................................62
Separating the POWERSHIFT unit from the gearbox ...........................................................................................62
Removal of the gear train positioned in the front gearbox ......................................................................................63
Disassembly of the inversor control rods and forks ................................................................................................64
Dismantling of the gearchange rod and fork assembly ..........................................................................................65
Dismantling of the gearchange selector rods and forks assembly .........................................................................66
Removal of the shaft with the actuator for engagement/disengagement of the front-wheel drive ..........................67
Removal of the range gear shaft ........................................................................................................................... 67
Examining parts removed .......................................................................................................................................68
Adjusting play of the gearbox shafts by means of the thrust plates on the mini/inversor
shaft and the secondary shaft ...............................................................................................................................69
Warnigns related to assembly of the gears of the P.T.O. unit, the range reduction unit and synchronised
P.T.O. shaft ............................................................................................................................................................73
Assembly of the P.T.O. ..........................................................................................................................................73
Installation of the range reduction unit, the gear for the front-wheel drive shaft
and the parking brake discs...................................................................................................................................73
Points where sealant is to be used .........................................................................................................................75
Tightening torques ..................................................................................................................................................78
Bevel drive adjustment ...........................................................................................................................................81
Servicing operations ...............................................................................................................................................82
Rear power take-off ................................................................................................................................................83
P.T.O. clutch ...........................................................................................................................................................88
Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................................................89
Correct positions of P.T.O. sensors and cables .....................................................................................................89
Clutch inspection ....................................................................................................................................................91
Checking clutch hydraulic pressures ......................................................................................................................92
Checking the end-play of the front shaft of the P.T.O. clutch .................................................................................93
Renewal of the rear P.T.O. clutch ..........................................................................................................................94
Main operations for removal of the rear P.T.O. unit ...............................................................................................95
Diagnosing malfunctions ......................................................................................................................................100
4 - AXLES
Rear axle ..............................................................................................................................................................101
Installing the rear half-shafts ...............................................................................................................................102
Removal and disassembly of the epicyclic reduction unit.........................................................................................104
Fitting lateral stub axles of the wheel ...................................................................................................................105
2WD extendible axle.............................................................................................................................................106
Removing the axle from the front support ............................................................................................................108
Centre steering lever ............................................................................................................................................111
Wheel hub ............................................................................................................................................................112
End float adjustment .............................................................................................................................................114
Front-wheel drive..................................................................................................................................................115
Specifications .......................................................................................................................................................115
Epicyclic reduction unit .........................................................................................................................................119
Side hubs..............................................................................................................................................................121
Tightening torques................................................................................................................................................122
Adjusting bevel gears ...........................................................................................................................................124
Adjustment of the internal control of the mechanical differential lock...................................................................125
Installing the differential assembly into the drive axle ..........................................................................................125
5 - VEHICLE
Brakes - General information................................................................................................................................127
Hydraulic pump.....................................................................................................................................................128
Assembly of brake master cylinder ......................................................................................................................130
Checking the front brake disks on 2WD and 4WD front axles and the rear brake disks...................................... 131
Adjusting service brake pedals .............................................................................................................................131
Correct installation of inspection cover for parking brake discs............................................................................132
Checking parking brake pads ...............................................................................................................................134
Bleeding air from the brake hydraulic system.......................................................................................................135
Separate Brakes valve .......................................................................................................................................136
Hydraulic lift with load sensing ...........................................................................................................................141
Installing the lift and front cover plate of the gearbox ...........................................................................................142
Lift mechanism .....................................................................................................................................................142
Checking the safety valves ...................................................................................................................................142
Checking the protrusion of the non-return valve...................................................................................................143
Adjusting the lift ....................................................................................................................................................145
Lift hydraulic circuit ...............................................................................................................................................147
Sensing arm assemblyMontaggio dell'organo sensibile .......................................................................................154
Power-lift distributor valve spring setting specifications .......................................................................................155
Electronic lift .........................................................................................................................................................156
Control panel ........................................................................................................................................................157
Control level or depth control knob .......................................................................................................................157
Mix position/draft control.......................................................................................................................................157
Lowering speed control knob................................................................................................................................158
Maximum lift height control knob ..........................................................................................................................158
Up/Down control switch ........................................................................................................................................158
Up control .............................................................................................................................................................158
Control/Float mode ...............................................................................................................................................158
Lift status indicator light ........................................................................................................................................158
Remote pushbuttons for lift operation from ground ..............................................................................................159
Lift operation .........................................................................................................................................................160
List of electronic lift tests ......................................................................................................................................164
Precautions for electronic equipment ...................................................................................................................173
Checking the electronics system ..........................................................................................................................173
Checking mechanical components .......................................................................................................................173
Front hydraulic liftSollevatore idraulico anteriore..................................................................................................174
Hydraulic accumulator and antishock valve for front lift .......................................................................................176
Front power take-off - General information...........................................................................................................177
Section of the P.T.O. ............................................................................................................................................178
Fitting the "RING-FEEDER" rings.........................................................................................................................182
Checking the clutch ..............................................................................................................................................183
Diagnosing malfuntions ........................................................................................................................................184
Spring specifications.............................................................................................................................................184
6 - CONTROLS
Hydrostatic steering ..............................................................................................................................................185
Inspections and checks ........................................................................................................................................186
Steering pump ......................................................................................................................................................186
Directional control valve .......................................................................................................................................186
Check the setting of the pressure relief valve.......................................................................................................186
Bleeding the hydraulic circuit ................................................................................................................................186
Assembly of orbital pump unit ..............................................................................................................................186
Teering wheel shaft and steering cylinders .........................................................................................................187
Instructions for the hydrostatic steering distributor assembly ...............................................................................189
Mechanical controls ..............................................................................................................................................196
Electro-hydraulic controls .....................................................................................................................................197
Front P.T.O. clutch engagement control...............................................................................................................202
Rear P.T.O. clutch engagement control ...............................................................................................................202
Differential lock engagement control ....................................................................................................................202
Front-wheel drive engagement control .................................................................................................................202
Rear P.T.O. engagement control ..........................................................................................................................202
Gearbox ................................................................................................................................................................202
Front and rear lift ..................................................................................................................................................202
Hydraulic circuit diagram ......................................................................................................................................202
Solenoid valve - Specifications .............................................................................................................................207
Adjustment of front and rear differential lock control ............................................................................................214
7 - BODYWORK
Platform ................................................................................................................................................................215
Cab - General information ....................................................................................................................................216
Cab air filter ..........................................................................................................................................................218
Screen wash .........................................................................................................................................................218
Screen wipers (front and rear) ..............................................................................................................................218
Removing the driving platform complete with cab ................................................................................................219
Breakage of the top hood release cable ...............................................................................................................220
High visibility cab roof ...........................................................................................................................................222
8 - SYSTEMS
Ventilation .............................................................................................................................................................223
Heating System ....................................................................................................................................................223
Air conditioning unit for cabs ................................................................................................................................227
Operation and maintenance of the air-conditioning system .................................................................................228
Water dripping from the points at which condensate drain lines are connected to the conditioning unit ............229
Checking system ..................................................................................................................................................231
System safety elements .......................................................................................................................................231
Temperature regulation ........................................................................................................................................231
Charging the system.............................................................................................................................................232
Filling the metering unit ........................................................................................................................................232
Refilling the system with oil ..................................................................................................................................232
Verifying operation of the system after recharging ...............................................................................................234
Directions for tightening air conditioning system pipeline fittings .........................................................................234
Hydraulic system ..................................................................................................................................................242
Oil filters ................................................................................................................................................................243
Hydraulic pumps ...................................................................................................................................................243
Checking the relief valves of the hydraulic lift system ..........................................................................................243
Stripping the hydraulic pump ................................................................................................................................244
Auxiliary hydraulic spool valves ............................................................................................................................247
Checking the pressure relief valve setting ............................................................................................................250
Checking the operating pressure ..........................................................................................................................250
Conversion of auxiliary spool valves from double acting to single acting operation.............................................250
Checking the surface of the valve spools .............................................................................................................250
Trailer hydraulic braking system ...........................................................................................................................251
Use of the tractor with CUNA 341/01 hydraulic trailer braking .............................................................................253
Installing the hydraulic braking valve for trailers equipped with safety brake
( ITALIAN version) ................................................................................................................................................258
Electrical system AGROPLUS 60 (up serial number1017) - 70 (up serial number 2773) - 80.............................261
Electrical system AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) - 70 (under serial number 2772) ........................445
General safety directions......................................................................................................................................446

Jump start utilizing another battery.......................................................................................................................447
Recharge system..................................................................................................................................................449
Heating system .....................................................................................................................................................450
Starting system .....................................................................................................................................................450
Ignition key ...........................................................................................................................................................452
Ventilation control .................................................................................................................................................452
Push button control...............................................................................................................................................452
Beacon push button..............................................................................................................................................454
Work ligths............................................................................................................................................................454
2-Speed windscreen wiper switch ........................................................................................................................454
Relay ....................................................................................................................................................................455
Electronic flasher unit ...........................................................................................................................................455
Switch controlling..................................................................................................................................................456
Switch controlling: differential lock - P.T.O. clutch - 4RM - 540 1000 rpm/min P.T.O. speed selector Economy P.T.O. - Live P.t.o. - electric starter system.........................................................................................456
Switch for emergency brake .................................................................................................................................456
Fuse box ...............................................................................................................................................................457
Instrument panel with digital display .....................................................................................................................458
Operation of the broken belts alarm control unit...................................................................................................460
Engine stop operation with a type 2MH engine control unit .................................................................................462
Electrical wiring.....................................................................................................................................................465
9 - APPENDIX
Power lift tester version 1.24a ...................................................................................................................................I
TRACTOR CONFIGURATIONS:
AGROPLUS 60 - 70 - 80
2RM
2RM
4RM
4RM
WITH PLATFORM
WITH CAB
WITH PLATFORM
WITH CAB
CAB
- ventilation
- ventilation + heating
- ventilation + heating + air conditioning
GEARBOX
Fully synchronised:
20 Forward + 10 Reverse: 5 speeds x 2 ranges (Hair-Tortoise)
+ SYNCHROSPLIT (H/fast-L/slow-R/rearward)
30 Forward + 15 Reverse: 5 speeds x 3 ranges (Hair-Tortoise-Snail)

+ SYNCHROSPLIT (H/fast-L/slow-R/rearward)
45 Forward + 45 Reverse: 5 speeds x 3 ranges (Hair-Tortoise-Snail)
+ shuttle + version POWERSHIFT
CONTROLS
- rear P.T.O. clutch with electro-hydraulic control
- 4WD with mechanical control or optional electro-hydraulic control
- electronic engine throttle
MECHANICALLY OPERATED REAR POWER-LIFT

- with supplementary rams
- without supplementary rams
MAIN EQUIPMENT
- front P.T.O.
- front lift
- hydraulic pump capacities increased by 27 l/min (for hydrostatic steering, electro-hydraulic control
unit and gearbox lubrication) and by 47 l/min (for trailer braking, auxiliary control valves and lift).
- hydraulic trailer braking
- 4-way or 6-way control valves with Flow Divider
- etc.
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

AGROPLUS 60
Length max:
- without linkage
- with front and rear linkage
Width min./max.
Height:
- al telai di sicurezza
- at cab (standard)
- at cab (with air conditioning)
Ground clearance
Wheel base
Front track
base
min./max.
Rear track
base
min./max.
Min. turning radius
without brakes
Operating weight
(without front lift)
- with plataform
- with cab
Max. permissible load
- front
- rear
- block
Tyres
- front
- rear
AGROPLUS 70 -80
2 WD
4 WD
2 WD
4 WD
(A) mm
(A) mm
(B) mm
3800
-
3835
4350
3930
-
3985
4480
1920 -2320
1920-2320
1920-2320
1920-2320
(C) mm
(C) mm
(D) mm
(E) mm
(F) mm
2420
2430
2595
345
2162
2420
2430
2595
345
2112
1490
1700
2360
365
2292
365
2242
(G) mm
1400
1440
1300-1600 1340-1740
1400
1440
1300-1600 1340-1740
(H) mm
1500
1500
1400-1900 1400-1900
1500
1500
1400-1900 1400-1900
(mm)
3500
4050
3700
4300
kg
kg
2355
2550
2705
2900
2555
2750
2905
3100
kg
kg
kg
240
200
-
240
200
250
240
200
-
240
200
250
7.50-16
14.9R30
12.4R 20
14.9R30
7.50-16
16.9R30
11.2R 24
16.9R30
41
(10.8)
Engine AGROPLUS 70/80
Gearbox and rear axle
(*)1 replace after 50 hours

(**) With filter + 1.5 litre
Lubrification points
Brakes and clutch control
Front PTO
Side reductions
MAX
6 (6.3)
1.5x2
(1.6x2)
2.5 (2.6)
11**
(2.9)
Central axle
9.5**
(2.5)
Litres
(US gal)
Engine AGROPLUS 60
Part to be supplied
Product
AKROS GREASE T2
AKROS MATIC
AKROS MULTI
AKROS MULTI
AKROS TURBO
15W40
PRESCRIBED LUBRICANTS AND FUELS AGROPLUS 60/70/80
ATF DEXRON II D
SDFG OF-1691
NLGI 2 - LITIO
SDFG GR-1202 L
Sae 10w30
Sae 20w30
UTTO API GL4
SDFG OT-1891
Sae 10w30
Sae 20w30
UTTO API GL4
SDFG OT-1891
Sae 15w40
ACEA E3-96
API CF
SDFG OM-1991
MIL-L-2104 E level
MB 228.3 level
Specifications
SDFG
50
1200
1200
500*
change
hours
PRESCRIBED LUBRICANTS AND FUELS
CONVERSION TABLE FROM
FROM
inch
cm
foot
m
yard
m
Eng. miles
km
Sq.in.
cm2
Sq.ft.
m2
Sq.yard
m2
Cu.in.
cm3
Cu.ft.
Liter
Cu.yard
m3
Imp.gall.
Liter
US gall.
Liter
pint
Liter
quart
Liter
oz.
kg
lb.
kg
lb.ft.
kgm
lb/in.
kg/m
lb./sq.in.
kg/cm2
lb./Imp.gall.
kg/l
lb./US gall.
kg/l
lb./cu.ft.
kg/m3
cu.ft./lb.
m3/kg
Nm
kgm
kW
PS
bar
kg/cm2
dm3
l
TO
cm
inch
m
foot
m
yard
km
Eng. miles
cm2
Sq.ft.
m2
Sq.ft.
m2
Sq.yard
cm3
Cu.in.
Liter
Cu.ft.
m3
Cu.yard
Liter
Imp.gall.
Liter
US gall.
Liter
pint
Liter
quart
kg
oz.
kg
lb.
kgm
lb.ft.
kg/m
lb/in.
kg/cm2
lb/sq.in.
kg/l
lb./Imp.gall.
kg/l
lb./US gall.
kg/m3
lb./cu.ft.
m3/kg
cu.ft./lb.
kgm
Nm
PS
kW
kg/cm2
bar
l
dm3
multiply by:
2.540
0.394
0.305
3.281
0.914
1.094
1.609
0.622
6.452
0.155
0.093
10.77
0.835
1.197
16.39
0.061
28.36
0.035
0.763
1.311
4.547
0.220
3.785
0.264
0.568
1.762
1.137
0.880
0.028
35.25
0.454
2.203
0.139
7.233
17.87
0.056
0.070
14.22
0.100
10.00
0.120
8.333
16.21
0.062
0.062
16.21
0.102
9.81
1.36
0.736
1.014
0.981
1
1
HOW TO ORDER SPARE PARTS
To ensure perfect tractor efficiency thus avoiding serious drawbacks, and to optimize your investment and the operational expenses, the use of ORIGINAL SPARE PARTS is recommended.
Spare parts orders must specify the following:
Tractor serial number and engine serial number (if the engine is concerned).
Spare part name and reference code.
ENGINE TYPE AND

SERIAL NUMBER
10
TRACTOR FRAME TYPE

AND SERIAL NUMBER
ENGINE
AGROPLUS 60 and AGROPLUS 70 are powered by F3L 913 / F4L 913

engines. The workshop manual for these engines cuold be ordered to the
following addresse:
DEUTZ-FAHR DEUTSCHLANDGmbH
Abt. LT-ZE
Deutz-Fahr-Strae 1
89415 Lauingen
Telefax-Nr.: 09072/997-360 or -353
Using the following code:
0297 7293
11
Clutch and transmission
23
Clutch
Earshift clutch
General specifications
The clutch, a single stage type, comprises a friction disc, a pressure plate and a diaphragm spring.
The hydrostatic control is self-adjusting: a master cylinder operated by the pedal directs oil to the slave cylinder mounted to the left hand side of the intermediate housing, which in turn operates the clutch release lever.
Technical specifications
Agroplus
60
Type of clutch
Agroplus
70-80
Agroplus
60-70-80
(USA) 6 blades
single disc dry

single disc dry
single disc dry
organic facing
organic facing
cerametallik facing
hydrostatic with automatic take-up of free travel
Type of operation
Disc p/n
Disc diameter
mm
009.6913.3
279,4
009.6924.3/20
310
009.9770.3
310
Minimum permissible thickness of disc
mm
9,7
Thickness of friction disc

Type of facing material on friction disc
Type of master cylinder
Type of oil
mm
+0, 3
-0, 3
+0, 3
-0, 3
8,5
TEXTAR T385
8,5
TEXTAR T385
10 +-00..22
UA 330 DX
Benditalia 3/4"
AKROS MATIC
Spring specifications to Belleville washer for the

clutch engagement
Load on the pressure plate
Nm
11000
CAUTION: In the event the transmission being split to gain access

to the clutch assembly, the pickup (A, fig. 1) must be removed to
avoid its being damaged by the teeth of the engine flywheel.
Fig. 1 - Engine rpm pickup.
IIMPORTANT: In the event of the friction disc being removed, care must be taken during refitment to position
the components correctly, as indicated, since the disc is not symmetrical.
12
Fig. 2 - Clutch unit for AGROPLUS 60
Clutch
23
Fig. 3 - Clutch unit for AGROPLUS 70-80
13
23
Clutch
Clutch unit for AGROPLUS 60-70-80 (USA) 6 blades
14
Clutch
23
Fig. 4 - Components of clutch assembly
15
23
Clutch
Fig. 5 - Checking clutch disk thickness.
Fig. 9 - Installing clutch assembly through n. 5.9030.256.4/10 equipment.
Cecking clutch
Check the disk lining for signs of chipping and the disk friction face
for scoring which may prevent the clutch from operating properly.
Check that the sliding surface of the engine flywheel is not scored;
if signs of scoring are evident, machine the surface.
Check the disk thrust plate for scoring or bluish areas caused by
tempering and also ensure the diaphragm-type spring has not lost
its efficiency; if so the whole clutch assembly shall be replaced.
Fig. 6 - Clutch assembly hydraulic operating cylinder.
Be sure the clutch disk is free to move in its housing and the friction
lining securing rivets are duly riveted.
Should any wear be found on the thrust bearing or the diaphragm-type spring, an exhaustive check over the spring operating
conditions installed in the disk thrust lever operating cylinder (see
Fig. 6) shall be performed; replace if necessary.
On reassembly ascertain dimension A (see Fig. 6) between the
operating cylinder fixing face and the push rod contacting the en gagement lever is 195 mm.
NOTE: To facilitate correct clutch disk assembly the use of no.
5.9030.256.4/10 centering tool is recommended.
Warning: With engine running, never ride the clutch pedal with
your foot to prevent the clutch disk from being damaged because
of overheating.
Important: The thrust bearing is prelubricated, and must never on
any account be cleaned with fuel oil or other solvents as these will
render the prelubrication treatment ineffective.
Fig. 7 - Checking operating cylinder inside spring

efficiency.
Adjusting clutch control pedal

Make sure the distance between pump fixing surface and fork hole
centre is 106 1 (Fig. 15) otherwise loosen nut A and operate adjusting stay rod B (Fig. 15).
Bleeding air from the hydraulic circuit

Operate the clutch pedal several times, then keeping the clutch
pedal in fully depressed position, slightly unscrew and soon after
tighten the air bleeding screw valve again (this being located on
thrust lever operating cylinder).
This operation should be repeated as many times as the oil flows
out of the bleeding screw valve without air bubbles.
Fig. 8 - Bleeding the air from the clutch hydraulic
circuit.
16
A
B
C
Bleed screw
Hydraulic pipe fitting
Slave cylinder body
D
E
F
Clutch
23
Spring
Seal ring
Piston
G
H
Push rod
Rubber boot
Fig. 10 - Clutch operating cylinder
Stripping the slave cylinder (Fig. 10)

Remove the boot H. Withdraw the piston F carefully from the cylinder
C, blasting with compressed air at low pressure to assist removal.
Remove the spring D from the cylinder and loosen the bleed screw
A.
Remove the seals E fom the piston F.
CAUTION: When cleaning the components of the cylinder, use
only specifically formulated brake and clutch fluids (see page
110). Do not use petrol, paraffin or other mineral oils as these will
damage parts in rubber.
Inspections
Check both internal and external piston surfaces for scratching.
Replace if required.
Make sure the seal ring grooves are duly clean; blow the grooves with compressed air if necessary.
Inspect seal ring, dust boot conditions as well as spring efficiency, worn-out parts should be replaced.
Ensure the air bleeding hole is free from impurities.
Notes on refitment
When reconnecting the transmission housing, check that the clutch
fork remains correctly positioned and free to rock on its fulcrum pivot.
This can be ensured by removing the side plug from the flange of the
intermediate housing and viewing the fork through the hole. In the
event of the fork pivot being unseated, reposition correctly with the
aid of a screwdriver inserted through the hole vacated by the plug.
Before refitting the slave cylinder, fill with the recommended oil
so as to facilitate the subsequent bleeding procedure.
Once all components are correctly and securely in place, bleed
the hydraulic circuit.
A - Control lever
B - Dust boot
C - Pushrod
D - Union
E - Piston
F - Seal ring
G - Cylinder casing
H - Spring
Fig. 11 - Clutch operating cylinder cutaway view.
17
23
Clutch
A Hydraulic pump
B - Delivery pipe union
C - Delivery pipe
D - Clamp
E - Union
F
G
H
I
L
- Spring
- Spring holder
- Screw
- Shoulder ring
- Seal ring
M - Spacer ring
N - Piston
O - Seal ring
P - Rod
Q - Support disk
R
S
T
U
- Snap ring
- Guard boot
- Nut
- Yoke
Fig. 12 - Clutch hydraulic pump parts.
Stripping the master cylinder

Referring to figure 14, remove the protective boot E, dislodge the circlip B and withdraw the rod D together with the
disc C.
Remove the piston together with the spacer, the seal, the backup washer and the spring beneath.
Fig. 13 - Clutch pump control positioning.

A - Locknut
B - Yoke
18
Fig. 14 - Pump control seal ring.

A - Pump
D - Rod
B - Snap ring
E - Guard boot
C - Support disk
Clutch
23
Inspections and checks

WARNING: To clean and wash the hydraulic pump components use only the oil type recommended for brakes and
clutch. Never use petrol, kerosene or other mineral oils to prevent damaging the rubber parts.
Inspect both internal and external piston sliding surfaces for scratching. Replace if required.
Make sure the seal ring grooves are duly clean; blow the grooves with compressed air if necessary.
Inspect seal ring, dust boot conditions as well as spring efficiency, worn-out parts should be replaced.
Inspect all pump internal compartments, apertures and passages and make sure these are properly clean and free from
foreign matters.
Check that the spring is neither lazy nor deformed; replace if necessary.
Reassembly
Reassemble the cylinder, repeating the disassembly steps in reverse order and observing the following directions:
Lubricate surfaces engaged in relative sliding contact, using the recommended oil (see page 12).
Verify correct operation of the cylinder, making certain that the piston is able to complete its full stroke unimpeded.
In the event that the fork linking the master cylinder with the pedal has been removed, check that with the push rod fully
extended, the distance between the reference surface of the cylinder and the centre of the hole in the fork is as indicated
in figure 15.
If not (referring to fig 13), remove the boot, loosen the lock nut A and screw or unscrew the fork B to obtain the prescribed clearance, then retighten the lock nut and reposition the boot.
Fig. 15 - Section view of clutch master cylinder
Clutch greasing points.

Apply Molikote Gn-plus at all the points indicated in the figure
with letter A.
Fit part B with Loctite 270.
Fit pin C with Loctite 601.
Fitting the P.T.O. shaft oil seal

Before fitting the oil seal 2.1529.517.0 apply Loctite 222 to
the outer face A indicated in the figure.
19

Diagnosing malfunctions
clutch slips
clutch jerks
lubricant in clutch
housing
renew the front gearbox oil seal and

the rear engine oil
seal
clean oil seal contact surfaces with

petrol
replace disk
clutch worn
check condition of
clutch disk
check condition of
the spring disk
fit new clutch as sembly
thrust bearing sticking
clean surfaces and

apply grease
replace thrust bearing
clean or replace the

disk
clutch disk surfaces dirty
clean the friction

surfaces
clutch disk warped
difficulty in enga ging gears when

engine running
clutch fails to disengage
clutch disk surfaces dirty
replace clutch disk
clutch disk worn
replace clutch disk
plate seals loose
replace clutch disk
clutch disk warped
replace disk
hydraulic pump
inefficient
check the stroke of

the clutch control
piston and replace
any worn parts
clutch disk stuck to

flywheel
clutch noisy when disengaged
20
worn parts in clutch

engagement me chanism
replace parts
clean contact surfaces with a wire

brush and petrol
POWERSHIFT
27
POWERSHIFT unit
The POWERSHIFT unit is composed of an epicyclic speed reducer and three oil-immersed multiple disc clutches
(LOW - MED - HIGH).
The unit is located between the clutch-coupled shaft and the gearbox.
The speed reducer is engaged and disengaged selectively by way of the three clutches, which are a push button
and
mounted to the knob of the shift lever.
Selecting the control,

the MED clutch releases as the force of the belleville discs is overcome by hydraulic pressu re; at the same time, the HIGH clutch engages, locking the planet carrier of the epicyclic train to the relative housing so
that drive is transmitted to the range input shaft with no speed reduction whatever.
the MED clutch releases as the force of the belleville discs is overcome by hydraulic pressu re; at the same time, the LOW clutch engages, and the shaft carrying the sun wheel is locked to the structure of the transmission housing. As a result, the planet carrier is made to rotate as one with the epicyclic housing and drive is transmit ted to the layshaft at a speed reduction of 0.687 (the ratio between the annulus and the sun wheel gear teeth).
the POWERSHIFT unit is isolated from hydraulic pressure altogether and the belleville
discs are able to engage the MED clutch, with the result that the shaft in mesh with the larger planet wheel is locked to
the transmission housing. This gives a reduction of 0.825, by reason of the compound ratio between the planet wheels
and the flange of the speed reducer in mesh with the range input shaft.
Clutch
maker
SAME DEUTZ - FAHR
number of friction discs

diameter of friction discs
7
129,5
4
129,5
2
129,5
overall thickness of assembled friction

discs complete the intermediate discs
mm
25,2 25,4
17,50 17,60
11,70 12,14
number of intermediate discs

disc lubrication pressure
bar
3+1
5
2+1
5
2+1
5
maximum pressure
bar
16
16
16
piston thrust
Kg
Nm
1986
19463
1986
19463
1986
19463
Epicyclic speed reducer

- LOW
1 + (30/66) = 1,4545
- MEDIUM
1 + (21x18) : (66x27) = 1,2121
- HIGH
SLOW
MEAN
FAST
Fig. 1 - Range selection indicators mounted to the instrument panel.
Fig. 2 - Plate indicating selection of electrohydraulic control.
21
27
POWERSHIFT
Fig. 3 - Diagram illustrating operation of the POWERSHIFT system.
Parts in movement
Parts locked to transmission housing
Fig. 4 - Diagram showing engagement of POWERSHIFT with MED range selected.
22
In rotation (idling)
POWERSHIFT
27
Parts in movement
Oil circuit for operation of clutches
Fig. 5 - Diagram showing engagement of POWERSHIFT with LOW range selected.

Parts locked to epicyclic
Oil circuit for operation of clutches
Fig. 6 - Diagram showing engagement of POWERSHIFT with HIGH range selected.
23
27
POWERSHIFT
POWERSHIFT UNIT DETACH FROM THE GEAR BOX
Fig. 7 - Detach the driving platform (or the cab, if fitted) from
the tractor.
Fig. 8 - Detach the front part of the tractor complete with en gine from the gearbox.
Fig. 9 - Detach the front gearbox from the rear gearbox.
Fig. 10 - Remove the upper cover from the front gearbox.
Fig. 11 - Remove the internal clutch control from the front

gearbox.
Fig. 12 - Remove the solenoid valve block from the front

right-hand side.
24
POWERSHIFT
27
Fig. 13 - The POWERSHIFT solenoid valve block is removed

by pulling it outwards after having disconnected the pipes
and removed the retaining screws.
Fig. 14 - Remove the hydraulic lubrication pipe of the

POWERSHIFT unit by first disconnecting the part on the outside of the gearbox.
Fig. 15 - Disconnect the delivery line from the POWERSHIFT

unit by unscrewing the union.
Fig. 16 - Using a drift as shown in the figure, drive the

POWERSHIFT unit out of the front of the gearbox.
Fig. 17 - Remove the POWERSHIFT unit from the front end of

the gearbox.
Fig. 18 - After having removed the POWERSHIFT unit, proceed with its disassembly, if necessary. Then remove the
epicyclic reduction unit.
25
27
POWERSHIFT
Fig. 19 - Remove the planet carrier flange from the epicyclic

reduction unit.
Fig. 20 - Remove the circlip and the thrust washer. On

re-assembly, the thrust washer must be fitted with the lubrica tion channels facing inwards towards the planet carrier flange
Fig. 21 - The play adjustment shim for the POWERSHIFT

shafts is located between the housing and the epicyclic reduction unit.
Fig. 22 - To dismantle the POWERSHIFT unit, remove the

circlip indicated in the figure.
Fig. 23 - Remove the circlip indicated in the figure using a pair

of bent nose pliers.
Fig. 24 - Remove the thrust washer.
26
POWERSHIFT
27
Fig. 25 - Unscrew the screws securing the LOW clutch hous ing to the POWERSHIFT unit.
Fig. 26 - Remove the retaining screws.
Fig. 27 - It is advisable to mark the relative positions of the

parts prior to disassembly.
Fig. 28 - Using a screwdriver, separate the housing from the

unit.
Fig. 29 - Remove the LOW clutch disc pack (7+7).
Fig. 30 - Inspect the clutch discs for wear.
27
27
POWERSHIFT
Fig. 31 - Remove the circlip securing the hub of the LOW

clutch.
Fig. 32 - Remove the hub of the LOW clutch.
Fig. 33 - Remove the circlip located behind the hub of the

LOW clutch.
Fig. 34 - Proceed with the disassembly of the housing of the

MEDIUM-LOW" clutches.
Fig. 35 - Using a drift, separate the MEDIUM-LOW housing

from the rest of the unit.
Fig. 36 - Detach the MEDIUM-LOW housing from the unit.
28
POWERSHIFT
27
Fig. 37 - Remove the Belleville springs from the MEDIUM

clutch.
Fig. 38 - Remove the discs from the MEDIUM clutch.
Fig. 39 - MEDIUM clutch discs (4 friction discs+3

counterdiscs+2 thrust plates).
Fig. 40 - The control piston of the LOW clutch may be removed from the MEDIUM-LOW bell-housing using a press
of the type illustrated below.
Fig. 41 - This piston can be removed by removing the circlip of

the piston return spring located on the opposite end of the
housing.
Fig. 42 - Remove the LOW clutch shaft.
29
27
POWERSHIFT
Fig. 43 - Check that the oil ways in the shaft are not obstructed.
Fig. 44 - The LOW clutch control piston can be removed from

the housing using a press of the type illustrated below.
Fig. 45 - This piston can be removed by removing the circlip of

the piston return spring located on the opposite end of the
housing.
Fig. 46 - Remove the circlip securing the HIGH clutch discs.
Fig. 47 - Remove the thrust washer of the HIGH clutch.
Fig. 48 - Remove the HIGH clutch disc pack (2 friction discs +

2 counterdiscs + 1 thrust plate).
30
POWERSHIFT
27
Fig. 49 - HIGH clutch discs.
Fig. 50 - HIGH clutch control piston.
Fig. 51 - Separate the HIGH clutch housing from the MEDIUM

clutch housing using a press to compress the springs and remove the circlip.
Fig. 52 - Remove the MEDIUM clutch hub and then the relative housing.
Fig. 53 - VESPEL seals of the HIGH clutch housing.
Fig. 54 - Remove the HIGH clutch housing.
31
27
POWERSHIFT
Fig. 55 - Remove the Belleville return springs of the HIGH

clutch control piston from the MEDIUM shaft.
Fig. 56 - Examine the condition of the VESPEL seals on the

HIGH clutch housing.
Fig. 57 - If necessary, remove the circlip and remove the

bearing from the MEDIUM clutch housing.
Fig. 58 - Remove the piston from the MEDIUM clutch hous ing.
Fig. 59 - Examine the condition of the seal ring of the piston

from the MEDIUM clutch housing.
Fig. 60 - Proceed to dismantle the LOW clutch control piston

with the aid of a press.
32
POWERSHIFT
27
Fig. 61 - Remove the circlip securing the springs.
Fig. 62 - Remove the assembly from the press and remove

the Belleville springs.
Fig. 63 - Disassembly sequence for the 5 Belleville washers.
Fig. 64 - Remove the piston.
Fig. 65 - Groove for O-ring in the LOW clutch housing.
Fig. 66 - Examine the condition of seal ring of the piston from

the LOW clutch housing.
33
27
POWERSHIFT
A - Cover
B - LOW clutch
C - LOW clutch control piston
D - Clutch housing
MEDIUM - LOW
E - LOW clutch belleville springs
F - MEDIUM clutch belleville springs
G - Actuator disc
H - MEDIUM clutch
Fig. 67 - POWERSHIFT unit
34
I - Seeger
L - Clutch hub
M - Thrust plate
N - Bearing
O - Thrust plate
P - MEDIUM clutch control piston
Q - HIGH clutch housing
R - HIGH clutch control piston
S - HIGH clutch
T - LOW sun wheel

U - Planet carrier
V - Thrust washer
Z - Ring gear
X - Planet gears
J - LOW shaft
Y - MEDIUM shaft
W - Secondary shaft
K - Reduction unit shaft
POWERSHIFT
27
Assembly of POWERSHIFT unit
Fig. 68 - Components of POWERSHIFT unit
The POWERSHIFT unit requires that the basic gearbox, with respect top the standard version, is equipped with a secondary shaft A and a range input shaft B, of specific type.
Warning: no special tools are required to re-assemble this unit, just an M8x1.25x30 screw to hold the central shaft C in
position during POWERSHIFT play adjustment.
Assemble the unit as follows:
Fit the input ring gear D to the secondary shaft, securing it with circlip E;
Separately assemble LOW gear F with the planet carrier flange G . When fitting gear F, the planets must be positio ned so that their punch marks are aligned with the position reference marks on the carrier flange, (Fig. 69).
Timing reference countermark
Fig. 69 - Timing the epicyclic speed reducer of the POWERSHIFT unit.
35
27
POWERSHIFT
Timing marks on gear teeth of the epicyclic reduction of the POWERSHIFT unit.
Fig. 70 - Pre-assembly of parts on MEDIUM shaft.
36
Fig. Pre-assembly of MEDIUM-LOW clutches.
POWERSHIFT
27
RE-ASSEMBLY OF THE POWERSHIFT UNIT.
Fig. 72 - Assemble the HIGH clutch. Fit the bearing with the
relative snap rings in the MEDIUM clutch housing; fit the hub
securing it with the relative circlip and fit the three service
circlips to the housing. Fit the O-ring seals to the piston , then
fit the piston.
Fig. 73 - Fit the LOW shaft, the relative roller bearings, and
position the snap ring.
Fig. 74 - Fit the MEDIUM clutch discs.
Fig. 75 - Apply Loctite 510 sealing compound to the housing

contact surfaces as shown in the figure.
WARNING: when applying sealing compound take care not
to obstruct the oil ways.
Fig. 76 - Fit the circlip and check that the shaft has certain
amount of play.
Fig. 77 - Fit the MEDIUM clutch thrust washer with outlets oriented towards the circlip.
37
27
POWERSHIFT
Fig. 78 - Join the two housings together; the studs will locate
in the 3 holes to ensure the correct relative positions of the
two housings. Rotate the shaft during this operation so as to
centre the clutch discs.
Fig. 79 - Note that a small space will be left between the two
housings; this is to allow preloading of the Belleville springs
when the screws are tightened.
Fig. 80 - Fit the LOW clutch, first positioning the circlip on the
shaft as indicated in the figure.
Fig. 81 - Then fit the clutch hub and position the second
circlip.
Fig. 82 - Then install the discs of the LOW clutch.
38
Fig. 83 - The disc pack is completed with a final friction disc,

the tabs of which do not engage the splines on the hub, and
therefore, when refitting the cover, it is advisable not to rotate
the shaft so as to allow the disc tabs to mesh correctly with the
hub.
POWERSHIFT
27
ADJUSTMENT OF END FLOAT IN THE POWERSHIFT UNIT (fig. 84)

Screw one M8x1,25x30 bolt finger tight into the cover W (fig 84), so as to hold the centre shaft of the H-M-L unit in position during the adjustment.
Measure dimensions X and Y with a gauge then calculate (X - Y - 1 mm) , which gives the thickness of the thrust washer
K to fit.
Example:
values measured
X = 191,88
Y = 188,24
(191,88 - 188,24 - 1) = 2,64 ~ 2,6 mm (2.1599.727.0/10 washer required)

IMPORTANT: the thrust washer must be selected from those available to give either the exact thickness, or the next
thickness down from the value calculated.
washer p/n:
2.1599.725.0/10
thicknesst 2.2 mm
2.1599.726.0/10
thicknesst 2.4 mm
2.1599.727.0/10
thicknesst 2.6 mm
2.1599.728.0/10
thicknesst 2.8 mm
2.1599.729.0/10
thicknesst 3 mm
2.1599.730.0/10
thicknesst 3.2 mm
2.1599.731.0/10
thicknesst 3.4 mm
2.1599.732.0/10
thicknesst 3.6 mm
2.1599.733.0/10
thicknesst 3.8 mm
2.1599.734.0/10
thicknesst 4 mm
Fit a shim of the predetermined thickness on the LOW shaft with the relative circlip
Fit the epicyclic reduction unit in the gearbox and then fit the POWERSHIFT clutches unit, applying Silastic sealing
compound to the contact surfaces.
Fig. 84 - Location of the preassembled POWERSHIFT unit in its housing.
39
27
POWERSHIFT
A - pressure regulator valve

(operating pressure 16 bar)
B - gearbox lubrication oil
pressure setting valve (setting 5 bar)
C - anticavitation valve for safety
steering (30 l/min.)
D - oil pump (capacity 10 to 27 l/min.)
E - suction filter (25 micron)
Fig. 85 - Hydraulic diagram illustrating operation.
40
F - solenoid control valves

G - electro-hydraulic control unit
H - anticavitation valve for safety steering
I - bistable valve
L - safety steering valve
M1 - pressure gauge with scale 0 - 40 bar
T - lubrication
POWERSHIFT
27
Fig. 86 - Electrohydraulic control unit for POWERSHIFT system.
PROCEDURE FOR CHECKING THE H-M-L CONTROL UNIT INLET PRESSURE
Referring to Fig. 86:

1 - Connect pressure gauge 5.9030.514.0 (0 40 bar) at position M1.
2 - Connect pressure gauge 5.9030.515.0 (0 10 bar) at position M2.
Start the engine and throttle up to the revolutions indicated in the table; now verify that the inlet pressures are as prescribed.
NB: Pressure tests should be conducted using oil at a temperature of 80 C.
A - Test fitting for testing pressure of LOW clutch hydraulic circuit

B - Bistable valve
C - Valve body
D - Non-return valve
E - Non-return valve
F - Oil pressure regulator valve
G - Lubrication pressure control valve
H - Delivery line to P.T.O.
I - Delivery line to differential lock
L - P.T.O. lubrication pipe
M - P.T.O. disk lubrification manifold
N - Manifold for P.T.O. clutch oil pipe
O - Secondary shaft and POWERSHIFT lubrification pipe
P - Pipe from radiator oil to the gearbox
Q - Delivery line to front-wheel drive engagement piston
M1 - Pressure gauge with scale 0 - 40 bar
M2 - Pressure gauge for P.T.O. lubrication pipe
M3 - Pressure gauge with scale 0 - 40 bar for pressure at P.T.O.
41
27
POWERSHIFT
A - Gearbox lubrication oil pressure

control valve (5 bar)
B - Non-return valve 30 l/min
C - Sequence valve
(operating pressure 16 bar)
D - Non-return valve
T - Return
L1- P.T.O. clutch line
L2- Secondary shaft and POWERSHIFT
lubrication
Fig. 87 - POWERSHIFT pressure control valves assembly
42
POWERSHIFT
27
Fig. 88 - Hydraulic control circuit.
43

check the clutch

assembly hydraulic
system
clutch slips
check piston
free stroke
for
replace the defective parts
examine piston and

manifold seal rings
replace
defective parts
remove any roughness preventing

piston from sliding
freely
check the clutch

plates for wear
replace the clutch

disks
inspect the control

mechanism
replace
parts
defective
replace the disks

inspect the disks
burnt disks
clutch wont
disengage
jammed disks
piston jammed in
seat
44
relpace the piston
remove any roug hness preventing

disks from sliding
freely
Transmission
Gearbox
31
The basic transmission utilizes 5 speed synchromesh gearbox with 2 or 3 speed ranges.
A shuttle, fitted as standard, makes the tractor easy to handle and manoeuvre.
Options include Creeper, and Underdrive (in place of or in addition), giving a total of:
For tractors equipped with platform or cab
20 FWD + 10 REV: 5 gears x 2 ranges (L-V) + mini-reduction + reverser shuttle
30 FWD + 15 REV: 5 gears x 3 ranges (SR-L-V) + mini-reduction + reverser shuttle.
45 FWD + 45 REV: 5 gears x 3 ranges (SR-L-V) + reverser shuttle + POWERSHIFT
Each version is also available with 30 or 40 km/h top speed.
number of speeds
gearbox ratios
shuttle
range ratios
rear axle ratios bevel gear pair
20 AV + 10 RM
1st gear
2nd gear
3rd gear
4th gear
5th gear
19/59 = 1/3,1053
23/50 = 1/2,1739
29/44 = 1/1,5172
35/38 = 1/1,0857
41/32 = 1/0,7805
forward
reverse
29/37 = 1/0,7838
23/19 = 1/0,8261
low
high
30 km/h
40 km/h
epicyclic final drive

overall ratio
backlash between crownwheel
and pinion teeth
30 km/h
40 kmIh
1/32,9063
1/24,7502
mm
0,18 - 0,24
32/34 = 1/0,9412
Super-reduction
reference distance for adjustment

of bevel gear pai
8/39 = 1/4,8750
9/33 = 1/3,6667
(12/12+69) = 1/6,7500
Mini-reduction
axial play of the secondary shaft
axial play of the gears of the change,
of the reverser and mini-reduction
(19/50)x(22/46)= 1/5,5024
1
(19/50)x(22/46)x(19/50)x(20/48) = 1/34,7520
mm
0,09
mm
0,15 0,30
rmm
2,5 0,1
45
Transmission
31
Gearbox
Speed change configurations

Powershift
control
Gearshifting
Control
Synchrosplit
control
Speed range
Control
NO. OF SPEED
(forward + reverse)
20 + 10
30 +15
45 + 45
DURING TRANSPORT OPERATIONS ON PUBLIC ROADS BOTH BRAKE PEDALS MUST BE

OBLIGATORILY COUPLED BY MEANS OF THE SPECIAL LOCKING LATCH. IN ANY CASE,
ALWAYS OBSERVE LAWS AND REGULATIONS IN FORCE.
46
Transmission
Gearbox
31
* see technical characteristics of gearbox on p. 45

** see technical characteristics of 4wd front axle on p. 115
Fig. 2 - Ratios of 5-speed x 2 range transmission with mini-reduction (20 FWD + 10 REV).
47
Transmission
31
Gearbox

Ratios of 5-speed x 2 range transmission with mini-reduction and super-reduction (30 FWD + 15 REV).
48
Transmission
Gearbox
31

Fig. 3 - Ratios of transmission with 3 ranges (Super-reduction) + POWERSHIFT (45 FWD + 45 REV).
49
Transmission
31
Gearbox
Assemble the front and rear gearboxes and the rear hydraulic lift,
after having applied PIANERMETIC 510 to surfaces A
and LOCTITE 636 to bushes B.
Fig. 4 - Front and rear gearbox.
50
Transmission
Gearbox
31
Fig. 5 - Longitudinal section through transmission.
51
Transmission
31
Gearbox
Fig. 6 - Longitudinal section through transmission with POWERSHIFT unit.
52
Transmission
Gearbox
31
Fig. 7 - Rear axle longitudinal section.
53
Transmission
31
Gearbox
B
A
Fig. 8 - Inversor lever (A -Side view and B -Front view) - C - Range reduction lever. X - Version with Mini-reduction Y - Version without Mini-reduction
54
Fig. 9 - Gear lever.
Transmission
Gearbox
31
Fig. 10 - Front view of gearbox with FULLDRIVE.
55
Transmission
31
Gearbox
Fig. 11- Views of the gearbox.
56
Transmission
Gearbox
31
Asse ruota
97080.2
+0.2
3.2
M16x1.5
127
1.5
70.7
0.1
0.4
0.25-0.75
Fig. 12 - Electro - hydraulic control for front-wheel drive engagement/disengagement.
57
Transmission
31
Gearbox
Fig. 13 - Gear selector rod. A - bolts securing hubs to rod.
58
Fig. 14 - Gear selector rod. B - C - bolts securing hubs to rod.
Transmission
Gearbox
31
Range selector rods and forks
Correct positioning of the gearbox, shuttle and range control levers.

Fit the gearbox, shuttle and range control levers so that the grooves are oriented as shown in the figure.
Fig. 15 - Range selector rod. D - bolt securing hub to rod.
Fig. 16 - Correct positioning of the gearbox, shuttle and range control levers.
59
Transmission
31
Gearbox
REMOVAL AND REFITTING OPERATIONS
Removal of the front gearbox without removing the platform
Disconnect the bracket located in the central part of the cable/pipe duct positioned above the engine, and disconnect the
oil delivery line to the oil cooler from the hydrostatic steering control valve (this pipe is to be disconnected at its middle
part).
Disconnect the front hydraulic lift delivery line from the cock located at the rear of the tractor above the lift.
Position tool 5.9030.002.0 (mobile stands on tracks) to support the front and rear gearboxes, then remove all the screws
connecting the two gearboxes together.
Place wedges under the front axle support and remove the rear wheels;
Disconnect the 3 pipes (supply, return and breather) and disconnect the electrical lead of the fuel level sensor;
Loosen the screws securing the fuel tank supports and remove the tank.
Put the gear lever in neutral and loosen the two screws securing the relay hub complete with the lower rod which enters
the gearbox and then remove the hub.
Put the inversor control lever in neutral and loosen the screw securing the lever in the control rod housing; remove the two
relay hub retaining screws and remove the hub itself.
Disconnect the rear brake pipes which pass over the two gearboxes, collecting the oil in a suitable container (all the oil in
the brake oil reservoir will drain out).
Loosen the hex socket screw (or the two hex socket screws if the tractor is fitted with a minireduction unit) securing the
gear control rod (see fig. 28 page 62).
Remove the two screws securing the platform to the front silent-blocks, and raise the front of the platform a few centimetres using a hoist or a support with adjustment screw;
this operation is necessary in order to access and loosen the two upper gearbox retaining screws.
Holding the rear gearbox in position, move the front wheels to separate the two gearboxes (time required 3,5 to 4 hours)
Remove the guard from the front-wheel drive transmission shaft, then release the sleeve coupling the transmission shaft
to the gearbox, by removing the snap ring securing the lock pin and then removing the pin.
WARNING: under no circumstances undo union B Fig 19 (hex head), located on the left-hand side of the gearbox.
Slide the sleeve towards the front of the tractor in order to disengage the transmission shaft from the gearbox output shaft.
This union holds the oil manifold D Fig. 19 for engagement of the front-wheel drive transmission shaft. If this union is removed, the manifold would rotate downwards, thereby making it necessary to dismantle the gear hub in order to reposition it and
refit the union.
Using a pair of long-nose pliers, remove the circlip from the gearbox output shaft, thereby allowing the shaft to be
withdrawn from the front gearbox.
Disconnect the oil delivery and return lines from the oil cooler located under the platform and to the right of the rear gear box (relative to the driving position). The return line is connected to the POWERSHIFT solenoid control valves as the oil
returning from the cooler in the front engine compartment supplies the electro-hydraulic POWERSHIFT control circuit.
The delivery pipe C Fig. 19 of the front-wheel drive engagement actuator is connected at the opposite end, inside the gearbox, to the group of solenoid control valves for the hydraulic services E Fig. 19; if this group is to be removed, undo union A
Fig. 19, to prevent deformation of the internal pipe.
Disconnect the oil line between the POWERSHIFT control unit and the electro-hydraulic services control valve group,
then remove the POWERSHIFTsolenoid control valve block, after having disconnected the electrical leads from the solenoid valves.
Disconnect the lubrication line from the solenoid valve block for electro-hydraulic controls to the gearbox.
Remove the tool box positioned on the right-hand side of the tractor under the driving platform.
Unscrew the oil drain plug located under the rear gearbox (a container of at least 33 litres will be required to collect the oil).
Disconnect all electrical leads from the starter motor and the lead connected to the engine oil pressure switch.
Unplug the bulkhead connector for the wires to the group of dashboard warning lights.
Detach the retaining strap of the brake/clutch oil reservoir, disconnect the level sensor lead and remove the reservoir (the
reservoir will remain connected to its delivery lines).
Detach the throttle and engine stop Bowden control cables from the governor.
Disconnect the two oil delivery-return lines from the hydrostatic steering cylinder in the area above the engine and near
the dashboard.
Fig. 17 - Gearbox removal.
60
Transmission
Gearbox
31
Fig. 18 - Separate the rear gearbox from the front gearbox
Separating the front gearbox from the engine

(this operation is necessary in order to access the POWERSHIFT unit)
Remove the engine pick-up from the top of the gearbox (in the area of the spacer housing).
Place wedges under the front axle support.
Disconnect the fuel delivery pipe in the area between the front gearbox and the engine.
Disconnect the two front brake pipes and the differential lock control pipe.
Support the front gearbox on a stand.
Remove the 10 screws securing the front gearbox to the engine flange, then detach the gearbox.
61
3
31
Transmission
Gearbox
Dismantling the gearbox.

Remove the 8 screws securing the top cover and then remove the cover itself.
Remove the gearbox clutch control located in the spacer housing as follows:
Remove the thrust bearing.

Remove the lock pin and withdraw the control lever.
Undo the union and remove the oil delivery pipe to the POWERSHIFT unit.
Unscrew the 2 screws and the 2 nuts securing the POWERSHIFT unit;
Remove the 2 retaining screws of the POWERSHIFT control valve unit, (one of these screws also secures the fuel
prefilter with the relative pipe).
NOTE: one of the screws has an extension with a small plate to support the clutch control lever; these parts are to be re moved together with the screw.
Removal of the gearbox input and P.T.O. shafts

Remove the circlip attaching the gearbox input shaft to the inversor shaft coupling sleeve.
Withdraw the 2 shafts from the front of the spacer housing (the shafts should be withdrawn together to prevent damage
to the seal ring positioned between them).
NOTE: To replace the seal on the gearbox input shaft, it will be necessary to remove the cab or platform to gain access
to the upper cover of the gearbox, from which the seal housing may be accessed.
Separating the POWERSHIFT unit from the gearbox
Using a copper drift, tap the housing of the POWERSHIFT unit in order to extract from the front part of the spacer housing;
(if the purpose of this operation is solely to inspect or replace the hydraulic clutches, it will not be necessary to remove the epicyclic reduction unit from the gearbox or to remove the cab/platform).
If instead the epicyclic reduction unit is to be removed, simply withdraw it from the front of the gearbox, then remove
the calibrated thrust washer and the circlip, and then remove the housing complete with the ring gear.
The POWERSHIFT clutch units are to dismantled on the bench.
NOTE: for instructions on dismantling the POWERSHIFT unit, see page 24.
62
Transmission
Gearbox
31
Removal of the gear train positioned in the front gearbox

WARNING: On tractors equipped with POWERSHIFT, first follow the instructions to remove the POWERSHIFT unit
and the gearbox input and P.T.O. shafts.
For the following operations the driving platform or cab must be removed in order to gain access to the upper gearbox
cover.
Before proceeding with the removal of the gear train, it is necessary to remove the selector rods and forks. These operations are only possible after having separated the rear gearbox from the front; before separating the two gearboxes, remove D fig. 5 on page 51.
Detach the front gearbox from the rear gearbox. To do this, it will be necessary to remove the 5 speed relay hub together
with the intermediate support, located on the right-hand side of the rear gearbox. Remove screw A (fig. 14) screws B
(fig. 15) and screw D (fig. 16).
NB: Remove the selector rod detent balls and springs by unscrewing the relative plugs located on the right-hand side of
the gearbox. Then proceed with the separation of the two gearboxes.
The 3 gearbox shafts (inversor, primary and secondary) and the gear selector and inversor control rods and forks will
remain attached to the front gearbox. To remove these rods, it will first be necessary to remove the 3 shafts by removing
the 3 circlips A - B - C fig. 5 on page 51 and then moving all 3 shafts simultaneously backwards to disengage them from
their housings; the first shaft to be detached will be the primary shaft, followed by the secondary, and then the input shaft
located at the uppermost part of the gearbox is to be withdrawn. Each selector rod will come away together with its shaft.
M16x1.5
Fig. 19 - Oil pipe from the solenoid control valve to the hydraulic actuator responsible for engaging/disengaging front-wheel drive.
A Pipe union on solenoid valve end
B Pipe union on actuator ende
C Connection pipe.
D Manifold
E Solenoid valve assembly
63
Transmission
31
Gearbox
Fig. 20 - Retaining screws of the gear rods to be

removed prior to detaching the front gearbox from
the rear gearbox.
A retaining screw of the inversor control
rod hub
B
retaining screws of the gear control

rod hubs.
C Range gear control rod.

D Gearchange control rod.
E Inversor/minireduction control rod.
Disassembly of the inversor control rods and forks

Disengage the fork from the sleeve and rotate it so that the hole in the fork is aligned with the retaining pin; then, using a
drift as shown in figure 23, tap the pin out of the hole.
On tractor equipped with a minireduction unit, repeat the above operations to remove the second selector fork.
Fig. 21 - Components of inversor rod and fork assemblye for

gearbox with minireduction.
Fig. 22 - Rod and fork for gearbox without minireduction.
Fig. 23 - Removal of the fork retaining pin.
Fig. 24 - Removal of fork from control rod.
64
Transmission
Gearbox
31
Dismantling of the gearchange rod and fork assembly.
Fig. 25 - Detach the rod with forks from the secondary shaft
by moving it laterally
Fig. 26 - Remove the screw securing the rod hub and remove
the hub from the rod.
Fig. 27 - Disengage the 1st gear selector fork from the sleeve
and rotate it to align the hole on the fork with the retaining pin.
Then, using a suitable drift, drive the pin out of the hole.
Detach the 2nd and 3rd gear selector forks and sleeves in the
same way.
Fig. 28 - Withdraw the gearchange control rod.
Fig. 29 - Remove the sleeve located on the rod between selector fork.
Fig. 30 - Rotate the 4th and 5th gear the two forks. so that the
hole on the fork is aligned with the retaining pin, then using a
drift and a hammer as shown in figure 23, drive the pin out of
the hole (the figure shows the components of the selector rods
and forks assembly).
65
Transmission
31
Gearbox
Dismantling of the gearchange selector rods and forks assembly
Fig. 31 - Unscrew the 6 retaining screws and remove the

cover giving access to the gearchange selector rods and
forks assembly. Then using a spanner, unscrew the guide
bolt of the super-reduction control fork.
Fig. 32 - Unscrew the guide screw of the central sleeve lo cated between the 2 forks. (NB. Loctite has been applied to
these screws; we recommend that they are heated using an
oxyacetylene torch to facilitate removal).
Fig. 33 - Unscrew the guide screw of the L-V selector fork.
Fig. 34 - Access the front compartment of the gearbox extract

the rod by pulling the hub.
Fig. 35 - Remove all the parts mounted on the rod, recovering

them from the lateral access hole.
Fig. 36 - Parts comprising the selector rod and forks them

from the lateral access hole assembly for the super-reduction
unit and range gears.
66
Transmission
Gearbox
31
Removal of the shaft with the actuator for engagement/disengagement of the front-wheel drive
Separate the rear gearbox from the front gearbox, (it is first necessary to remove circlip (A fig 37). Unscrew union B ( fig
19 page 63) located on the left-hand side of the rear gearbox and remove the front shaft complete with the front-wheel
drive actuator.
IMPORTANT: Only unscrew union B fig. (19 page 63) located on the left-hand side of the rear gearbox when the two
gearboxes are separated, as refitting is only possible in this condition.
Disassemble the unit, removing the circlip securing the oil manifold and the circlip securing the thrust plate of the helical
spring; then disassemble the unit into its component parts, inspecting for wear the two oil seals (on the shaft and in con tact with the control piston) and the areas in contact with the oil manifold.
WARNING: the valve located inside the shaft must be positioned as shown on page 75.
DE F
CB
Fig. 37 - Front-wheel drive output.
Removal of the range gear shaft

Separate the rear gearbox from the front gearbox, (it is first necessary to remove circlip A fig. 37) remove the right rear
wheel support and the cover on which the electro-hydraulic control valves are mounted, detach the oil pipe for 4WD disengagement by undoing union B (fig. 19 on page 65) located on the solenoid valve mounting on the right-hand side of
the gearbox. Remove the cover supporting the internal parking brake control.
Then remove the synchronised P.T.O. shaft by removing the retaining flange mounted on the rear of the gearbox and
remove the synchronised P.T.O. engagement sleeve mounted on the 4WD shaft, which can be accessed through the
space left void by removal of the wheel support.
Remove circlip B fig. 37 and thrust plate C fig. 37, which can be accessed through the space created by removal of the
wheel support.
Working through the aperture created by removal of the cover on which the electro-hydraulic control valves are moun ted, remove circlips D - E - F - G fig. 37 and pull shaft towards the front of the gearbox.
67
Transmission
31
Gearbox
Examining parts removed
Gearbox case
Gearbox case should show no cracks, bearing seats must not be
worn or damaged.
If seriuos damage or excessive wear is occured replace the parts
concerned.
Fig. 38 - Equipment 5.9030.002.0 for the dismantling the gearbox.
Whenever the gearbox is disassembled clean all sealing surfaces

removing old adhesive and applying some new on all surfaces
evenly when reassembling.
Shafts
Examine shafts for excessive wear and shaft splines for pitting,
these should allow the gears to slide freely.
Gears
Examine gear teeth for wear or damage and make sure these
work on the whole contact surface.
Check also the gear-mounted bushings for seizing: if so replace
them.
Synchronizers
Fig. 39 - Visual control of the tooth of the gears.
Check the ring inside tapered portion for excessive wear or dama ge and be sure the gear part being frictioned by the synchronizer
does not show signs of scoring which may prevent the gear from
meshing correctly.
To check the synchronizer ring for wear, measure the distance
+ 0, 3
from the friction cone; reading should be 125
, - 0,15 mm with a new
synchronizer or drop to zero when the ring is maximally worn.
Bearings
Fig. 40 - Unit synchronizer.
Bearings should be in perfect conditions without showing excessive radial or end play.
Holding the bearings pressed by hand and making them simultaneously turn in both directions of rotation a free sliding as well as
no roughness at all should be felt.
Examine the taper roller bearings for proper working conditions,
these should be neither worn nor overheated, replace as soon as
poor working efficiency is suspected, as an abnormal bearing
operation may result in either gear tooth seizure or noisy gearbox.
Warning: oil leakages from the clutch-disk-to-gearbox shaft or
the engine-flywheel-to-P.T.O.-clutch shaft may be stopped when
the assembly procedure is performed with the utmost care and
operating in such a way that the splined parts are prevented from
damaging the O-ring and also providing a thorough cleaning of the
parts prior to being installed.
Fig. 41 - Checking slide of the bearing.
68
Transmission
Gearbox
31
ADJUSTING PLAY OF THE GEARBOX SHAFTS BY MEANS OF THE THRUST PLATES ON

THE MINI/INVERSOR SHAFT AND THE SECONDARY SHAFT
MINI/INVERSOR SHAFTS
Circlip position for measurement of distance X
Adjusting the play of the minireduction gear mounted on the inversor shaft.
Obtain an play X of 0.15 0.30 mm of minireduction gear (z=35) by selecting the thrust plate R of the appropriate thickness from among those available:
cod.
008.0251.0
010.0629.0
010.0630.0
010.0631.0
010.0632.0
Play X is to be measured by pushing the spacer B in the direction indicated by the arrow up to the point where the
synchroniser is pushed up against point Y, while simultaneously pushing the forward speed gear (z=37) in the direction
indicated by the arrow up against circlip A.
Adjusting the play of the forward speed gear on the inversor shaft (version with minireduction).
Obtain an play X of 0.15 0.30 mm of the forward speed gear (z=35) by selecting the thrust plate R of the appropriate
thickness from among those available:
cod.
008.0251.0
010.0629.0
010.0630.0
010.0631.0
010.0632.0
Play X is to be measured by pushing the gear (z=23) in the direction indicated by the arrow so that the synchroniser is
pushed up against point Y, while simultaneously pushing the minireduction gear (z=35) in the direction indicated by the
arrow up against circlip A.
69
Transmission
31
Gearbox
REVERSE SHAFT
Adjusting the play of the reverse gearwheel mounted on the shuttle shaft.
Obtain play X of 0.15 to 0.30 mm of reverse gearwheel (z = 23) by selecting and fitting a thrust washer R of suitable thickness from those available:
cod.
008.0251.0
010.0629.0
010.0630.0
010.0631.0
010.0632.0
Play X is measured by pushing the forward gearwheel (z=37) in the direction indicated by the arrow, thereby pushing
the synchronizer up against point Y and pushing the circlip A as indicated in the detail.
SECONDARY SHAFT 1st SPEED
Adjusting the play of the 1st speed gear (z=59).

Obtain an play X of 0.15 0.30 mm of the 1st speed gear (z=59) by selecting the thrust plate R of the appropriate thickness from among those available:
cod.
008.0251.0
010.0629.0
010.0630.0
010.0631.0
010.0632.0
Play X is to be measured with a feeler gauge while pushing spacer B in the direction indicated by the arrow so that the
synchroniser is pushed up against point Y, while simultaneously pushing the 2nd speed gear (z=50) in the direction indicated by the arrow up against circlip A.
70
Transmission
Gearbox
31
SECONDARY SHAFT 2nd/3th SPEED

Adjusting play of 2nd speed gear cluster
Obtain play X of 0.15 0.30 mm of the 2nd speed gear cluster by selecting a thrust washer R of the appropriate thickness from among those available:
cod.
008.0251.0
010.0629.0
010.0630.0
010.0631.0
010.0632.0
Play X is to be measured using a feeler gauge while pushing the 3rd speed gear in the direction of the arrow, thereby pushing the synchronizer up against point Y and pushing the circlip A as indicated in the detail.

Adjusting play of 3rd speed gear
Obtain a play X of 0.15 0.30 mm of the 3rd speed gear by selecting a thrust washer R of the appropriate thickness from
among those available:
cod.
008.0251.0
010.0629.0
010.0630.0
010.0631.0
010.0632.0
71
Transmission
31
Gearbox
SECONDARY SHAFT 4th/5th SPEED
Circlip position for measurement of distance "X"

Adjusting the play of the 4th speed gear cluster.
Obtain a play X of 0.15 to 0.30 mm of the 4th speed gear cluster by selecting and fitting a thrust washer R of the appropriate thickness from those available:
cod.
008.0251.0
010.0629.0
010.0630.0
010.0631.0
010.0632.0
SECONDARY SHAFT
INPUT SHAFT AND INVERSOR SHAFT
Shimming the front bearing of the secondary shaft

Fit shims of appropriate thickness to reduce
end-float between the shaft and the bearing
to the minimum possible amount. By fitting
the correct shims you can obtain a maximum play of 0.09 mm.
Fitting the bush joining the input shaft to the inversor shaft
Fit bush A oriented as shown in the figure to facilitate subsequent
removal.
72
Transmission
Gearbox
31
Fitting the spacer determining the stroke of the valve for hydraulic disengagement of front-wheel drive.
To allow correct disengagement of the front-wheel drive, bush A must be installed as shown in the figure above.
WARNINGS RELATED TO ASSEMBLY OF THE GEARS OF THE P.T.O. UNIT, THE RANGE
REDUCTION UNIT AND THE SYNCHRONISED P.T.O. SHAFT
Assembly of the P.T.O.
Install:
The synchronised P.T.O. output shaft (to be installed after the range reduction unit);
The P.T.O. output shaft and relative gears;
The rear P.T.O. Shaft.
Installation of the range reduction unit, the gear for the front-wheel drive shaft and the parking brake discs
Position on the bottom of the gearbox the L-V range reduction unit (complete with bushes and roller cage) and the
super-reduction gear (complete with roller cage).
Slide the shaft, complete with circlip, through the front end of the gearbox, and fit the previously positioned gears
onto the shaft.
Fit the thrust washer and 2 circlips.
Position the drive gear of the front-wheel drive complete with parking brake discs.
Fit the ball bearing for the rear end of the shaft, inserting it in its housing in the gearbox.
Insert the thrust washer and position the circlip.
Position the bearing and the bearing circlip in the housing;
Fit the thrust washer and the circlip;
Install the synchronised P.T.O. shaft in the rear end of the gearbox, and fit the control sleeve to the shaft.
Fit the bevel pinion and the gears of the range reduction unit with the relative synchroniser;
Fit the differential housing complete with the crown wheel and the internal differential lock control.
Warnings:
The spacer installed on the rear output shaft is fitted with an O-ring on the outer surface and an internal oil seal.
To remove this spacer requires the use of a puller to be attached to the spacer using the two holes provided.
At each dismantling of the pins of the brake and clutch control levers, check the bushes for wear.
73
Transmission
31
Gearbox
Fig. 42 - Range gearbox
Fig. 43 - Removal of the groundspeed P.T.O. sleeve.
Fig. 45 - Gears on range gearbox shaft.
74
Fig. 44 - Removal of the circlip securing the shaft.
Fig. 46 - Checking the oil seals on the 4WD shaft.
Transmission
Gearbox
31
Fig. 47 - Range gearbox synchronizer.
Fig. 48 - Secondary shaft cover plate
Range gearbox synchronizer.

Warning: the synchronizer hub must installed so that the
indicated by the arrow is positioned as shown in the figure.
Fitting the secondary shaft cover plate. Fit the cover A

applying LOCTITE 601 around the hole of the front gearbox
casing indicated X in the figure.
B - secondary shaft
Fig. 49 - Fitting the transmission speed sensor pickup.
75
Transmission
31
Gearbox
Fitting the baulk ring of the synchronizer for

the 1 speed gear mounted on the secondary shaft.
Should it be necessary to restore the correct
play X of 0.15 to 0.30 mm of the 1 speed
gear (z=59), it is possible to select a
synchroniser baulk ring of suitable thickness from the two available, as shown in
the figure.
Fig. 50 - it the 50x90x20 ball bearing, indicated A in the figure, without the
retaining ring.
Fig. 51 - Bearing for 4WD shaft.
Fig. 52 - Position the groundspeed P.T.O. cover plate as indicated

in the figure.
st
st
76
Transmission
Gearbox
31
Points where sealant is to be used
Fig. 53 - Rear gearbox.

Apply LOCTITE n 601 to the base of studs A (n 9) - B (n 1) - C (n 1), as shown in the figure, prior to assembly.
Fig. 54 - Fitting the wheel support.

Apply PIANERMETIC 510 sealant to the surfaces indicated with the letter L in the figure; apply SILASTIK sealant to the surfaces indicated with the letter S.
77
Transmission
31
Gearbox
11"
12"
Fig. 55 - Correct installation of the support tube for the clutch control sleeve.
Position the gearbox vertically with side A facing upwards. Apply Loctite 601 to the seat of the tube and fit the tube.
Wait about 1 hour before returning the gearbox to the horizontal position.
Tightening torques
Degrease and clean all bolts/screws before tightening.
Kgm
Nm
78
68 78
differential flange retaining bolts
58
bolts securing differential cage to half-shafts
58
9,2 10,3
90 100
10 12
98 115
9 12
88 107
bevel gear retaining nut
28 30
274 294
nuts securing gearbox to intermediate transmission casing
10 12
98 107
78
68 78
crown wheel retaining bolts
rear carrier retaining nuts

(on assembly apply PIANERMETIC 510 sealant to threads)
P.T.O. shaft retaining nut
gearbox-engine flange bolts
hex socket screws for reduction unit ring gear

(on assembly apply LOCTITE 242 to screws)
78
Transmission
Gearbox
31
IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS
Fig. 56 - Positioning of the 4WD shaft complete with engage ment/disengagement system. After positioning the shaft,
connect the oil manifold to solenoid control valve (located on
the mounting on the right-hand side of the gearbox) using the
specially shaped pipe.
Fig. 57 - After positioning the pipe, connect the oil manifold

by inserting union A from the left-hand side of the gearbox.
The PICK-UP speed sensor must be installed in hole B indicated by the arrow (see instructions on page 77).
Fig. 58 - The pipe connecting the hydraulic control of the

front-wheel drive must be connected to the solenoid valve
block at the external fitting indicated by the small arrow.
Fig. 59 - The POWERSHIFT unit is to be installed in the gearbox and the shaft end-float adjusted with the shaft engaged
with the epicyclic reduction unit.
Fig. 60 - End-float is to be adjusted by fitting a shim of appro priate thickness following the instructions given on page 35.
Fig. 61 - Checking shim thickness using a micrometer.
79
Transmission
31
Gearbox
Fig. 62 - Fitting the shim to adjust end-float of the

POWERSHIFT shaft.
Fig. 63 - Positioning the epicyclic reduction unit of the

POWERSHIFT in the front gearbox.
Fig. 64 - Fitting the epicyclic reduction unit inside the housing

previously attached to the gearbox output shaft.
Fig. 65 - POWERSHIFT unit installed in the gearbox.
Fig. 66 - Oil seal on shaft between clutch and gearbox. This

seal can be renewed by accessing the inside of the front
gearbox.
Fig. 67 - Positioning the P.T.O. clutch unit inside the ge arbox.
80
Transmission
Differential gear
35
Bevel drive adjustment (see figs. 1 and 3)

Install the pinion in the gearbox together with the bearings pack A (without interposing shims); position gear B and tighten ring nut to a torque of: 28 30 Kgm (275 294 Nm).
Fit the differential housing without the crown wheel; shim up the tapered bearings D and E so that they rotate freely in
the housings yet a slight preloading can be felt; then add a 0,1 mm. shim to the pack in order to preload the bearings.
Adjust the distance F between the differential housing and the head of the pinion, interposing shims in the position G indicated in figure 1; the exact measurement for this adjustment is obtained by adding or subtracting the value stamped
on one of the pinion teeth to/from the base value of 2.5 mm.
Secure the bearings pack by inserting a circlip (select one from those supplied in thicknesses of 2.8 3.6 mm. (see figure 1) which fits perfectly in the seating preventing any bearing play.
nstall the crown wheel in the differential housing and, with a dial gauge, measure the crown wheel/pinion backlash; the
correct value range is 0,17 0,23 mm for tractor in the version 30 Km/h and 0,20 0,27 mm for tractor in the version 40
Km/h (see figure 4 on page 82). If the measured backlash does not come within this range, remove shims from pack D
and add them to pack E, to move the crown wheel nearer to the pinion, or vice versa to move it further away.
NB.: On completion of the bevel drive adjustment operations, loosen off the ring nut, apply Loctite 270, then tighten to a
torque of 28 30 Kgm (275 294 Nm) and then stake the pinion retaining nut.
Tighten the crown wheel retaining screws to a torque of 7 8 kgm (68 78Nm).
Fig. 2 - Value stamped on a tooth of the pinion.
C - SNAP RING
2.1419.056.0/10
2.1419.057.0/10
2.1419.058.0/10
99x2,8
99x2,9
99x3,0
2.1419.059.0/10
2.1419.060.0/10
2.1419.061.0/10
2.1419.062.0/10
2.1419.063.0/10
2.1419.064.0/10
99x3,1
99x3,2
99x3,3
99x3,4
99x3,5
99x3,6
Fig. 1 - Shimming the bevel pinion.
Fig. 3 - Shimming the crown wheel.
81
Transmission
35
Differential gear
Fig. 4 - Checking the backlash between the crown wheel and pinion.
Servicing operations
Installation of the bevel drive without renewing any parts.
New adjustment is not required; make sure that the same shims packs are refitted in the same places, and check that
the distance between the head of the pinion and the differential housing is as prescribed.
Renewal of crown wheel bearings
Shim the bearings to obtain a preloading of 0,1 mm; then adjust backlash between the crown wheel and pinion.
Renewal of pinion bearings
The bevel drive will require adjustment.
Installing the rear differential lock
The rear differential lock system does not require any adjustment.
Fig. 5 - Parts comprising the differential unit.
82
Fig. 6 - Rear differential lock control.
Transmission
Power take-off
36
Rear power take-off

Rear P.T.O. gears
The rear P.T.O. shaft, directly coupled to the engine, is equipped with a selector allowing selection of P.T.O. speeds of
540/1000 rpm or, on request, 540-750-1000 rpm.
The selector is of the sliding sleeve type. The selector is mechanically controlled and can only be operated when the
moving parts are stationary. The P.T.O. output shaft rotates in a counter-clockwise direction, as viewed from the rear of
the tractor.
Fitting the rear P.T.O. output shaft
Before installing the studs, remove any oil/grease from the threads, then apply LOCTITE 242".
Technical characteristics
P.T.O. speeds
540 r.p.m.
540 r.p.m.
750 r.p.m.
750 r.p.m.
1000 r.p.m.
AGROPLUS 60
AGROPLUS 70 - 80
AGROPLUS 60
AGROPLUS 70 - 80
AGROPLUS 60 - 70 - 80
14/53
13/50
16/50
15/46
20/46
=
=
=
=
=
1/3,7857
1/3,8462
1/3,1250
1/3,0660
1/2,3000
P.T.O. r.p.m.
engine r.p.m.
P.T.O. r.p.m.
P.T.O. r.p.m.
engine r.p.m. at max

horsepower speed
P.T.O. r.p.m
engine r.p.m. at fas

idling speed
engine r.p.m. at fas

idling speed
for 60 HP
540 r.p.m.
(2045 engine r.p.m.)
620/2350
3,7857
(657/2490) (665/2520)
(171/650) (184/700)
for 70 - 80
540 r.p.m.
611/2350
3,8462
(647/2490) (655/2520)
(169/650) (181/700)
for 60 HP
1000 r.p.m.
1022/2350
2,3000
(1082/2490) (1095/2520)
(282/650) (304/700)
for 70 - 80 HP
750 r.p.m.
752/2350
3,1250
(797/2490) (806/2560)
(208/650) (224/700)
766/2350
3,0660
(812/2490) (822/2520)
(212/650) (228/700)
power take-off
for 60 - 70
- 80 HP
750 r.p.m.
Synchronised P.T.O.
P.T.O. revolutions for each wheel revolution
14,7400
83
Transmission
36
Power take-off
Fig. 1 - 540 - 1000 r.p.m. selector.
Fig. 2 - 540 - 750 - 1000 r.p.m. selector
84
Transmission
Power take-off
36
ADJUSTMENT OF THE P.T.O. CONTROL LINKAGE

Disconnect tie-rod B from lever D.
Move control lever A and lever D to the 540 rpm position.
Turn fork C to adjust the length of tie-rod B so that the hole in the fork is perfectly aligned with the hole in lever D; then screw in fork C
by a 1/2 turn and connect tie-rod B to lever D.
Warning: after adjusting the tie-rod, move the control lever to neutral position and check that the P.T.O. output shaft rotates freely
when turned manually.
NB: For versions with 3-speed P.T.O., check also that output shaft turns freely when the control lever is in the second neutral positi on.
2-SPEED VERSION 540 750 R.P.M.

WARNING: on assembly, position the lever indicated with the
arrow so that head of the lock screw is facing the front
of the tractor.
2-SPEED VERSION 540 1000 R.P.M.
Fig. 3 - P.T.O. controls and output shafts (2-speed version) for 60- HP models
85
Transmission
35
Power take-off
Fig. 4 - P.T.O. controls and output shafts for 60 HP models (3-speed version)
86
Transmission
Power take-off
36
9 kgm
(90 Nm)
Fig. 5 - P.T.O. controls and output shafts for 70 - 80 HP models (3-speed version)
87
Transmission
36
Power take-off
P.T.O. clutch
General characteristics
The P.T.O. clutch is a wet-type multidisc clutch and is operated by hydraulic pressure.
The oil required for the P.T.O. hydraulic control is drawn from the gearbox and filtered before it arrives at the gear pump
located on the right-hand side of the gearbox.
The clutch control is electro-hydraulic. The electro-hydraulic system controls the circuit by means of a solenoid valve,
which supplies oil under pressure to the clutch control piston. In both cases, the driving discs and driven discs are forced
together, thereby transmitting drive to the output shaft.
The P.T.O. clutch brake is operated mechanically by the piston during the return stroke determined by the helical clutch
release spring. Three pins connected to the piston press against the brake counter disc.
Fig. 6 - Cross section view of the P.T.O. clutch.
88
Transmission
Power take-off
36
P.T.O. Clutch
Clutch
oil-immersed multiple disc with axial piston
number of friction discs
diameter of discs
thickness of assembled friction discs
minimum
maximum
105
mm
mm
number of intermediate discs
27.32
29.90
5
disc lubrication pressure
bar
P.T.O. clutch relief pressure setting
bar
11
P.T.O. pressure control valve
bar
restrictor valve
mm
16
+2
0
1.1
Correct positions of P.T.O. sensors and cables
A - 3-speed P.T.O. for 70-75-85 HP models
B - 3-speed P.T.O. for 55-60-65 HP models
C - 2-speed P.T.O.
Springs technical data:

Piston return spring
diameter of wire
mm
external diameter
mm
52,5
spring relaxed
mm
50
spring compressed
kg 82 (808 Nm ) mm
) mm
kg
98
(978
Nm
28
23,4
89
Transmission
36
Power take-off
WARNING: to prevent oil leaks between the oil delivery and lubrication manifolds, apply Loctite 542
to the threaded parts.
CORRECT INSTALLATION OF PINS ON P.T.O. CLUTCH CONTROL PISTON
Insert the three pins and install the three grub screws, applying IDRAULERMETIC 542 to the threads, and tighten
up against the pins; then unscrew each screw by a 1/4 turn to obtain a clearance of 0.25 between the pins and the
piston.
Fig. 7 - Rear P.T.O. control.
90
Transmission
Power take-off
36
Clutch inspection
Inspect the contact surfaces of the clutch friction discs. If worn or torn, the discs must be replaced.
Inspect the control piston and replace if scored.
Inspect the clutch hub. If depressions are worn into the tops of the splines on which the friction discs slide, the hub must
be replaced.
Check the efficiency of the piston return spring. The spring characteristics should match those specified in the relative
table; if not, replace the spring.
Examine the seals of the clutch control piston and the clutch brake piston and the brake disc. Replace if worn.
At each assembly of the P.T.O. clutch, carefully clean the oil ways in the clutch housing; use a compressed air jet if ne cessary.
Checking clutch disc clearance

With new discs installed, check that clearance A (Fig. 8) is 0.52 mm .
If the clearance exceeds the maximum value, fit one shim (code 2.1599.499.0) in the position indicated by the arrow.
Warning: Apply IDRAULERMETIC 542 to the threads of the three screws A before fitting; fully tighten the screws and
then back off each screw a 1/4 turn to obtain a clearance of 0.25 mm between the head of the pin and the piston.
Fig. 8 - Checking clutch disc clearance.

A - If the clearance exceeds the maximum prescribed value, fit one shim code 2.1599.499.0
91
Transmission
36
Power take-off
Checking clutch hydraulic pressures

Connect the mini fitting code 009.2923.4 (with M4 12x1.5 threaded fitting) to the electro-hydraulic control unit as shown
in figure 9.
Connect tool 5.9030.517.4 to the fitting and attach the pressure gauge 5.9030.514.0.
Operate the control valve and check that the pressure gauge shows a reading of approximately 16 bar.
For instructions on measuring pressure and relative values see the chapter electro-hydraulic controls.
Fig. 9 - Checking the operating pressure in the P.T.O. clutch control circuit.
92
Transmission
Power take-off
36
Checking the end-play of the front shaft of the P.T.O. clutch

On the front shaft of the P.T.O., install circlip A and thrust washer B code 2.1599.761.0; position the shaft in the clutch
unit and push it towards the front of the tractor so that it rest up against the oil seal shown in figure at C, then check that
clearance between the thrust washer B and the clutch hub is not less than 1 mm.
If the clearance is less than 1 mm, remove thrust washer B.
Fig. 10 - Checking the end-play of the front shaft of the P.T.O. clutch.
Installing the waterproof seals rear

P.T.O. output shaft and synchronised P.T.O.
Fit the seal using a suitable installation tool;
the seal is to be oriented as shown in the figure
and pressed in to the full depth of the tool.
The measurements indicated here are to be
used to construct the oil seal installation tool.
Fig. 11 - Installation of the waterproof seals.
93
Transmission
36
Power take-off
Fitting the P.T.O. shaft
In the event of interference between shaft B

and flange A, heat the flange to allow cou pling. Before fitting plate D, apply Pianerme tic 510 to the surfaces E of shaft B. Tighten
bolt C to a torque of 68 Nm (7 kgm).
Fig. 12 - Fitting the P.T.O. shaft with interchangeable

output shaft (on certain models only).
RENEWAL OF THE REAR P.T.O. CLUTCH

The P.T.O. clutch unit can be removed without having to remove the driving platform.
proceed as follows:
Remove the top link;
Detach the lift rods of the 3-point linkagefrom the lift arms;
Detach the lift control rods from the control levers;
Disconnect the oil delivery pipe to the auxiliary control valves from the rear pump;
On models with 4-way control valves, detach the oil pipe from the lift control valve to the auxiliary hydraulic control
valves. On models with 6-way control valves, detach also the pipe from hydraulic control valves to the upper gearbox
cover plate (for 4-way control valves);
Disconnect the control levers of the hydraulic control valves from the relay levers connected to the control valves, by
removing the relative cotter pins and retaining pins;
Remove the 3 screws securing the hydraulic control valve from the support bracket;
Disconnect the fuel tank breather pipe in the area above the lift;
Remove the 10 screws and the two nuts securing the lift unit to the rear gearbox;
Attach the lift unit to a hoist and lift it clear of the tractor (when removing the lift unit, take care not to damage the threads on the two studs);
Unscrew the screws securing the P.T.O. access cover (located above the gearbox) and remove this cover;
Using a suitable lever, push towards the front of the tractor the sleeve coupling the P.T.O. clutch output shaft to the
P.T.O. rear shaft;
Loosen the two screws and remove the rear shaft bearing stop plate;
NOTE: when removing this plate, take care that the spacers positioned underneath it do not fall into the gearbox.
Unscrew the 3 retaining screws and remove the top flange located at the rear of the gearbox. Then withdraw the bearing together with the upper 540 rpm gear.
NOTE: when withdrawing the gear, take care that the roller bearing located in the gear does not fall into the gearbox.
Disconnect the pipe supplying oil for lubrication of the inversor shaft and to the oil-bath for the P.T.O. clutch discs, located on the right-hand side of the gearbox, by undoing the relative union; then remove the union of the oil supply
pipe to the P.T.O. clutch;
With the aid of a lever, push the P.T.O. shaft a few centimetres to the rear;
This will only be possible if the shaft is positioned in such a way that there is no interference between the teeth of the
gear and those on the shaft;
Slide the sleeve onto the rear shaft after having first pushed the bearing located in the wall of the gearbox back a sufficient distance;
Push the clutch unit together with the front shaft and the output shaft to the rear, so as to be able to withdraw the front
shaft to the front P.T.O. unit;
Extract the complete clutch unit, disengaging it from the rear shaft;
Inspect the clutch discs and renew them if necessary, removing the large circlip and the spacer.
WARNING: on re-assembly, after having positioned the clutch unit complete with the front shaft, refit the two oil unions
in order to ensure that the unit is positioned correctly, then insert the rear shafts and complete the assembly.
94
Transmission
Power take-off
36
MAIN OPERATIONS FOR REMOVAL OF THE REAR P.T.O. UNIT.
Fig. 13 - The rear P.T.O. clutch may be removed without hav ing to remove the cab from the tractor.
Disconnect the controls of the auxiliary control valves.
Fig. 14 - Remove the lift and the front cover of the rear gearbox to gain access to the P.T.O. clutch unit.
Fig. 15 - Release the rear shaft of the P.T.O. towards the rear.
Fig. 16 - Remove the circlip on the front clutch shaft.
Fig. 17 - If necessary, push the rear shaft support bearing for ward and withdraw the sleeve coupling the 2 rear shafts of the
P.T.O. together.
Fig. 18 - Disconnect the oil supply pipes and remove the complete P.T.O. clutch unit from the gearbox.
95
Transmission
36
Power take-off
OPERATIONS FOR REMOVAL OF THE REAR P.T.O. UNIT
Fig. 19 - Withdraw the front shaft from the clutch unit.
Fig. 20 - Check that the clutch hub slides freely in its housing.
Fig. 21 - Check the condition of the lube pipe and nozzle for
the hydraulic pumps drive gears.
Fig. 22 - Remove the circlip securing the clutch discs.
Fig. 23 - Remove the clutch discs.
Fig. 24 - The complete disc pack can be extracted along with

the clutch hub.
96
Transmission
Power take-off
36
Fig. 25 - Inspect the piston; note the three pins of the clutch
brake, which is engaged by the action of the clutch release
spring in the absence of hydraulic pressure.
Fig. 26 - Remove the thrust washer from between the spring

and the clutch hub.
Fig. 27 - Inspect the clutch discs for wear.
Fig. 28 - Examine the condition of the counter disc.
Fig. 29 - Examine the teeth of the clutch hub.
Fig. 30 - Remove the circlip securing the hydraulic manifold of

the clutch unit.
97
Transmission
36
Power take-off
Fig. 31 - Remove the shoulder plate.
Fig. 32 - Remove the lube pipe for lubrication of the hydraulic

pump gears.
Fig. 33 - Completely disconnect the lube pipe.
Fig. 34 - Remove the clutch oil supply manifold.
Fig. 35 - Check the manifold oil ways and check the manifold
for wear.
Fig. 36 - Remove the snap rings and check for signs of wear.
98
Transmission
Power take-off
36
Fig. 37 - The two holes at the front of the manifold as shown in

the figure serve for lubrication of the clutch discs, while the
large hole to the rear of these supplies the oil to operate the
clutch control piston.
Fig. 38 - Examine the seals on the oil supply fittings.
Fig. 39 - Dismantle the two oil supply fittings and examine

them.
Fig. 40 - Remove the brake disc of the clutch unit.
Fig. 41 - Remove the circlip securing the brake disc thrust

plate.
Fig. 42 - Extract the two thrust plates together with the brake
disc.
99
Transmission
36
Power take-off
Fig. 43 - Examine the clutch brake disc pack.
Fig. 44 - Check the three pressure pins for wear.
check the hydraulic
system of the sole noid valve block
replace the springs

of incorrectly calibrated valves
check the seals on
the piston and manifold
if necessary, replace the defective

parts
the clutch slips

check that the pi ston slides freely
eliminate any roughness preventing

free movement
check the clutch

plates for wear
replace the plates
check the control

linkage
the clutch fails to disengage
100
incomplete control
valve stroke, solenoid valve faulty
check the plates
piston stuck
replace the piston
replace the plates
plates burned
eliminate any roughness preventing

free movement
plates jammed
Drive axles - axles
Rear axle
44
Rear axle
Fig. 1 - Rear axle.
Installing the rear half-shafts (fig. 2)

The half-shafts are fixed to the planet gear carrier flange of the epicyclic reduction unit by means of a plate inserted
in the flange and attached to the internal face of the half-shaft by a screw.
The correct position of the half-shaft in the trumpet housing is determined by the shim pack A indicated in figure 2.
To install the half-shafts, proceed as follows:
secure the half-shaft in a vertical position to prevent its rotation;
press the rings of bearings B and C into the respective housings in the trumpet housing; (before installing the ring of
bearing C, position the cover underneath to retain the grease);
then fit spacer I, oil seal D and bearing E to the half-shaft. Slide the trumpet housing onto the half-shaft, fit oil seal H
and bearing F, then position the planet carriers;
secure the assembly by way of the plate and screw G, interposing a shim pack A between the plate and the half-shaft
to obtain a rolling drag torque of 8 to 12 Nm;
apply LOCTITE 270 to screw G and tighten to a torque of 18 kgm (177 Nm).
101
Drive axles - axles
44
Rear axle
Fig. 2 - Fitting of rear stub axles.
Fig. 3 - Fitting of rear stub axles.
102
Fig. 4 - Halfshaft securing plate.

A - Planet carrier housing
B - Spacer
Drive axles - axles
Rear axle
44
Fig. 5 - Fitting of bearing to halfshaft.
Fig. 6 - Fitting of O-ring to stub axles.
103
Drive axles - axles
44
Rear axle
Removal and disassembly of the epicyclic reduction unit

Unscrew the three screws securing the planet carrier B ( Fig. 7) to the half-shaft.
Then remove the spacer and the flange, and recover the underlying shim pack.
Remove the epicyclic reduction unit and disassemble it into its component parts as follows:
1 - using a hammer and drift, remove the pin securing journal A of planet gear B (Fig. 8).
2 - withdraw the journal and remove the planet gear together with the roller cage and the two thrust washers.
3 - Remove bearing A from the flange of epicyclic reduction unit B, using a suitable puller (Fig. 9).
Fig. 7 - Removing the spacer.

A - Flange
B - Planet carrier
Fig. 8 - Epicyclic reduction unit.

A - Journal
B - Planet
104
Fig. 9 - Removing the bearing from the epicyclic reduction unit flange.
Drive axles - axles
Rear axle
44
FITTING LATERAL STUB AXLES OF THE WHEEL
Fig. 10 - Before installing the trumpet housing, position sleeve A of the synchronised P.T.O..
Fig. 11 - Position the inner half-shaft in the differential housing.
Fig. 12 - Fit the differential housing support flange and then

install the brake piston and brake disc.
Fig. 13 - Install the thrust plate of the brake disc. The side
shown in the figure is to be positioned in contact with the brake disc.
Fig. 14 - View showing the side of the brake disc thrust plate
to be positioned in contact with the ring gear of the epicyclic
reduction unit.
Fig. 15 - Fit the trumpet housing with the aid of a hoist.
105
Drive axles - axles
42
2 W.D. extendible axle
2WD extendible axle

General information
The wide sideways front axle swinging obtained through excellent anchoring, not only makes it possible to operate the
tractor nimbly on steep slopes but also permits the axle to be easily removed from the tractor when any repair is to be
performed. End play check is the only operation required on axle reassembly.
The telescopic-type axle is extremely rugged and enables the tread to be adapted to any work requirements without removing the hydrostatic steering cylinders.
Fig. 1 - Extendible front axle pivot system.
Tecnical specifications
front axle
tread
- minimum
- base
- maximum
toe-in
wheel caster angle
AGROPLUS 60-70-80
mm
mm
mm
1300
1400
1600
mm
24
3
axle swinging angle

tyre inflating pressure
lubricating grease type
steering angle
106
10
bar
Kg/cm
2,4
2,40
NGLI 2 LITIO / Ca
70
Drive axles - axles
42
Fig. 2 - Front axle assembly parts.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
steering track rod

clamp
sleeve
ball-and-socket joint
external steering lever
ubricating nipple
snap ring
thrust ring
seal ring
power steering cylinder
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
shoulder ring
bushing
seal ring
bushing
side LH axle
cover
seal ring
castellated nut
shoulder ring
external bearing
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
wheel hub
spacer ring
internal bearing
retaining ring
wheel shaft
O.ring
axial bearing
pin
centre axle
axle securing pin
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
shims
pin
disk
lower taper roller bearing
centre steering lever
upper taper roller bearing
cover
spacer ring
107
Drive axles - axles
42
Removing the axle from the front support
Fig. 3 - Place some suitable vessels beneath the steering

control cylinders, then loosen unions A of control cylinders C
from hoses B side.
Fig. 4 - Loosen both securing screws of pin A to axle support

B.
Fig. 5 - Using a hammer and light-alloy punch tap on rear end

of pin A.
Fig. 6 - By way of both levers A withdraw pin B forward and re cover the shims interposed between flange and front support.
Ensure the securing pin surface shows no flattening, craking
or chipping, replace the pin if necessary.
WARNING: Keep the two shim packs separated so that the

correct position can be restored on reassembly.
Fig. 7 - Remove the axle from the front support by tapping a

few times the axle centre portion with the hammer.
Lower axle A very slowly and make sure that it does not touch
other parts in the process, then remove shoulder rings B.
108
Fig. 8 - Ensure that bushes A of the centre axle are not worn,
checking for well-evident indentations, remove the bushes by
hammer and punch if necessary.
Drive axles - axles
42
Carry out installation according to the following procedure:

Use very fine abrasive paper to remove any signs of
oxidation from both pin and front support;
Bushes and pin should be properly lubricated with
the specified grease type;
Coat the front support shoulder rings with grease to
make positioning easier;
Place rear shoulder ring D and push the pin almost

fully inward;
Fit shims G adjusting as instructed on page 216 and
then fasten front axle pin securing screws H;
Top up the oil in the hydrostatic steering system and
bleed the air from the system (see chapter on hydrostatic steering).
Making use of a hammer and light alloy punch tap

on spacer F so as it may be moved toward the front
side;
Insert pin E into the spacer and fit front shoulder ring
B;
Lift the axle and insert the pin into bush C;
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Front carrier
Front thrust plate
Axle bushes
Rear thrust plate
Pin
Spacer
Shims
Bolt
Fig.9 - Front axle longitudinal section.
109
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Drive axles - axles
42
Snap ring
Thrust ring
Seal ring
Power steering cylinder
Grease nipple
Pin
Castellated nut
Fig. 10 - Front Axle

A
B
C
Castellated nut
Ball-and-socket joint
External steering
lever
Check steering rod ball-and-socket joints for damage or wear and make sure the are able to rotate freely and without excessive play inside their seats.
Ensure the rubber ball joint guard is intact, otherwise replace the ball joints.
Examine the operating rods for damage or warping.
Replace if required.
Fig. 11 - Steering arms.
110
Fig. 12 - Steering linkage.

A Steering rods
B Ball-and-socket joints
C Centre steering lever
Drive axles - axles
42
Centre steering lever
Use a universal puller to remove centre lever A together with

bearing B.
Still using a universal puller (see fig. 15) remove bearing C and
disk B along with O-ring A.
Make sure the centre lever is not warped or damaged, otherwise replace.
Fig. 13 - Centre steering lever.

A Centre steering lever
B External bearing races
Carefully examine the bearings turning them slowly, if the bearing is sound no vibrations, noise nor slight jam-ups shall be
felt.
Fix centre lever A in a vice if required, and using a light-alloy

hammer and punch remove tapered bearing outside races B,
located in the centre hole (Fig. 14), taking care to remove first
the upper race having smaller diameter by tapping from inside
outward.
Re-install the centre lever operating in reversed removing order and accordingly with the following procedure:
Fig. 14 - Centre steering lever bearing.

A Centre steering lever
B Upper tapered-roller bearing
Before assembly carefully lubricate the tapered-roller bearings

and related races.
Before mounting the lower bearing in the axle fit a new disk and a
new O-ring.
When installing the castellated nut keep to the following instructions:
Tighten the nut fully to bed the bearings properly

Loosen the nut and tighten again until all plays have been taken up,
then fit a new check pin.

If the hole in the pin is not in the same line as the cut in the nut, tighten the nut furtherly as long as a new check pin can be inserted.
When the reassembly is completed perform pin and bearing lubrication with the specified grease type just operating the lubricating nipples placed on the lever.
Fig. 15 - Removing the centre steering lever Cbearing.

A O.ring
B Disk
C Tapered-roller bearing
111
Drive axles - axles
42
Fig. 16 - Removing the wheel hub.

A Tractor wheel
B Safety stand
C Front axle
Fig. 17 - Removing the guard cover.

A Check pin
B Gasket
C Cover
D Hub
E Nut
Fig. 18 - Using a puller to remove the wheel hub.

A Wheel hub shaft pin
B Whole wheel hub
112
Fig. 19 - Wheel hub components.

A Ball bearing
B Spacer
C Hub
D
E
Ball bearing
Oil seal
Wheel hub
Using a universal puller withdraw whole wheel hub B from pin,
(Fig. 18) .
Make use of a suitable puller to remove front ball bearing A and
take spacer B, (Fig. 19).
Remove retaining ring E by prising, then using a proper puller
remove rear ball bearing D, (Fig. 19).
Before assembly coat bearings B and D and new retaining ring
A with the recommended grease, (Fig. 20).
Carefully insert retaining ring A using a light-alloy hammer and
punch.
Install wheel hub C onto pin G tapping slightly with the hammer
for proper bedding.
Tighten castellated nut E to the prescribed torque.
Make sure the nut cut is duly aligned with the check pin hole in
the pin, otherwise tighten the nut furtherly to make them coinciding and re-install the check pin.
Ensure wheel hub C end play is 0.12 to 0.48 mm with respect to
wheel shaft pin G.
Fig. 20 - Section view of the wheel hub.

A Oil seal
B Innner ball bearing
C Whel hub
D Outer ball bearing
E - Castellated nut
F - Thrust plate
G - Whel shaft pin
H - Space
Drive axles - axles
42

Clean bearings and the other parts carefully, then dry using compressed air.
Carefully examine the bearings turning them slowly, if the bearing
is sound no vibrations, noise nor slight jam-ups shall be felt.
Carefully examine bearing race and rolling member conditions ensuring no scoring, marking, grinding signs due to foreign matter
abrasion are noticed, otherwise replace the bearing.
WARNING: Should a bearing be no more serviceable, both the internal and the external bearings must be replaced.
Fig. 21 - Wheel hub lubricating hole.

A Clearance hole
B Wheel huba
Make sure the wheel shaft has suffered no damage and threading
is whole, replace if required.
Ascertain clearance hole A permitting the external cover to be fixed is not obstructed by foreign matters, if so remove any clogging
to allow hub B to be properly lubricated.
Wash any components carefully and dry with compressed air.
Be sure no signs of oxidation are visible on the wheel shaft, if so
remove with very fine abrasive paper.
Check the shaft for either warp or damage, if so replace the shaft.
Carefully inspect the axial bearing making sure no grinding, scoring or marking are evident neither on the rolling members nor on
the bearing races, otherwise replace the worn parts.
Check side axle upper and lower bushes B for wear, ascertaining
they still show evidence of the purpose-made indentations, otherwise replace.
Fig. 24 - Wheel pivot bushes.

A Clearance hole
Fig. 22 - Removing the steering lever.

A External steering lever
B Gasket
C Wheel shaft
Fig. 23 - Removing the wheel pivot axial bearing.

A Wheel shaft
B Axial bearing
C O.ring
D Axial bearing race
113
Drive axles - axles
42

Correct track rod assembly (Fig. 25).
Rotate sleeve A around its axis so that knuckle B is in the position
shown in figure, i.e. make sure the knuckle working angle is 90,
then insert and tighten both the sleeve securing bolts.
End float adjustment (Fig. 26).

Push the axle towards the rear and, using a feeler gauge, check
that the maximum end float G does not exceed 0.4 mm.
If the end float exceeds this value, proceed as follows.
Unscrew bolts E securing pin B to the front carrier A;
Slightly move the pin and remove some of shims D to restore
correct end float.
Re-tighten bolts E and check end float again.
Fig. 26 - Track rods.

A Sleeve
B Steering knuckle
Fig. 25 - Adjusting the endfloat of the front axle .

A Front carrier
B Pin
C Thrust plate
D Shims
E Bolt
114
Drive axles - axles
4 W.D. front axle
43
FRONT-WHEEL DRIVE
Specifications
Front drive axle ratios
reduction gear-front-wheel drive
30 km/h
40 km/h
bevel gears
final epicyclic reducer
21/47 = 1/2,2381
28/47 = 1/1,6786
(13/13+50) = 1/4,8462
1/23,8618
total reduction
30 km/h
40 km/h
1/23,8618
1/17,8966
30 km/h
40 km/h
1,3790
1,3830
mechanical ratio
(number of front wheel turns for each rear wheel turn)
bevel gear teeth backlash

front drive axle end play
mm
front drive axle swinging

steering angle
0,15 0,20
0,1 0,4
10
50
toe-in
see specification table here below
wheel caster angle

camber
7
1
Check value for the adjusting the bevel gears
mm
Fig. 1 - Measuring front wheel toe-in and front wheel geometry.

Adjusting toe-in
Adjust the front wheel tie rod so as the difference A-B shown in figure 1 is:
wheel rim keying diamete
up to 20
(508 mm)
from 20 to 30 (509 762 mm)
over 302
2RM
26
26
26
A-B mm
4RM
02
03
0 3,5
Adjusting steering angles

Make sure the front drive wheel steering angle is as specified in the table
above.
Otherwise adjust by way of the special setscrews or spacers.
Fig. 2 - Front-wheel drive steering angles.
115
Drive axles - axles
43
4 W.D. front axle

Carry out a thorough check and adjust the end play as follows:
Move the axle forward tapping with a non-ferrous metal hammer.
Fig. 3 - Removing/Installing the front drive axle.

A Swivel supports
B Front axle
C Spacers
D Swivel support
Use thickness gauge A (see Fig. 4), to make sure that the end
play between shoulder ring B and differential housing C is within specifications given in the related table (see page 213).
If the end play is correct loosen the four nuts securing front swivel support C to drive axle A (see Fig. 5) and add or remove a
number of shims B enough to obtain the recommended end
play.
Bleed the air from the brake system.
Check the toe-in and adjust the differential lock operating rod if
necessary.
Tighten the swivel support securing nuts to the specified torque.
Swivel support securing nuts

front
rear
89 Nm
142 Nm
Fig. 4 - Checking the front axle end play.

A Thickness gauge
B Shoulder ring
C Differential housing
Fig. 5 - Front axle end play check point.

A Front drive axle
B Shims
C Front swivel support
116
Fig. 6 - Power steering cylinder securing pin.

A Pin securing pin
B Power steering cylinder fixing pin
C Power steering hydraulic cylinder
D Dust cover
E Spacers
(9,1 Kgm)
(14,5 Kgm)
Drive axles - axles
4 W.D. front axle
43
Fig. 7 - Longitudinal section of the front-wheel drive.
117
Drive axles - axles
43
4 W.D. front axle
Fig.8 - Views and sections of the front-wheel drive.
118
Drive axles - axles
4 W.D. front axle
43
Final epicyclic reducer

Disassembling the hub
1 - If the operation involves the bevel gear pair, removal is enabled
simply by extracting the two hub swivel pins; the hub can then be
distanced together with the halfshaft.
2 - If the operation involves the hub, proceed as follows:
remove the protective cap located at the centre of the epicyclic
housing.
remove the circlip from its groove.
fit puller p/n 5.9030.618.4/10 and remove the flange (see fig 9).
remove the circlip from the groove at the end of the halfshaft.
screw two bolts into the holes indicated by the arrows (see fig
9) and separate the hub from the epicyclic housing.
WARNING: Use a non-ferrous metal hammer and punch to tap on
ferrous parts for removal if necessary.
Fig. 9 - Removing the hub flange with SAT no.

5.9030.618.4/10 tool.
Stripping down the epicyclic (fig. 10)

Remove the ten securing bolts from the flange of the housing, then
remove the flange and the shims beneath.
Rest epicyclic reducer A on two wooden blocks as shown in figure
and using a press and a punch operate on planetary carrier case
centre B until the planetary carrier, bearing C and seal ring D can
be removed from the bottom.
NOTE: If oil leaks are noticed from seal ring D, this ring can be removed from its groove without requiring the planetary carrier case
to be dismounted.
In any case, when seal ring D is removed the damage it usually
has to undergo is to such an extent to require replacement.
Tap with a hammer and a punch on bearings C and E when having to remove, if necessary.
Take planetaries A securing pins B; remove the planetaries and
take roller cages C.
Installation the hub
Re-install the disassembled bearing C (Fig.10), in the planetary
carrier case paying attention to the assembly direction.
Install planetaries B with bearings C (Fig.11) into the planetary
carrier case taking care to turn the pin dogs towards the hub centre. Make the planetary and the crown wheel teeth match avoiding
any damaging when inserting the planetary carrier into the external case.
Install bearing C (Fig.10) if previously disassembled, use a hammer and a punch to tap slightly and evenly on the outer race surface.
Shimming epicyclic reducer bearings
Fit a number of shims between the planetary carrier flange and the
pin fixing plate, until the bearing rotate freely, even though a slight
bearing preloading can be felt, then remove one 0.05 mm shim
from the shim pack.
Fit a new seal ring .
Fig. 10 - Disassembling the epicyclic reducer.

A Epicyclic reduction gear
B Planetary carrier case
C Bearing
Fig. 11 - Epicylic reduction gear planetaries.

A Pins
B Planetaries
C Roller cage
119
Drive axles - axles
43
4 W.D. front axle

The following procedure should be observed on reassembly:
1 - Brakes
Replace the brake control piston O-rings and insert piston in its
seat with the oil grooves turned outwards.
2 - Final epicyclic reducer
Install the final epicyclic reducer holding the axle shaft in position
as shown in figure 12 by prising on cross journal A outwards; this
to prevent the axle shaft from moving inwards.
3 - Axle shafts
When inserting the axle shaft pay attention not to damage the roller bearing or the seal ring.
The axle shaft end should be correctly introduced into the differential gear planetaries.
Make sure the axle shaft is free to rotate without any hindrance.
Fig. 12 - Prising with a lever to hold the axle shaft

in position when mounting the final epicyclic reducer.
4 -Forks
After installing the bearings and the dust rings mount the fork by
placing one 0.5 mm shim under the lower pin, then fit the pin, use a
hammer if necessary, finally tighten the securing screws.
Fit a pack of shims thicker than the one taken on removal under
the upper pin. Install the pin tightening the securing screws.
Adjusting wheel fork bearing preloading

In the pack of shim to be put together for adjustment it is always
advisable to group more shims in one: as an example, it is better
one 0,2 mm shim be used instead of two 0,1 mm shims.
Fit no. 5.9030.267.0 magnetic base with no. 5.9030.272.0 centesimal dial gauge onto the drive axle and then place the gauge feeler perpendicularly to the lower pin close to centre and set to zero.
Using lever A as shown in figure 13, move the fork fully upwards
and read the clearance on gauge dial.
Loosen the two screws B and remove shims from pack C so that
any clearance may be taken up without preloading the bearings.
WARNING: The clearance amount should be reduced gradually
by repeating reading with the dial gauge each time so that the bearings are not preloaded.
After all clearance has been taken up, remove a 0.10 to 0.15 mm
shim pack, so that a correct bearing preloading can be obtained.
Tighten screws B and D to the specified torque.
Fig. 13 - Checking wheel hub clearance.
A Lever
B Screws
C Pack of shims
D Screws
E 0.5 mm shim.
120
After correctly performing adjustment, ensure the shaft taper roller

bearing slide in their seats freely, even though a slight preloading
is felt.
Drive axles - axles
4 W.D. front axle
43
Side hubs
Disassemble the twin universal joints if required, keeping to the following procedure:
Remove both snap rings A from one cross journal B. A non-ferrous metal hammer and punch may help in carrying
out this operation, (see Fig. 14).
Fix the joint fork in a vice provided with protective jaws.
Tap with a hammer on wheel shaft fork A (see Fig. 16), so that the bearing may be removed from its seat in fork A and
taken from the top. Separate cross joint D from the fork.
Following the same procedure separate the cross joint from the universal joint fork as well as from the axle shaft fork.
Recover bearing rollers A along with dust rings B.
Fig. 14 - Twin universal joint.

A Snap ring
B Twin universal joint cross journal
Fig. 15 - Axle shaft twin-type universal joint bearing.

1 Rollers
2 Dust rings
Fig. 16 - Disassembling the twin-type universal

joint from the axle shaft.
A Wheel shaft forks
B Roller bearing
C Roller bearing
D Cross joint
121
Drive axles - axles
43
4 W.D. front axle
Pins
Check differential spider pin and final epicyclic reducer planetary holder pin surfaces for damaging; otherwise both
pins are to be replaced.
Follow the same procedure for pin housings.
Axle shafts
Check for excessive wear: splines should not be nicked and permit a free gear movement.
Spider forks should not be warped and bearings shall slide freely.
Gears
Make sure all gear toothing is neither worn nor damaged, teeth should work on the whole contact face.
Bearings
Examine bearings for proper working conditions, ensure they show neither excessive radial nor end play.
Holding the bearings pressed by hand and making simultaneously turn in both directions of rotation, these should slide
freely and no sliding friction felt.
Tightening torques
Before tightening all screws should be degreased and cleaned.
Differential/bevel gear securing screws
Kgm
6 6,5
Nm
58 64
Bevel pinion fixing nut

Bearing holding flange securing screws
21 23
3
206 226
29
78
68 78
14,5
9,1
142
89
Engine front support securing screws

Hydraulic cylinder fixing pin
28
16
274
157
Ball-and-socket joint castellated nuts

Transmission shaft flange securing screws *
12
5
119
49
11,5 12
113 118
Fork flange securing screws

Axle swivelling pivot securing screws
- rear pin
- front pin
Differential housing half securing screws

* Coat the nut with a small amount of Loctite 242.
Check periodically that the wheel bolts are correctly tightened.

Front wheel bolts
Front wheel bolts
122
2RM (M20x1,5)
4RM (M18x1,5)
(M20x1,5)
50 kgm (490 Nm)

36,8 kgm (360 Nm)
50 kgm (490 Nm)
Drive axles - axles
4 W.D. front axle
43
Installing the waterproof seal

A inner half-shaft
B outer half-shaft
C pinion
D hub
E pinion
X outline plug
Using a suitable installation tool, install the seals oriented as
shown in the figure and pressing them to the full depth of the
installation tool.
The measurements indicated here are to be used to construct the oil seal installation tool.
Fig. 17 - Waterproof seals.
123
Drive axles - axles
43
4 W.D. front axle

Rglage du couple conique.
1 - Monter le botier de diffrentiel en interposant entre les flasques-supports de roulements une paisseur de cales jusqu obtenir une prcontrainte des roulements de 0,04 mm.
2 - Dposer nouveau le botier de diffrentiel et monter le pignon
en interposant un jeu de cales A de 0,50 mm et un jeu de cales B
pour permettre, aprs avoir serr lcrou au couple de 21 23
kgm (206 226 Nm), la libre rotation des roulements dans leurs logements respectifs malgr une lgre prcontrainte (ne doit pas
tre suprieure 0,04 mm).
Fig. 18 Mise en place dpaisseur de cales pour

roulements de pignon.
3 - Rgler la distance E botier de diffrentiel-tte du pignon en

agissant sur le jeu de cales A.
La mesure exacte pour cette opration sobtient en additionnant
ou en retranchant de la valeur grave sur le profil dune dent du pignon la valeur de 1 mm.
Remarque: aprs avoir rgl la distance entre le botier de diff rentiel et la tte du pignon, il faut refaire le rglage de la prcontrainte, pour dtrminer nouveau le jeu de cales B.
4 - Remonter le botier de diffrentiel et vrifier avec un comparateur le jeu dentredent pignon-couronne: il doit tre de 0,15 0,20
mm; si ce nest pas le cas, enlever des cales au jeu C et les ajouter
au jeu D pour approcher la couronne au pignon et vice versa pour
lloigner de celui-ci.
Fig. 19 Mesure du jeu dentredent pignon/couronne pour le rglage du couple conique.
Fig. 20 - Rglage du couple conique.
124
Drive axles - axles
4 W.D. front axle
43
Rglage interne du blocage de diffrentiel de type

mcanique (Fig. 22).
(Pour le rglage de la commande extrieure, voir chapitre commandes).
1 - Assembler les pices en plaant lpaisseur de cales A du ct
du circlip B; lpaisseur de cales mise doit faire en sorte que le jeu
de lentretoise C soit de 0 0,05 mm.
2 - Dplacer un certain nombre de cales du jeu A dans la position
G jusqu obtention du dplacement du manchon D en position
denclenchement.
REMARQUE Le dplacement des cales doit se faire par jeu
dune paisseur non suprieure 0,20 mm. Lenclenchement du
manchon D sera correct quand le manchon recouvrira les billes F
sans forcer pour se mettre dans la position indique par le repre
E Fig. 22.
Montage du diffrentiel dans le pont

Orienter le groupe de manire que le manchon du blocage de diffrentiel se situe du mme ct du levier interne de commande.
Fig. 21 - Orientation du diffrentiel dans le pont.
Le manchon devra tre dplac vers lextrieur afin de permettre

aux patins du levier de sengager dans la gorge.
Aprs le montage du diffrentiel dans le pont, contrler
lenclenchement du blocage en actionnant le levier et en tournant
manuellement le pignon dattaque.
Fig. 23 Contrle de la distance tte de pignon-surface rectifie du botier de diffrentiel.

A Jauge dpaisseur
B Tte pignon
C Axe porte-satellites
Fig. 22 - Rglage du blocage de diffrentiel.
125
Drive axles - axles
43
4 W.D. front axle
Diagnostic des inconvnients
Usure des croisillons

cardan
pont avant surcharg
nemployer que des

chargeurs frontaux
reconnus par le
constructeur
contrler lusure des

bagues dtanchit
changer les
gues uses
reniflard dhuile obstru
nettoyer
prvoir le lestage
arrire du tracteur
ba-
Pertes dhuile
nutiliser la double
traction que sur terrain agricole
excessive exploita- monter des pneus

tion du tracteur pour convenables
transports routiers
usure non uniforme
contrler le pincement des roues
prvoir le rglage
contrler
lusure
des pneus
si ncessaire prvoir la substitution
contrler lusure des

articulation de direction
si ncessaire prvoir la substitution
contrler les roulements coniques du

moyeu
rgler et les remplacer si ncessaire
usure uniforme
Usure des pneus
Oscillation des roues
126
Vehicle
Brakes
54
Brakes
General information
The service brakes are located between gearbox and final epicyclic
reducers and assure a precise and safe braking action. In addition,
the four-wheel drive tractor models are also equipped with integral
braking system providing braking on all tractor wheels.
The braking system is sintered-lining, oil-immersed disk type. The
right-hand brake control is completely independent from the
left-hand brake control; this allows the tractor turning radius to be
conveniently reduced (this operation is only possible when working on farm land and never during transport operations on public
roads).
The braking system is provided with the SEPARATE BRAKES
valve which enables the front wheel braking to be excluded.
Fig. 1 - Front service brakes.
Each brake pedal controls a hydraulic pump which delivers oil under
pressure to a disk thrust plate, which causes the brake disk to lock.
Operating both brake pedals simulteneously by coupling them
with the special joining latch, opens an oil duct connecting both
hydraulic circuits to balance the baking pressure on the wheels.
Brake maintenance is limited to an easy adjustment and a system
air bleeding if necessary.
The parking brake has mechanical control and acts on transmission downstream of gearbox.
Pulling the control lever upwards makes the brake disks pack together thus locking the shaft being constantly meshed with the
wheels.
Maintenance is very easy and consists of replacing the friction
pads when worn or adjusting the control lever travel.
Fig. 2 - Parking brake parts.

Specifications
service brakes
Manufacturer
Type
number of disks each brake
brake disk outside diameter
original brake disk thickness
brake disk minimum thickness allowable
brake pedal free travel
braking piston max. Play
thydraulic pump type
parking brake
brake type
number of braking pads
double braking surface
single braking surface
original braking pad thickness
double
single
braking pad minimum thickness allowable
double
single
brake disk number
parking brake control lever travel
front
2WD
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
2 (each side)
223,4
4,80
4,40
rear
4WD
SDF DEUTSCHLAND
oil-immersed disks
1 (each side)
1 (each side)
223,4
280
4,80
7
4,40
6
40
1,15
Benditalia 1
oil-immersed disks
n 2
n 2
5
3,5
4,3
3,2
3
100
127
Vehicle
54
Brakes
A - Oil tank
B - Oil delivery pipes
C - Oil pumps
D - Pumps connection pipe
E - Brake pedal coupling latch
F - Block for types without front brakes
G - SEPARATE BRAKES valve
H - Brake pedals
I - Parking brake lever
L - Toothed quadrant
M - Control rod
Fig. 3 - Brake control assembly parts.
Hydraulic pump
Disassebly and checking procedure
Referring to fig 4:
Remove guard boot A, take snap ring B and withdraw rod C
along with the support disk.
Fig. 4 - Brake pump control unit.
128
Referring to fig 6:
Fix the pump in a vice provided with protective jaws and pushing pistons into the pump partly, as shown in figure 6, loosen
the piston retaining screws and then remove the pistons together with the spring down below.
A - Pump
B - Delivery pipe
union
C - Delivery pipe
D - Clamp
E - Pipe fitting
F- Spring
G - Snap ring
H - Spacer
I - Seal ring
L- Intermediate piston
M - Spring
N - Seal ring
O - Washer
Vehicle
Brakes
54
P - Piston
Q - Seal ring
R - Rod
S - Support disk
T - Snap ring
U - Guard boot
V - Nut
Z - Fork
X - Stop screw
Y - Gasket
K - Pump union pipe
Fig. 5 - Brake pump assembly parts.

Examine the cylinder interior and the pistons for either scoring
or rust. Replace if necessary.
Check cylinder and pistons for wear. If excessive plays are noticed replace either the whole piston or the whole cylinder assembly.
Inspect sealing rings and dust guard boot, replace any worn
parts.
Inspect all pump internal compartments, apertures and passages and make sure all is properly clean and free from foreign
matters.
Ensure the springs are neither yielded nor warped. Replace if
necessary.
Fig. 6 - Piston retaining screw.
129
Vehicle
54
Brakes
12 - Guard boot
13 - Rod
14 - Nut
15 - Fork
16 - Snap ring
17 - Gasket
18 - Stop screw
19 - Seal ring
20 - Seal ring
21 - Spacer
22 - Snap ring
1 - Spring
2 - Pump
3 - Intermediate piston
4 - Spring
5 - Pipe fitting
6 - Gasket
7 - Seal ring
8 - Washer
9 - Piston
10 - Seal ring
11 - Support disk
Fig. 7 - section of the brake pump.
Assembly of brake master cylinder (see fig 5).

Screw the front piston L and the rear piston P together, then check
that there is clearance between the two.
Insert the pistons into the cylinder, checking that the recess afforded by the outer piston P is aligned correctly with the seat of the limiter screw X.
Verify correct operation of the cylinder, making certain that the pistons complete their full travel freely.
Fig. 8 - Installing the front brake disk pressure piston seal ring.
Fig. 10 - Brake assembly.

Fig. 9 - Brake assembly flange.
A - Brake assembly flange
130
A - Brake disks
B - Intermediate disk
C - Brake control piston
Vehicle
Brakes
54
Checking the front brake disks on 2WD and 4WD

front axles and the rear brake disks.
Check the ground surfaces contacting the brake disks for excessive scoring.
If excess wear is found replace the worn-out parts.
Check disk conditions and tickness, compare with specifications
table.
Examine the brake disk broaching for wear or damage.
If excessive oil consumption is noticed, check the piston rings as
follows:
Connect no. 5.9030.520.4 hydraulic pump to the oil delivery circuit; if the hydraulic circuit is not fully oil-tight under a 1,5 bar pressure, the rings must be replaced. (To check the effectiveness of the
seals more accurately, blow compressed air around the perimeter
of the seal; if air bubbles appear, the seal is imperfect).
Fig. 11 - Brake housing.

A - Locating dowels.
B - Brake housing
Check each brake.
For 4WD front brakes and rear brakes only

Mark piston and brake housing case with a reference near to a locating pin so as to make reassembly easier.
Coat the brake housing case seal ring contacting surfaces of piston A with recommended grease, see figure 11.
Fig. 12 - Greasing the seal contact surface of the

brake piston.
A - Piston
Carefully mount piston into the brake housing case.

Fit the brake housings and halfshaft trumpet housings, repeating
the removal operations in reverse order and observing the following directions.
Coat the brake housing case inner surface as well as both
epicyclic gear crown wheel surfaces with recommended sealant.
Tighten the securing nuts of the brake housings and trumpet housings to the prescribed torque (see values below).
- brake housing bolts:
- trumpet housing bolts:
3,3 4,1 (32 42)

8,6 9,6 (84 94)
Fig. 13 - Rear brake assembly.
Adjusting service brake pedals

Operate right-hand pump fork A (figure 14) to adjust brake pedal
position, until the most suited position for the operator is attained,
and in such a way that the pedal may complete its whole travel freely when braking.
Operate left-hand pump forkB (figure 14) to adjust the related brake pedal so that the coupling latch holes are in the same line.
Fig. 14 - Adjusting the brake pedals.
131
Vehicle
54
Brakes
Fig. 14 - Rear brakes for 2WD front axle.
Fig. 15 - Parking brake inspection window

Correct installation of inspection cover for parking brake discs
Before fitting the cover, apply the sealant PIANERMETIC 510 to the surfaces in contact with the gearbox (marked A in
the figure), then tighten the three screws marked B in the figure to a torque of 5.8 kgm (55 Nm).
Check that with the control lever positioned at angle of approx. 40 relative to the horizontal, the brake play is that indicated in the figure. If the play exceeds this value, replace disc C with the single braking surface with a discs with a double
braking surface (to recover 1mm of play). Alternatively insert a shim (code 009.9648.0) between the disc C and the reaction plate (to recover 2mm of play).
132
Vehicle
Brakes
54
Fig. 17 - Section view of 4WD front brakes.
Fig. 18 - Section view of rear brakes.
133
Vehicle
54
Brakes
The parking brake, completely independent from the service brakes, is applied by pulling the special hand lever upwards.
Once the parking brake is applied the related pilot lamp on the dashboard lights up.
Checking parking brake pads

Examine the brake pads for wear. If brake pad thickness is out of
specifications these shall be replaced.
Brake pads can be dismounted after removing the lower brake
pad lockpin, this permits access through the cover placed under
the gearbox to be gained.
Before installing new brake pads, check lockpin seal ring conditions, replace if necessary.
Parking brake control lever overall travel

This travel should be 100 mm, otherwise operate the special adjusting screw until the specified dimension is obtained.
Fig. 19 - Parking brakechecking and adjusting dimension.
Fig. 20 - Parking brake.
134
Measuring the brake disk thickness.
Vehicle
Brakes
54
Fig. 21 - Parking brake assembly; (A- Brakes disk).
Bleeding air from the brake hydraulic system

Operate as follows:
unhook pedals by removing the coupling latch: afterwards place the SEPARATE BRAKES valve control in OFF position;
operate the right-hand brake pedal several times;
by holding the pedal in fully depressed position, slightly unscrew and tighten soon after the relevant air bleeding valve on
the rear right-hand brake.
This operation should be repeated until such time as the oil flows
out of the bleeding valve without air bubbles.
Repeat the same procedure on the front right-hand brake by acting on the related air bleeding valve.
Fig. 22 - Bleeding the air from the rear service

brake hydraulic system.
Follow the same procedure on the front and rear left-hand brakes
making use of the related air bleeding valves.
We recommend that only oil AKROS MATIC (with international specifications ATF DEXRON II) used in the braking system.
Fig. 23 - Bleeding the air from the front service
brake hydraulic system.
135
Vehicle
54
Brakes
Separate Brakes valve
The SEPARATE BRAKES valve permits the front wheel side-slip to be removed when performing independent braking.
(This prevents cultivation damage as the front wheel is under no
braking action).
The valve operation can be stopped by operating the special control tap A.
When both brake pedals are operated at the same time (coupled
pedals), the braking of the four wheels will be always obtained.
IMPORTANT: The idrostop sensor must be installed in the

SEPARATE BRAKES valve housing, smearing Loctite 542 on the
screw thread.
Fig. 24 - Different braking action diagram.
A = LH brake pedal
B = RH brake pedal
C = Both when coupled
Hydraulic
connections
PR - Rear RH brake
L - LH brake pedal pump
AL - Front LH brake
Fig. 25 - SEPARATE BRAKES valve.
136
R
AR
PL
H
- RH brake pedal pump

- RH front brake
- Rear LH brake
- STOP pressure switch
Vehicle
Brakes
54
Fig. 26 - Hydraulic circuit diagram for SEPARATE BRAKES system
137
Vehicle
54
Brakes
Fig. 27 - Brake hydraulic system schematic diagram with tap in position ON.
A - oil pressure
B - discharge oil
Hydraulic connections
PR - Rear RH brake
PL - Rear LH brake
138
R
AR
AL
H
- RH brake pedal pump

- RH front brake
- Front LH brake
- STOP pressure switch
Vehicle
Brakes
54
Fig. 28 - Brake hydraulic system schematic diagram with tap in position OFF
A - oil pressure
B - discharge oil
Hydraulic connections
PR - Rear RH brake
PL - Front LH brake
R - RH brake pedal pump

AR - RH front brake
AL - Rear LH brake
H - STOP pressure switch
139
Vehicle
54
Brakes
poor braking
make sure no air is

inside system
bleed the air
check for correct

adjustment
adjust
check brake disks

for wear
replace
make sure the recommended

oil
type is used
uneven braking
bleed the air
replace
check for correct

adjustment
adjust
make sure the recommended oil

type is used
replace
check brakes disk

for wear
replace
noisy braking
140
Vehicle
Hydraulic power-lift
59
Hydraulic lift with load sensing

The automatic draft control device, connected directly to the top link, guarantees rapid lift operation and is highly sensitive to even minimal variations in the load on the implement.
The hydraulic lift is equipped with an internal cylinder positioned horizontally.
The hydraulic lift is equipped with an open-centre control valve.
The oil in the suction line is drawn from the gearbox by a high-capacity pump (the same pump supplies the auxiliary control valves) and filtered through a filter with an interchangeable.
The oil under passes through the auxiliary control valves before arriving at the lift.
Fig. 1 - Lift lever shaft
Technical characteristics
manufacturer
lift type
safety valve setting
minimum operating pressure
minimum permissible piston diameter
maximum permissible cylinder diameter
lifting capacity with load concentrated on lower link ball
ends at height of rear wheel centres
tightening torque for cylinder retaining bolts
bar
bar
mm
mm
SAME DEUTZ-FAHR
DEUTSCHLAND
with open-centre control valve
190 +010
8
89,900
90,050
kg
kgm
Nm
1600
15 - 16,5
150 - 165
141
Vehicle
59
Installing the lift and front cover plate of

the gearbox
Install the two lift mounting studs (A in figure) and the two cover plate retaining screws
(B in figure), applying Loctite 242 to the threads in both cases.
Fig. 2 - Fixing the front lift and the front cover to the gearbox
Fig. 3 - Lift unit components.
Lift mechanism
Inspect the splines for grooves or excessive wear; replace the levers if necessary.
Inspect the splines of the lift shaft for excessive wear and check
that the machined surfaces in contact with the supports are not damaged; carefully clean the lubrication slots for the shaft supports.
At each dismantling, remove the seals and gaskets. Check that
there are no oil leaks from the lift cylinder.
Fig. 4 - Hydraulic control valve.
142
Checking the safety valves

Check that the safety valve incorporated in the auxiliary control
valves is set to 190 bar.
Remember that to ensure the correct operation of the lift, the operating pressure in the lift circuit must not exceed 150 bar.
Vehicle
59
Checking the protrusion of the non-return valve control pin B

Move the ball A so that rests on the valve body D, and move the valve body D so that it rests on the control valve housing, then insert pin B up against ball A (while making sure that the ball A does not move).
Check that the pin B protrudes 15.8 0.05 mm as indicated in the figure.
Check that the moving parts slide freely
For the control vale to function properly, the following parts must slide freely:
- G - control valve spool
- K - pilot valve
- L - enabling valve
Checks to be carried out after re-assembly of the control valve.
- Check that the control valve spool slides freely.
After assembly of the control vale housing with the connection housing, check that the spool Gslides freely in its bore.
- Check coverage of lifting and lowering ports.
Push the spool G in the direction of arrow E until the point where lifting commences. From this point, move the
spool back in the direction of arrow F until lowering commences.
Check that the spool travel between the lifting and lowering positions is 0.6 to 0.8 mm.
- Check for leaks
Check that no part of the control valve leaks (plugs, check valve, etc.) at a pressure of 150 bar.
Apply Loctite 542 to all the control valve plugs before fitting.
The spring calibration values must match those specified in the tables.
For bench testing of the control valve use oil of the recommended type and a pump with a capacity of 10 to 15 l/min.
Warning: the presence of emulsified oil may prevent correct operation of the control valve.
D
F
15.80.05
G
E
Fig. 5 - Hydraulic control valve.
143
Vehicle
59
Hydraulic power-lift - first version
1 - MAX. controlled draft

2 - Green sector - CONTROL
3 - MIN. controlled draft
4 - Lowering
5 - Red sector float
6 - Mixed control
7 - Yellow sector position
8 - Raising
Fig. 6 - Lift control adjustment diagram.

F - Position control lever (yellow knob)
G - Draft control lever (green knob)
144
Vehicle
59
Adjusting the lift (Fig. 6)

Warning: before adjustment, attach a weight of approx. 200 kg to the 3-point hitch.
Adjust the forks of the external tie-rods of the lift control linkage so that the yellow lever and the green lever are free to
move the entire length of the control slot.
Adjusting the lift travel - YELLOW LEVER Start the engine, and move the yellow lever to the maximum lift position and move the green lever to position 12 in its
control slot.
Adjust screw E (fig. 6), so that it is up against its stop when the reference marks on the right-hand side of the lift housing
and the lift arm coincide.
If necessary, also adjust fork B of tie-rod A.
Adjusting the GREEN LEVER

Move the yellow lever to the position CONTR of its control slot, and check that when the green lever is moved from position 12 towards 0, the lifting action commences when the lever is in correspondence with position 4.
If not, adjust fork D of tie-rod C.
Checking operation of the safety stop.

Move the green lever to the maximum lift position (position 0). The lift arms will be raised, rotating through a further angle of approx. 4 (corresponding to a movement of the notch on the lift arm of 6 mm).
Checking balance.
With the yellow lever in the CONTR position, move the green lever from position 12 to 4 to find the point of balance (before the lifting action begins); check that when the counterweight applied to the lift arms is pulled upwards, the lift raises
the arms, and that when the counterweight is pushed downwards, the lift lowers the arms.
145
Yellow
Blue
Green
Red
Vehicle
59
= Oil delivery to the hydraulic control valve

= Oil flow from the control valve to the lowering valve
= Oil for piloting the valves
= Pressurised oil to the lift piston
1 - Valvematic
2 - Anti-shock valve
3 - Down valve
4 - Control valve
5 - Pilot valve
6 - Enabling valve
7 - Inlet valve
P - Pump
T - Return
Fig. 8 - Lift hydraulic circuit.
146
Vehicle
59
Yellow = Discharged oil

Red = Pressurized oil
Blue = Oil from hydraulic pump
Green = Oil trapped at relative pression
1 - Directional control valve
2 - Enabling valve
3 - Enabling pilot valve
4 - Unloading valve
5 - Down actuator piston
6 - Valvematic
7 - Inlet valve
8 - Anti shock valve
Fig. 9 - Hydraulic lift circuit - NEUTRAL
147
Vehicle
59

2 - Enabling valve
4 - Unloading valve
6 - Valvematic
7 - Inlet valve
Fig. 10 - Hydraulic lift circuit - RAISING
148
Vehicle
59

2 - Enabling valve
4 - Unloading valve
6 - Valvematic
7 - Inlet valve
Fig. 11 - Hydraulic lift circuit - LOWERING
149
Vehicle
59
Fig. 12 - Control linkage for draft control.
Fig. 13 - Lift hydraulic control valve.
150
Fig. 14 - Section views of the lift
Vehicle
59
Fig. 15 - Pins of the draft control and position control levers
Fig. 16 - Control linkage for draft control and stop screw for the position control lever
151
Vehicle
59
Fig. 17 - Top view of the lift.
Fig. 18 - Rear view of the lift.
152
Vehicle
59
Fig. 19 - Section views of the lift hydraulic control valve
153
Vehicle
59
Sensing arm assembly
Install on screw A:
ring B,
spacer C,
spring D,
ring E,
screw in nut F to take up all play.
Screw in nut F a further quarter turn to preload the spring.
Slide this assembly into spring holder G.
Fit eye H and tighten nut F against it to a torque of 100 105 Nm (~10 Kgm), taking care that nut F does not turn on
screw A.
Screw plug I into spring holder G to prevent axial movement of the previously assembled pack.
Apply a small quantity of LOCTITE 242 before fitting plug I.

Apply a small quantity of LOCTITE 242 before fitting nut F and eye H.
Grease spring D before fitting
Fig. 20 - Sensing arm assembly diagram
154
C D
Vehicle
59
Power-lift distributor valve spring setting specifications
oil flow control valve spring

no. of springs used
wire diameter
external diameter
released spring
loaded spring
pilot valve spring

no. of springs used
wire diameter
external diameter
released spring
loaded spring
hydraulic distributor spring

no. of springs used
wire diameter
external diameter
released spring
loaded spring
nonreturn valve spring

no. of springs used
wire diameter
external diameter
released spring
loaded spring
valvematicspring
no. of springs used
wire diameter
external diameter
released spring
loaded spring
(N 40,4) - kg 4,115
(N 66) - kg 6,727
n.
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
1
1,4
7,8
54
47,5
43,37
(N 21) - kg 2,133
(N 28,5) - kg 2,899
n.
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
1
0,9
7,8
25,5
15,2
11,5
(N 43) - kg 4,4
(N 39) - kg 4
n.
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
1
1,2
10,4
110
65
60
(N 29) - kg 2,96
(N 43) - kg 4,43
n.
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
2
1,1
8,8
25
17
13
(N 41,3) - kg 4,2
(N 54,3) - kg 5,5
N
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
1
1,2
9,5
57,3
35
25,8
155
Vehicle
59
Electronic power-lift
ELECTRONIC LIFT
The electronic lift is controlled by an electronic control unit and a control panel.
The electronic control unit processes the signals from the input devices and generates the output signals for the electro-hydraulic control of the lift control valve.
The system provides Draft and Position control functions.
IMPORTANT
The "ALL ROUND TESTER" provides the interface for electronic control unit self-diagnostic and programming
operations. All the display messages are given in the chapter "LIFT TESTER Control unit version 1.24A" of the
Appendix (see table of contents).
Fig. 1 - Configuration of the electronic lift system

1 - Control Unit
2 - Electro-hydraulically operated control valve (2 proportional solenoid valves)
3 - Hydraulic pump
4 - Draft sensor
5 - Position sensor
6 - Maximum lift height control knob
7 - Lowering speed control knob
8 - Draft/wheelslip intermix control knob
9 - Depth control knob
10 - Up/Down control
11 - Lock and alarm warning light
12 - Manual UP control (on the fender)
13 - Manual DOWN control (on the fender)
156
Vehicle
59
Control panel
The control panel comprises a series of potentiometers, lights and switches which serve to set the system operating
mode, raise or lower the lift and to provide information about system status.
The control panel is separate from the electronic control unit, to which it is connected by way of a multi-pin connector.
Fig. 2 - Control panel

1 - Lowering speed control knob
2 - Maximum lift height control knob
3 - Draft/wheelslip intermix control knob
4 - Up/Down control switch with integral Lock and Alarm warning light
5 - Depth control knob
Control level or depth control knob (5)

Used to set the reference value for the control function.
Informs the electronic control unit of the required level of working depth or draft control for respectively the position and
draft control functions. This knob is fitted with a mechanical lock to prevent excessive force being applied at the limits of
potentiometer travel.
Turning the knob to the left increases the working depth. The first sector on the left permanent Float control.
Mix position/draft control (3)
Used to select the control mode.
When turned fully to the left, pure draft control is selected.
When turned fully to the right, pure draft control is selected.
In the intermediate sector, sets the minimum depth for draft control: the function is disengaged by turning the knob
to the right, the depth is decreased by turning the knob to the left.
157
Vehicle
59
Lowering speed control knob (1)

Used to vary the at which the linkage is lowered.
Sets the maximum aperture of the proportional solenoid valve that controls the lowering speed.
Turning the knob to the left reduces the lowering speed.
Maximum lift height control knob (2)

Used to set the maximum height to which the linkage is raised when the driver operates the lift control.
Turning the knob to the left reduces the maximum lift height.
Up/Down control switch (4)

Rocker switch used to raise or lower the linkage, incorporating a safety lockout/release.
Up control
Pressing this button for at least 0.2 seconds raises the lift to the maximum lift height.
Control/Float mode
If the Down button is pressed for less than 0.2 seconds, Control mode is activated.
If the button is held pressed for longer, Float mode is activated. In the latter case, the implement will be lowered at the
rate set by the lowering speed control knob and the lowering solenoid valve will be operated for as long as the button is
held pressed.
The moment the button is released, the system will exit Float mode and automatically resume Control mode.
Lock/release
Activates/deactivates total lock out of the control panel. When the lock is activated, the warning light illuminates.
On starting, the system is always locked; to release the lock, hold the Up control button pressed for 3 seconds until the
light goes out. The light will flash rapidly while the button is pressed.
To activate the lock, hold the Up control button pressed for 3 seconds after which the light will illuminate; again, the light
will flash rapidly while the button is being pressed.
On activating the lock, the linkage is immediately raised to the height determined by the maximum lift height control
knob. Any subsequent alteration to the position of the lift controls (including the maximum lift height control knob) will
have no effect on the position of the linkage until the lock is released.
Lift status indicator light

This light provides information about the operating status of the lift.
If the light is permanently illuminated, this indicates that the system is locked.
If the light is off, this indicates that the system is operating normally. If the light is flashing, this indicates an alarm condition.
WARNING: only use the Up control button located on the solenoid valve of the lift control valve in cases of extreme necessity and when the engine is running at idle speed. Release the button before the linkage reaches the maximum height, as the automatic stop determined by the both position sensor and the safety switch is excluded during this operation.
158
Vehicle
59
Remote pushbuttons for lift operation from ground

Two remote pushbuttons are located on the rear fender.
To enable these pushbuttons it is first necessary to release the lift control system.
Operation of the manual controls overrides any current lift functions and places the control unit in STOP condition, awaiting new control signals.
Fig. 3 - Lift control pushbuttons
1 - Up
2 - Down
Fig. 4 - Ground-operated lift controls.
159
Vehicle
59
Lift operation
On starting the engine, the lift is in Lock condition; to release the lift, press the UP switch for at least 5 seconds.
The lift control system enters STOP status in which condition the lift may be raised to the maximum lift height by pressing the switch for at least 0.5 seconds but no more than 3 seconds.
To activate the lift control system, press the DOWN switch for less than 0.3 seconds; if the switch is held pressed for longer, FLOAT mode is activated and CONTROL mode will only be resumed when the switch is released.
The functions of the three potentiometers are as follows:
1 - MAXIMUM LIFT HEIGHT (used to set the maximum height to which the linkage can be raised)
2 - LOWERING SPEED (used to set the rate at which the implement is lowered).
3 - CONTROL (used to select the control type: when turned fully to the left POSITION control is selected, when turned
fully right DRAFT control is selected). When turned to the intermediate sector, mixed draft and position control is selected.
LIFT ALARMS
CODE
MESSAGE ON TESTER
Alarm description
11
EVUP DISCONN
UP SOLENOID DISCONNECTED
12
EVUP C.C.
UP SOLENOID SHORT CIRCUIT
13
EVDW DISCONN
DOWN SOLENOID DISCONNECTED
14
EVDW C.C.
DOWN SOLENOID SHORT CIRCUIT
15
EPROM CECK-
BLOCCO TOTALE DEL SISTEMA SOLLEVATORE-
21
POS. SENS. C.C.
POSITION SENSOR SHORT CIRCUIT
22
POS. SENS. DIS
POSITION SENSOR DISCONNECTED
23
GEN. FAIL. CPU
GENERAL FAILURE OF CPU.
24
25
31
41
DRAFT SENS NC
DRAFT SENSOR DISCONNECTED
42
DRAFT SENS C.C.
DRAFT SENSOR SHORT CIRCUIT
45
EEPROM CECK
EEPROM ERROR
Example display of code 23:

on
off
all times in seconds

2
0.3 0.3
0.3
1,2
0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2
The criteria for encoding are as follows:

light off for 2 seconds
number of 0.3 second flashes corresponding to the tens digit
light off continuously for 1.2 seconds
number of 0.2 second flashes corresponding to the units digit
repetition of the cycle until the alarm ceases
160
Fig. 5 - Electronic circuit diagram of the

ECU
59
PIN OUT
REAR LIFT ECU
9
Mix
Main Control
L. Speed
Draft
11
10
+Vcc Sensors
Max H.
12
Position
Electrovalve DOWN
Electrovalve UP
ISO 9141
GND
1
Vcc
1 - Vcc
2 - UP solenoid valve
3 - DOWN solenoid valve
4 - GND
5 - Sensor Vcc
6 - Position
7 - Draft
8 - Lowering speed
9 - Maximum height
10 - Mix
11 - Main control
12 - ISO 9141
Vehicle
1K2
Lock/Alarm
Extern up
Extern down
A - UP solenoid valve
B - DOWN solenoid valve
C - Tester IN/OUT
D - Position sensor
E - Draft sensor
F - Lowering speed
G - Maximum height
H - DRAFT/POSITION mix control
I - Main control
L - DOWN/UP control
Up
Down
V
+
EVup
EVdown
Tester
In/Out
Position
Sensor
Draft
Sensor
Lowering
Speed
Maximum
Height
Mix
Draft/Pos
Main
Control
Down/Up
Control lever
161
Vehicle
59
Calibration of the AUTOMATIC

1 - Unlock the lift.
2 - Move the lift arms to the required height using the ground-operated UP/DOWN controls.
3 - Press the P.T.O. AUTO switch.
4 - Press the P.T.O. engagement switch for approx. 10 seconds.
The selected height is set as the maximum height limit for P.T.O. operation.
Emergency manual lift control
In the event of a malfunction of the electronic system, the lift can still be controlled by way of the mechanical pushbuttons located on the solenoid valves of the lift control valve (see figure below). However this operation should
only be carried in an emergency and with the engine running at idle speed.
Release the pushbutton before the lift arms reach their maximum height, as the automatic stop determined by the position sensor is disabled during this manoeuvre.
Fig. 6 - Emergency manual lift control pushbuttons.
HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE

(located on lift casing)
162
A - Up
B - Down
Fig. 7 - Diagram of the hydraulic control valve.

Hydraulic control valve of the electronic lift
This control valve is of the open centre type and has two solenoid valves for raising and lowering the lift arms.
The two solenoid valves are controlled directly by the ECU.
Do not connect the solenoid valves directly to an electrical power source, as they would be irreparably damaged.
Vehicle
59
LIST OF ELECTRONIC LIFT TESTS

Connect the ALL-ROUND TESTER to the diagnostics socket and select option (2) [REAR LIFT CONTROL].
Press (0) twice and enter the password [BAC0] in order to modify the parameters.
Press [E] twice to display the first screen page.
The first screen indicates the selected tractor type (10N or 10S).
If the selected tractor type does not correspond to the machine being tested, change the type by pressing the number
alongside the required model and follow the on-screen instructions to store the new type in memory.
Release 1.23A does not display the tractor type selection screen and the parameters are those relative to the 10S type.
Enter the MENU screen and press (0) to enter the modification menu.
2 - Modification menu.
1 - Monitor
2 - Parameters
3 - Tests
4 - Max/min height calibr.
5 - Alarms
6 - Calibr. PWMmin
- MONITOR Displays data related to the control algorithm and the PWM controls (sensor and potentiometer status).
- Parameters 10S - Programming parameters of the control solenoid valves (Ev).
- Tests - allows you to test ground-operated pushbuttons and display sensor values.
- MAXIMUM/MINIMUM LIFT HEIGHT CALIBRATION
Allows you to calibrate the maximum lift height and the lifting speed.
DEFAULT VALUES 10S:
1 - max. Height
880
2 - Lifting speed.
500
To calibrate the maximum height, put the lift control in STOP condition (seeLIFT OPERATION) and select "CALIBRATION" from the
main menu. Then select option 1 from the "CALIBRATION" menu, turn the MAXIMUM LIFT HEIGHT knob to the maximum position
and, using the ground-operated UP/DOWN pushbuttons, position the lift arms at the required maximum height.
Press "E" and "C" to save and confirm the new maximum height value. Exit the "CALIBRATION" menu and continue the tests.
(V=0.84 dm )
Rear lift
210 Bar
Fig. 8 - Functional diagram of the lift control valve.

1- UP valve
2- DOWN valve
3- Enabling valve
4- Antishock valve
5- Check valve
6- Lifting cylinder
163
Vehicle
59
Fig. 9 - Control valve hydraulic circuit - NEUTRAL

3 - Enabling valve
4 - Check valve
P - Oil flow
164
Vehicle
59
Fig. 10 - Control valve hydraulic circuit - LIFTING

3 - Enabling valve
4 - Check valve
P - Oil flow
165
Vehicle
59
Fig. 11 - Control valve hydraulic circuit - LOWERING

3 - Enabling valve
4 - Check valve
P - Oil flow
166
Vehicle
59
Fig. 12 - Hydraulic control valve for electronic lift.
167
Vehicle
59
Fig. 13 - Position sensor calibration of the electronic lift.
POSITION SENSOR CALIBRATION

If a new position sensor is fitted, it will have to be adjusted.
Proceed as follows:
1 - Move the lift arms to the minimum height position, connect the "ALL AROUND TESTER" and access the maximum
height calibration screen; screw the sensor in or out until a number between 4 and 10 is displayed.
2 - Tighten down the sensor
3 - Proceed with the calibration of the maximum height.
168
Vehicle
59
2
1
3
Fig. 14 - Pin for draft control of the electronic lift

1 - Pressure test fitting for lift cylinder pressure
2 - Lift control valve
3 - Anti-shock valve
169
Vehicle
59
Fig. 15 - Rear view of the electronic lift.
170
Vehicle
59
A
(ALIMENTAZIONE DA REGOLATORE DI FLUSSO)
27 L/min MAX.
(ALIMENTAZIONE DA POMPA
O DA FRENATURA IDRAULICA)
27 L/min
2630'
Corsa sensore
10
Quota sensore montato: 117.5
Quota sensore libero: 119
8.43
7330'
2630'
Fig. 16 - External hydraulic circuit of the lift.

A - Lift control valve
171
172
Asse tubo alim. da regolatore
di flusso x sollev. meccanico
T. E LE S A
Vehicle
59
Fig. 17 - Top view of the electronic lift.

(Salita)
(discesa)
PA
Vehicle
59
Precautions for electronic equipment

The tractor is equipped with a number of sensitive electrical devices and electronic components.
In particular, electronic components do not tolerate polarity inversion, over-current, connection errors, etc..
The electronic components are provided with internal and external protections, but the following precautions are still necessary:
Switch off the control panel before carrying out any work on electrical components.
Do not use a screwdriver of light bulb to test for electrical current; only use the appropriate diagnostic equipment (tester).
Do not apply excessive force when connecting and disconnecting electrical connectors; do not prise connectors
apart using a screwdriver, and always respect the polarity of the connection.
In the event of a fault in a circuit controlled by an electronic control unit, do not immediately replace the control unit,
but first check that the sensors and actuators are functioning correctly.
When replacing a defective electronic control unit, only unscrew the retaining screws; avoid interfering with other
screws as these could be calibration screws.
Inspect contacts on sensors and connectors for corrosion.
Do not use arc welding in the vicinity of electrical circuits.
Avoid short-circuits and polarity inversion.
When working on components controlled by microprocessors, always disconnect the power supply by turning the
ignition key to the STOP position before disconnecting the component.
If the tractor is to be resprayed and passed through a paint baking oven, remove all electronic components.
Do not insert the probes of the tester into multi-pole sockets on connectors or other devices (this deforms the contacts and thus leads to poor connections).
Do not test for the presence of electrical current by causing a spark, i.e. by short-circuiting components across wires
or to earth.
Do not reverse the polarity or swap over wires in multi-pole connectors.
CHECKING THE ELECTRONIC SYSTEM
Elements to check:
Sensors
Electronic control units
Actuators
1) Checking the system power supply:

current present at input to the connector plugged into the device;
current present at output from connector
earth connection
voltage correct.
2) Check downstream components: sensors.
3) Check upstream components.
CHECKING MECHANICAL COMPONENTS
Check the splines on the external and internal lift arms for damage or excessive wear; replace the levers if necessary.
Check the bushes of the lift arm shaft for scoring or excessive wear.
Check the bushes and the pins connecting the lift arms to the hydraulic cylinder are not worn and are firmly inserted in
the seats on the levers.
Check the diameters of the rod and bushes in the cylinders and compare with the maximum wear limits in the table.
Check that the splines on the lifting shaft are not excessively worn and that the machines surfaces in contact with the
support bushes are not damaged.
NOTE: whenever the lifting cylinders are dismantled, new seals must be fitted.
173
Vehicle
59
Front hydraulic power-lift
Front hydraulic lift

On request the tractor can be equipped with the front hydraulic lifting system.
It is operated by means of two hydraulic cylinders actuated by the related control lever placed at the right-hand side of
the operator driving position.
The lever controls a single-acting distributor valve linked to the rear tractor power-lift case.
Inspections
Ensure that the cylinder pin bushings are not worn and be sure these are firmly secured in their seats.
NOTE: Replace gaskets after each hydraulic lifting cylinder disassembly.
Specifications
power-lift type
hydraulic cylinder type
oil supply
peak operating pressure
cylinder stem diameter
lifting stroke
lifting capacity
A - Front lift cylinders (2)

B - Hydraulic accumulator
Volume 0.700 litres
Nitrogen precharge 130 bar
maximum operating pressure 250 bar
C - Antishock valve
D - Lowering speed regulator valve
E - Lockout cock (prevents oil from
discharging from the cylinders when
transporting raised implements on the road).
Fig. 1 - Lift operation.
174
bar
mm
mm
Kg
with two hydraulic cylinders and

removable arms
single-acting
from the rear auxiliary
hydraulic distributor
180
50
170
1500
Vehicle
59
Hydraulic accumulator and antishock valve for front lift

The front lift is equipped with a hydraulic accumulator with an antishock valve. This improves hydraulic system performance and reduces strain on the front axle.
Fig. 2 - Front linkage components.

The grease seal ring must be fitted as shown in the figure and must enter the housing bushing by 2 mm
Fig. 3 - Front linkage components with relative valves and accumulator.
175
Vehicle
59
A - To lift cylinders
B - Rate of drop valve
C - Anti-shock valve
D - Accumulator
E - Lowering speed control valve
F - Directional control valve
Fig. 4 - Oil pressure accumulator and anti-shock valve. (The directional valve to which is connecting, is convertable into single-acting. For the operations to see auxiliary systems chapter).
176
Vehicle
Front power take-off
59

General information
The power take-off clutch is a multidisk, oil-bath and electro-hydraulic control type.
The front power take-off is directly linked to the crankshaft by means of a flexing coupling; while the shaft-end is equipped by an
universal joint.
The oil used for P.T.O. operation is contained in the P.T.O. casing.
A specific gear pump installed on the P.T.O. shaft sucks the oil,
which flows first through a filter for being subsequently routed under pressure to the clutch assembly through an electro-hydraulic
distributor.
The oil is strained through a second (15 micron) filter placed on the
pressurized circuit located between oil pump and hydraulic distributor.
Fig. 1 - Front P.T.O. shaft terminal.
A maximum 57 kgm (560 Nm) torque can be transitted to the hitched implement in this way, i.e. 80 CV max. (or 58 kW).
To avoid these standards may be exceeded it is recommended
that a special joint having proper specifications be installed between implement and P.T.O.
The P.T.O. shaft rear teminal has clockwise direction of rotation
(with respect to the driving position).
Fig. 2 - Front P.T.O. clutch assembly.
Specifications
clutch
manufacturer
clutch disk no
clutch disk diameter
clutch disk set thickness
mm
- max. wear mm
- standard wear mm
counterdisk number
disk lubricating pressure
bar
peak calibrating pressure (to press the disks together):
- of brake disk
bar
- of clutch disk
bar
piston axial thrust
kg
brake disk braking torque (peak pressure)
kgm
hydraulic pump
oil flow rate (at engine peak speed)
(dm/min) litre/min
oil filter
cod.
filtering capacity
micron
filtering surface
cm
hydraulic distributor stroke
mm
rrear P.T.O. shaft terminal
direction of rotation
oil reservoir capacity
litre (dm)
oil type
3
SAME DEUTZ-FAHR
DEUTSCHLAND
4
124,5
20,80
21,80 - 22,20
4 + 1(spacer)
1,5
4
13
1523
1
gear type
12
9012.424.2
90
222
1,5
1.3/8" - 6 splines
with regard to driving position
2,5
AKROS MULTI 10W30 (APl-GL4)
177
Vehicle
59
engagement stage
A - Checking the clutch assembly engagement pressure (10 13 bar).
Fig. 3 - Front P.T.O. clutch hydraulic circuit (engagement stage).
178
Vehicle
59
disengagement stage
A - Checking clutch assembly engagement pressure (4 6 bar).
Fig. 4 - Front P.T.O. clutch hydraulic circuit (disengagement stage).
179
Vehicle
59
Apply some LOCTITE 510 (red) on the surface betuen cover and box
Fig. 5 - Longitudinal section of the front P.T.O. assembly.

A - Solenoid valve
C - brake apply press. control valve
E - Strainer
Fig. 6 - Front P.T.O. shaft flexing coupling.
180
B - Clutch pressure control valve

D - Clutch engagement pressure accumulator
F - Oil level indicator plug
Vehicle
59
Apply some LOCTITE 212 (sky-blue) on the screw threads.
Fig. 7 - Cross-section of the front P.T.O. assembly.

A - Brake disc
D - Input shaft
G - P.T.O. shaft
B - Clutch discs
E - Strainer
C - Oil pump
F - Oil drain plug
Fig. 8 - Top view of front P.TO.
Correct fitment of front P.T.O. shaft bearing

Locate the bearing 2.2421.012.0 with the shoulder directed toward the gear as indicated in fig 8.
181
Vehicle
59

Installing RING-FEEDER rings
Install all the parts following the order shown in figure.
Thoroughly tighten the pulley hub on engine crankshaft to 38 2
kgm (380 20 Nm).
Fit an intermediate flexible coupling with a torsional rigidity of
25,145 kgm/rad; the maximum applicable inertia must not exceed
0.5 kgm .
2
Fig. 9 - RING-FEEDER rings installed.
Fig. 10 - Front P.T.O. assembly parts
182
Vehicle
59
Checking clutch
Make sure that the clutch disk friction linings are neither worn nor torn, if so replace the disks.
The control piston should be replaced if signs of scoring are noticed.
If the splined sliding surface of the clutch disk hub is sunk in its upper part, the hub should be replaced.
Check the efficiency of the piston return spring.
The spring specifications should correspond to those indicated in the specific table. Replace if necessary.
The clutch and brake piston sealing rings as well as the brake disk itself should be replaced if excessively worn.
If either the rotary seals or the relevant seats are worn, these should be replaced.
Every time the assembly is taken to pieces, carefully clean the oil passages in the clutch casing; use compressed air if
required.
Check the clearance of the clutch friction discs

With new discs in place, check that distance A (Fig 11) is between 0,5 and 2 mm.
If the clearance is greater than the maximum value indicated, add 1 x shim p/n 2.1599.499.0 at the position arrowed.
Fig. 11 - Checking disk clearance of front power-take-off.
Checking clutch assembly engagement pressure

Fit no. 5.9030.517.4 equipment to the oil supply pipe using no.
5.9030.632.0/10 union as shown in figure 3 at pages 254-255 and
then connect no. 5.9030.514.0 oil pressure gauge.
With the P.T.O. engaged
Let the oil circulate within the clutch casing and then be sure the
following conditions are established: with engine running at peak
idling speed the pressure reading should be 13 1 bar; with engine running at the lowest idling speed the pressure reading should
be 10 1 bar.
N.B. - Make sure the P.T.O. shaft terminal is turning.
With the P.T.O. disengaged
Let the oil circulate within the distributor casing and then be sure
the following conditions are established: with engine running at
peak idling speed the pressure reading should be 6 0.5 bar; with
engine running at the lowest idling speed the pressure reading
should be 4 0.5 bar.
N.B: Make sure the P.T.O. shaft terminal is being braked.
Fig. 12 - Electro-hydraulic control valve.
183
Vehicle
59
Verify activation of
the solenoid valve
check piston
free stroke
clutch slipping
P.T.O. brake does not

apply
for
replace the solenoid valve if necessary
recheck pressure
replace the springs

of inefficient valves
inspect O-rings on
piston and manifold
replace the solenoid valves if necessary
verify movement of
piston
remove any roughness preventing

smooth action
inspect clutch discs

for wear
replace discs
Check the solenoid

operated
control
valve
replace the solenoid valve if necessary
Check
engage ment pressure
inspect O-rings and

replace if necessary
piston jammed
replace
out-of-setting valve
springs
Spring specifications
piston return spring
wire diameter
external diameter
released spring
loaded spring
hydraulic system valve springs
quantit
wire diameter
external diameter
released spring
loaded spring
184
cod.
mm
mm
mm
- kg 75,7 (Nm 742) mm
- kg 79,7 (Nm 782) mm
2.4019.373.1
6,5
79,5
61,5
30
28
cod.
numero
mm
mm
mm
- kg 3.6 (Nm 35) mm
- kg 4.6 (Nm 45) mm
2.4019.179.1
2
1.2
8.8
63
44,6
39.5
Controls
Hydrostatic steering
63
code 290.6310.4/10 Danfoss type for 4WD
code 010.8555.4 danfoss type for 4WD with double steering cylinder and oversized pump capacity of 14cc
code 009.3141.4/10 Danfoss type for 2WD
General information
There in no direct mechanical connection between the wheels and the steering wheel and therefore no vibration can reach the driver.
Turning the steering wheel operates a rotary distributor connected to an oil flow control shutter permitting the pressure
oil to be directed to the hydraulic cylinder in the amount necessary to provide the desired steering action.
The steering system is an open-centre reactive type: the user can directly feel the steering response on the steering
wheel and perform a prompt correction of the driving direction.
In addition, the remarkable wheel caster angle will help increase the wheel self-centering effect as the wheels will automatically get in a straight line when the steering wheel is released.
The hydraulic circuit is fully independent. The oil drawn from the gearbox flows first through a high-delivery filter before
being routed under pressure to the distributor by a pump constantly in mesh driven by the engine and fitted on gearbox
left-hand side.
Two powerful cylinders, connected to the front wheel hubs, ensure the thrust necessary to steering under any working
conditions.
Oil returning from the power steering unit is directed to the unit piloting the electrohydraulic controls and sole function to
lubricate the gearbox.
Moreover this system offers the advantage that the tractor can be driven also in the event of either a pump failure or an
engine stop. A valve within the distributor will allow the oil to be drawn from the discharge circuit through the oil control
shutter, whenever a pressure drop occurs in the pump delivery circuit.
hydraulic directional control valve
type of valve
relief valve setting
bar
bar
mm
clearance between spool and sleeve

turns of steering wheel before road wheels respond
- engine running
- engine at standstill
steering cylinders
working stroke of piston rod
rod diameter
pushing force
steering wheel turns to full lock
tightening torques
valve cover securing screws
cylinder securing bolt
2WD
4WD
2WD
4WD
ospc 80 or open-centre reactive type for 2WD and 4WD

ospc 125 or open-centre reactive type for 4WD with oversized
oil pump and double steering cylinder
150 for 4 WD
100 for 2 WD
0,03
0 - 2
0 - 6
mm
mm
mm
kn
kn
n
171
42
50
13,6
19
2.17
kgm
kgm
3
16
Nm
Nm
29
155
185
Controls
63
Steering pump
Clean all component parts of the pump thoroughly, using petrol.
Check that the gears are not unduly worn, otherwise replace.
Directional control valve

Clean all parts of the valve thoroughly.
Check, utilizing a comparator for internal dimensions, that the clearance between spool and sleeve (A - B - Fig 1) is no greater that
0.03 mm: otherwise replace.
The two components are not available separately as spare parts.
Check the setting of the pressure relief valve

Fig. 1 - Fit diameter between internal and external elements of the control valve.
Couple pressure gauge 5.9030.513.0 by means of adaptor

5.9030.579.0 to the fitting of the left hand steering cylinder (as indicated in fig 2).
Start the engine and allow to idle for a few minutes; then, with the
steering on full right hand lock, turn the wheel further until the hand
of the gauge stabilizes at around the maximum pressure. If this is
different to the maximum operating pressure (150 bar for 4WT and
100 bar for 2WT), adjust the setscrew (A - fig 10, page 192) of the
valve until the requisite value is re-established in the circuit.
Repeat the same sequence of operations with the pressure gauge
and adaptor fitted to the right hand steering cylinder, this time on
the left hand lock.
Fig. 2 - Testing pressure in the hydraulic steering

circuit.
A - fitting
B - cylinder
Bleeding the hydraulic circuit

Start the engine and allow to idle at minimum rpm.
Loosen the two fittings at the cylinder and turn the steering wheel
each way until oil emerges devoid of air bubbles.
Assembly of orbital pump unit
Fig. 3 - Correct assembly of orbital pump unit
186
Locate the rotor A in the stator B as illustrated, making certain that

the pin C is perpendicular to the plane x - x of the valve body as indicated in fig 3.
Controls
63
Teering wheel shaft

Verify the integrity of the steering column, and in particular, make
certain that the surfaces of the bearings are not scored, also that
the splines are neither damaged nor showing signs of excessive
wear.
Do not grease or oil the bearing inside the sleeve.
Check that the steering column rotates freely, without sticking, but
also without excessive play.
Before refitting the rubber boot A (Fig 4), smear the steering column B with the grease at the position indicated in fig 4.
Having tightened all components, check that the steering wheel
continues to operate correctly even when at its two height adjustment limit positions (fully raised and fully lowered).
Fig. 4 - Section through steering wheel shaft

A - Rubber boot
B - Steering column
Steering cylinders
Clamp the cylinder in a vice and withdraw the piston G (fig. 7);
If necessary, remove the circlip F (fig. 8) from its groove with the
aid of a suitable tool to allow withdrawal of the ball end G (fig. 8).
Fig. 5 - Steering column.

A - Bearing
B - Sleeve
A - Shock valves
B - Anticavitation valves
C - Pressure relief valve (150 bar)
D - Emergency steering
check valve
E - By-pass valve (redirects
return flow to inlet)
F - Orbital pump unit
G - Directional control valve
Fig. 6 - Components of directional control valve
187
Controls
63
I - Snap ring
L - Head
M - Gasket
N - Dust seal
O - Spring
P - Ring nut
Fig. 7 - Single acting cylinder.

A - Snap ring
B - Ball
C - Cylinder
D - Self-locking nut
E - Guide ring
F - Seal
G - Piston
H - Shaft
Servicing
Verify the integrity of the O-ring and wiper seals. Replace any
components showing signs of wear or damage.
Inspect the sliding surfaces both of the rod and of the cylinder for
signs of scoring, heavy wear or any kind of damage; if any of these
are discernible, replace the affected component.
Check for correct operation of the ball end, ensuring that it betrays
no signs of heavy wear, scoring or oxidation, the presence of
which dictates replacement.
Lubricate the wiper seals and ball end with care.
Reassemble the cylinder, repeating the dismantling operations in
reverse sequence.
Fig. 8 - Ball joint

F - Circlip
G - Ball joint
Fig. 9- Section through single acting cylinder.

A - Wiper
B - Ring nut
C - Gasket
188
D - Head
E - Cylinder
F - O-ring
G - Self-locking nut
H - Ball end
I - Circlip
L - Piston
M - O-ring
N - Shaft
Controls
63
Instructions for the hydrostatic steering distributor

assembly
1 - Insert the spring set (blue) as shown

in figure.
2 -Insert first the two external spring blades into the rotary distributor and subsequently the two internal ones.
3 - Press the spring blades to align in

centre position.
4 - Reassemble the rotary distributor.
5 - Act on springs in such a way they are

prevented from projecting outwards with
respect to the rotary distributor outside
surface.
6 -Fit the spacer onte the distributor.
7 - Insert the drive pin into the cylinder
8 - Install the axial bearing following the

assembly order shown in next figure.
9 - Axial bearing installation.
10 - Use no. 5.9030.480.0 tool to fit the

seal ring.
11 - Insert the O-ring after fitting the tool

sleeve into the distributor case.
189
Controls
63
12 - O-ring as installed on the plug.
13 - Insert the O-ring into the sleeve and

press until it is fully inserted.
14 - Pull out the tool.
15 - Insert the distributor from the bottom trying to make installation easier alternately rotating in both directions.
16 - Press the distributor until the plug is

pushed out of the opposite side.
17 - Turn the distributor case upside

down holding the rotary distributor in
place and iserting the shunt valve as in dicated by the arrow in figure.
18 - Screw down the valve grub screw in

its seat.
19 - Insert the balls as shown by the arrow.
20 - Insert the two pins in the same posi tions as previously shown.
21 - Fit the seal ring in the related seat.
22 - Fit the spacer in such a way the holes in it are in the same line as the corresponding grooves.
23 - Insert the drive shaft in the distribu tor so that the notching may engage into
the pin in a position being parallel to the
distributor face.
190
Controls
63
24 - Place the fork as shown in figure so

as the drive shaft may be held in position.
25 - After inserting the two O-rings pro perly lubricated into the oil flow control
shutter fit the stator positioning as
shown in figure.
26 - The rotor should be placed to the sta tor and then swiveled with regard to the
drive shaft as shown in figure.
27 - Place the spacer ring, (only for those models which the spacer is fitted).
28 - Install the pin screw in the special

hole (the ball valve hole).
29 - Fit the cover.
30 - Fix the cover with the securing

screws by tightening to the recommended torque.
31 - Fit the seal ring.
32 - Insert the seal ring into its seat.
33 - Install the pressure relief valve.
34 - Insert the spring.
35 - Fit the pressure relief valve cap

screw.
191
Controls
63
A - pressure relief valve

B - check valve
C - from pump
D - anticavitation valve
E - emergency steering check valve
Fig. 10 - Distributor cross-section.
192
F - return flow
L - to left hand cylinder
R - to right hand cylinder
P - pump
T - discharger
Controls
63
1 - Oil to the main pump

2 - Oil to the flow control shutter
3 - Oil to the steering cylinder
4 - Oil trapped in closed circuit
5 - Oil in the discharging line
6 - Oil in the aspirating line
7 - Right-hand rotation
8 - Left-hand rotation
9 - Neutral position
Fig. 11 - Reactive-type, open-centre hydraulic distributor schematic diagram.
193
Controls
63
Greasing the steering shaft
On assembly, grease the areas shown on the left with Molikote

GN-PLUS
Fig. 12 - Greasing the steering shaft.
Fig. 13 - Components of steering controls and hydrostatic power steering support
194
Controls
63
8 Bar
L
OSPC 80 OR
100 Bar 2 WD
0.009.3141.4/11
150 Bar 4 WD
0.290.6310.4/10
T
Fig. 14 - Hydrostatic steering operation diagram.
195
Controls
63
Check oil level in
tank
Restore level
Check for air
in system
Bleed the system
Check for shorn distributor securing

pin
Replace pin
Unable to steer tractor

Check safety valve
setting
Reset or replace if
necessary
Hard steering
Check safety valve

setting
Distributor and oil flow Check oil filter for

dirt
control shutter worn
Blocked distributor
Check for dirty oil
Bleed the system

Check for air in the
system
Check for leakage Replace worn seal

from the distributor rings
and the piston seal
rings in the hydraulic cylinder
Change oil and replace filter

Check that the oil is
of prescribed type
Change oil and replace filter
Clean distributor
and replace oil
Check that oil is not
excessively hot
Stop tractor and let

oil cool
Bleed the system
Wheels oscillation
196
Check for air in

system
Check for oil leakage in the hydraulic

cylinder
Replace seal ring
Check valve setting
Adjust
Controls
Mechanical controls
64
Mechanical controls
Given the constructional simplicity of these controls, we present a series of figures illustrating the individual components of the controls.
Only some of these controls require adjustment; for instructions for these adjustments, refer to the chapter dealing with
corresponding unit.
Fig. 1 - Gearbox inversor control
Fig. 2 - Gear-change control
Fig. 3 - Gearbox reduction unit control
Fig. 4 - Synchronised P.T.O. control
Fig. 5 - Hand throttle control
Fig. 6 - Accelerator pedal control
Fig. 7 - Lift controls
Fig. 8 - Ground-operated lift controls
Fig. 9 - Auxiliary control valve controls
N.B.: For P.T.O. controls see instructions on page 178.
WARNING: It is important that those tie-rods fitted with adjustable forks are adjusted so that their respective control levers can be moved through their entire range from min. to max. without obstruction.
Fig. 1 - Gearbox inversor control
197
Controls
64
Mechanical controls
Fig. 2 - Gear-change control.
Fig. 3 - Gearbox reduction unit control.
198
Controls
Mechanical controls
64
Fig. 4 - Synchronised P.T.O. control.
Lever play adjustment: insert a washer 2.1311.010.2 and , if necessary, other washers 2.1580.004.0 in the space A to
obtain a play of 0.5-1 mm.
Fig. 5 - Hand throttle control.

Control adjustment: tighten nut A to a torque of 7 kgm (70 Nm), screw in screw B to obtain lever movement with a load of 70N
Turn the control lever backward and forward 2-3 times through approx. 25 and re-check the load on the lever; adjust if
necessary.
199
Controls
64
Mechanical controls
FITTING AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE

GOVERNOR
EXTERNAL CONTROLS OF THE MECHANICAL
Accelerator pedal (fig. 6).

Attach the throttle cable A to bracket C and then to lever D, then fit spring P. Adjust the position of screw G to obtain a pedal travel of 75 mm as shown in figure 6 (corresponding to an angle of approximately 32) and secure in position with
locknut Q.
Hand throttle
Attach the throttle cable B to bracket E by tightening screw N and positioning the locknuts O and then attach the cable to lever V.
Connection of the accelerator pedal and hand throttle cables to the governor.
Attach the throttle cable to bracket H of the governor by way of screw L, and secure with locknuts I;
Connect the throttle cable to bracket M of the governor.
Adjust the freeplay of the throttle cable by turning the screw L (after having undone the locknuts I) so that the cable is
correctly tensioned, then re-tighten the locknuts.
Attach the throttle cable S of the hand throttle to bracket T and then attach it to lever U.
Then apply a force f = 5 to lever F and screw in self-locking nut R until the force applied is no longer capable of moving
the lever. Move the hand throttle lever to the MAX position and manually push lever F to the end of its travel, then
screw in screw N until the throttle cable is fully tensioned, then tighten locknuts O.
0,5
Fig. 6 - Adjustment of the external controls of the mechanical governor.
200
Controls
Mechanical controls
64
Control adjustment: screw in the screw with spring (Belleville) to obtain lever movement with a load of 35N.
Turn the control lever backward and forward 2-3 times through approx. 22 and re-check the load on the lever, and reset
the load to 45N.
Fig. 7 - Lift controls.
Fig. 8 - Ground-operated lift controls.
Fig. 9 - Auxiliary control valve controls.
201
Controls
68
Electro-hydraulic controls
Front P.T.O. clutch engagement control
The front P.T.O. can only be engaged when the engine is running. Pressing the pushbutton engages the front P.T.O..
The integral light illuminates to indicate that the P.T.O. is engaged.
Rear P.T.O. clutch engagement control

Activation and deactivation of the P.T.O. clutch are piloted by a dedicated control unit.
The activate/deactivate control function is se-lected by pressing the button, which returns to the off position when released.
An integral light shows when the function is activated, and serves also to indicate the type of fault that may affect the
electrohydraulic control.
When the engine is started, the warning light blinks to indicate that the control system is activated.
The P.T.O. is engaged by pressing and holding the button for at least 2 se-conds.
If the button is held for more than 10 seconds, or if there is a fault with the electrohydraulic control, the P.T.O. will be deactivated automatically.
The control unit also disengages the P.T.O. every time the engine is swit-ched off.
The rear P.T.O. can be engaged by pressing the ground-operated pushbutton located on the rear right-hand fender.
Differential lock engagement control

Pressing the pushbutton engages the front and rear differential locks. The integral light illuminates to indicate that the
locks are engaged. Pressing the pushbutton again disengages the locks.
Front-wheel drive engagement control

Pushbutton with integral indicator light.
Press to engage front-wheel drive; press again to disengage.
N.B. Engagement of the above devices is also signalled by indicator lights on the console.
Gearbox
The POWERSHIFT transmission offers the possibility to select each speed in
or
or
(using the gear and range lever) without having to depress the clutch pedal simply by pressing the electro-hydraulic control switch.
This is achieved by way of three multi-plate clutches.
Front and rear lift

The front lift is operated by way of the control lever of the auxiliary service control valves located on the right of the driving seat, after first opening the shut-off cock in the oil delivery line to the front lift.
The mechanical rear lift is operated by controls located to the right of the driving seat.
For tractors equipped with electronic lifts, see p. 157 for a description of the controls.
202
Controls
68
R
210 Bar
4RM
Rear lift
(V=0.84 dm )
2RM
8 Bar
L
R
T
A - Main oil filter on supply circuit

B - Hydraulic pump for auxiliary service
control valve and power lift
C - Hydraulic pump for hydrostatic
steering and electro-hydraulic controls
E - Hydrostatic steering control valve
F - Steering cylinders
G - Oil cooler
H - Pressure control valves
I - Gearbox lubrication
L - Hydraulic power unit
M - Differential locks
N - 4WD engagement
O - Rear P.T.O. clutch
P - Auxiliary service control valve
Q - Front lift hydraulic control valve
R - Lifting cylinder
OSPC 80 OR
T
Lift
E
100 Bar 2 WD
0.009.3141.4/11
Neutral
6 Bar
Lower
150 Bar 4 WD
0.290.6310.4/10
P
O
N
Dis.
Rear
4 Wd
Main shaft
Sec. shaft
T
T
H.P.C.
190 Bar
E
1.1
Inn.
Front
Dis.
Inn.
Diff.look
P.T.O.
32 cc
2.3719.730.0
11 bar
L
16 bar
5 bar
H
11 cm 3
27 L/min.
19 cm 3
47 L/min.
Rh
14 cm 3
35 L/min.
N.giri/min.pompe:2522
Lf
Rapp. 1/1.0732 (44/41)
150 Micr.
Fig. 1 - Hydraulic circuit diagram (with electronic lift - STANDARD version).
203
Controls
68
F
6
(V=0.84 dm )
Rear lift
210 Bar
2.3729.320.0
A
4
700 cc
OSPC 80 OR
70 Bar
2
V1
100 Bar 2 WD
0.009.3141.4/11
150 Bar 4 WD
0.290.6310.4/10
T
V2
P
S
2
Rear free return
Rear
4 Wd
Main shaft
190 bar
P-Ecc.
Sec. shaft
P-Reg.
A
T
T
G
11 bar
16 bar
5 bar
3
11 cm
27 L/min.
A
H
Rh
L
25 Micr.
A
Fig. 2 - Hydraulic circuit diagram (version with full complement of optional equipment).
Rapp. 1/1.0732 (44/41)
C
25 Micr.
2.3719.810.0/10 (Italia)
2.3719.550.0/20 (Francia)
11 cm 3
27 L/min.
Lf
204
Trailer brake
1.1
Inn.
Front
32 cc
Diff.look
Dis.
Inn.
A - Main oil filter on supply circuit

B - Hydraulic pump for auxiliary service
control valve and power lift
C - Hydraulic pump for hydrostatic steering
and electro-hydraulic controls
D - POWERSHIFT
E - Hydrostatic steering control valve
F - Steering cylinders
G- Delivery line filter
H - Pressure control valves
I - Gearbox lubrication
L - Hydraulic power unit
M - Differential locks
N - 4WD engagement
O - Rear P.T.O. clutch
P - 6-way auxiliary service control valve
Q - Front lift hydraulic control valve
R - Lifting cylinder
S - Shut-off valve for front lift
T - Control valve for hydraulic trailer braking
U - Front lift cylinders
V1 - Anti-shock valve for front lift
V2 - Lowering speed control valve for front lift
Z - Hydraulic unloader (oil level pump)
P.T.O.
Dis.
Y Tractor brake
Freno inser.=13 bar,disinser.=5 bar

=3 bar
2.3719.740.0/10
Controls
68
A - Check valve
B - Check valve
C - Gearbox lubrication pressure control valve (5 bar)
D - Sequence valve (16 bar)
P - Pump
T - Oil return
L1- Gearbox lubrication
L2- PTO lubrication
1 - Rear PTO
2 - Differential lock
3 - 4WD
Fig. 3 - Hydraulic circuit on right-hand side of gearbox.
205
Controls
68
The hydraulic injector A inserted in the transfer pipe B equalises the oil levels in the front and rear gearboxes.
The injector allows oil in the front gearbox to flow easily into the rear gearbox.
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Flow used
Pressure of jet
Flow transferred
1,8 l/min
16 bar
25 l/min
A - Hydraulic injector
B - Transfer pipe
C - Front gearbox
D - Rear gearbox
E - Venturi pipe
Fig. 4 - Details of front and rear gearboxes.
206
Controls
68
A - Circuit transmission lubrification\PTO

B - Flow control valve
Fig. 5 - Machine with electrohydraulic controls operating differential lock, four wheel drive and power take-off, equipped with
POWERSHIFT.
207
Controls
68
A - Circuit transmission lubrification\PTO

B - Flow control valve
Fig. 6 - Machine with electrohydraulic controls operating differential lock, four wheel drive and power take-off, not equipped with
POWERSHIFT.
208
Controls
68
Specifications
Solenoid operated valve controlling four wheel drive engagement, differential lock, equipped with POWERSHIFT and the rear
P.T.O. clutch.
Code 2.3719.670.0
max. delivery rate l/min 12
max. pressure bar 210.
Before tightening the lock nut, smear the thread with LOCTlTE 242 (blue).
Fig. 7 - Solenoid valve
209
Controls
68
Specifications
Solenoid operated valve controlling the front P.T.O. clutch
Code 007.5339.0/10
max. Delivery l/min 12
max. pressure bar 210.
Before tightening the lock nut, smear the thread with LOCTlTE 242 (blue).
Fig. 8 - Solenoid valve
210
Controls
68
Fig. 9 - POWERSHIFT solenoid valves - LOW clutch engagement
211
Controls
68
Fig. 10 - POWERSHIFT solenoid valves - MEDIUM clutch engagement
212
Controls
68
Fig. 11 - POWERSHIFT solenoid valves - HIGH clutch engagement.
213
Controls
68
Adjustment of front and rear differential lock control

Turn fork A and lock nut B to preload spring C, so as to obtain a distance X allowing contact with piston E (with spring D
attached) when the piston is positioned flush with surface F (on version with electrohydraulic controls) or protrudes 18.5
mm (on version with mechanical controls).
Also check that the shoes of the fork do not rub against the sides of the engagement sleeve.
For adjustment of engagement sleeve, see chapter on front-wheel drive.
To make sure that the shifting of the piston of the rear differential look is of 12 mms.
Fig. 12 - Front and rear differential lock control.
214
Body
Driving position
71
Platform
Fig. 1 - Instrument panel.
Fig. 2 - Roll bar.
Fig. 3 - Structure of the platform.
215
Body
71
Driving position
Cab
general specifications
The cab responds to international standards in terms both of safety and of internal noise levels. The enclosure is
equipped with ventilation, heating and air conditioning systems.
Versions available are:
Cab with ventilation and heating
Cab with ventilation, heating and air conditioning
Fig. 4 - Structure of cab.
Fig. 5 - Front window glass and seals.
Fig. 6 - Front windows glass and seals.
Fig. 7 - Cab doors
216
Body
Driving position
71
Fig. 8 - Rear window.
Fig. 9 - Internal claddings
Fig. 10 - Cab roof.
Fig. 11 - Screenwash pump and liquid container.
217
Body
71
Driving position
Fig. 12 - Cab air filter unit

1 - Air filter
2 - Protective grille
Cab air filter
Periodically (as dictated by operating conditions): clean the filter.

To gain access to the filter, lower the protective grille,release the two filter clamp knobs, and remove
The filter is cleaned as follows:
blast with compressed air (6 bar max) in the direction opposite to that of normal filtration, until all accumulated dust
has been dislodged;
wash for about 15 minutes in a solution of detergent and water at 40 C;
rinse clean in running water;
leave to dry naturally at ambient temperature.
Important: the filter must be replaced if damaged, or renewed routinely after cleaning 6 times.
Screen wash
Periodically (as dictated by operating conditions):

check the level of screenwash liquid in the plastic container located at the rear of the machine.
In the event of the jet being rendered defective by an obstruction, this will be remedied generally by freeing the nozzle
outlet with a pin.
If necessary, reposition the nozzle so that the jet strikes the screen at the top of the sweep made by the wiper blade.
It is good policy during winter months to add antifreeze solution to the screenwash liquid, or methyl alcohol.
Warning: it is important that all glass in the cab is kept thoroughly clean.
The rear view mirrors must always be kept clean and properly positioned.
Screen wipers (front and rear)
The wiper blade has a bayonet fitting.

The blade is removed by lifting the catch of the central mounting.
218
Fig. 13 - Front screen wiper.
Body
Driving position
71
Fig. 14 - Rear screen wiper.
REMOVING THE DRIVING PLATFORM COMPLETE WITH CAB

NOTE: even though not strictly necessary, we advise that you remove the rear wheels to facilitate access to parts requiring disconnection.
PROCEED AS FOLLOWS:
Using a hydraulic jack, raise the rear of the tractor and place stands under the rear trumpet housings, then remove
the rear wheels;
Remove the top engine hood;
Remove the front panel, disconnecting the leads of the front lights and then disconnect the positive (+) and negative(-) battery leads;
Disconnect the leads from the starter motor and the engine oil pressure switch;
Disconnect the bulkhead connector of the dashboard warning lights;
Disconnect the leads on the right-hand side of the gearbox connected to the solenoid valves of the electro-hydraulic
services and the POWERSHIFT unit;
Disconnect the lead connected to the actuator of the electronic accelerator (only on tractors equipped with electronic
governors);
Disconnect the two tie-rods of the THROTTLE and ENGINE STOP from the governor;
Disconnect the lead connected to wheel speed sensor positioned on the left-hand side of the front gearbox;
Disconnect the three leads connected to the PTO selection sensors (540-775-1000 rpm);
Disconnect the lead to the cab heating element from the heater alternator;
Disconnect the oil pipe from the clutch control actuator;
Disconnect the brake pipes from the separate brakes valves;
Disconnect the lift control rods and remove them from the tractor;
Disconnect the hydrostatic steering oil delivery and return pipes underneath the platform and on the right-hand side
of the gearbox;
Disconnect the three 3 control levers GEARCHANGE-INVERSOR-RANGE GEARS from underneath the platform,
removing the retaining screws of each lever;
Remove the two securing straps of the exhaust silencer and remove the silencer itself;
219
Body
71
Driving position
Detach the two pipe clamps positioned in the channel passing over the engine and disconnect the oil return pipe
from the cooler and the oil pipe of front lift;
Disconnect the two hydrostatic steering delivery-return pipes from the hydrostatic steering oil cooler;
Disconnect the lead and remove the brake and clutch oil reservoir securing strap;
Disconnect the handbrake control and the synchro PTO control rod on the left-hand side under the driving platform;
Loosen the 4 screws securing the platform to the silent-blocks;
Disconnect the air conditioning system pipes at the quick-fit couplings and then loosen the respective retaining nuts
of the pipes connected to the cab so that they may be detached from their support brackets;
Connect the cab to a suitable hoist and raise it, taking care that it disengages form the tractor, then remove it from the
tractor;
Fig. 15 - Disconnecting the parts connectinga the

cab to the tractor.
Fig. 16 - Lifting the cab off the tractor using a

hoisting.
Remove cab.
WARNING: during the cab hoisting operation, check carefully that all the parts have been disconnected and that the
cab disengages from the tractor.
IMPORTANT: If the fuel tank is also to be removed, disconnect the flexible pipe from the rigid injector leak-off pipe.
Refitting the cab or driving platform.

Refitting: the reverse of removal.
BREAKAGE OF THE TOP ENGINE HOOD RELEASE CABLE

To open the hood, insert a screwdriver between the hood
and the grille to operate the hood catch.
Push the screwdriver to the left (relative to the driving position) to release the hood.
Fig. 17 - Position the cab on suitable supports and

proceed with the operations on the tractor.
220
Body
Driving position
71
Fig. 18 - Hood catch release control.
Fig. 19 - Condenser and filter/dryer unit.
Fig. 20 - Air conditioning system pipes from compressor

to condenser and from the condenser to the filter/dryer.
Fig. 21 - Air conditioning system compressor
221
Body
71
Driving position
84
Fig. 22 - High visibility cab air filter
Fig. 24 - High visibility cab roof.
222
Fig. 23 - Coverings and outlets for air circulation in high

visibility cab
Systems
Air conditioning
86
Ventilation
The ventilation unit is housed in the cab ceiling.
To switch it on and adjust it, turn the electrical fan switch to the desired speed.
The cab becomes slightly pressurized when the ventilation system is in operation, so that fresh air can enter only by way
of the filter installed in the rear section of the cab roof.
The fan switch can be operated only after the ignition key is inserted.
The air flow can be regulated and directed by suitably positioning the air diffusers.
Air can be taken in fresh from outside or recirculated from within the cab by way of the relative side inlets.
Recirculation inlets fully closed: air is taken in entirely from outside the cab through the rear grille and filtered through a paper element positioned behind the grille.
Either fully or partially open air recirculating grille: now the air is recirculated inside the cab.
N.B. - It is very important that the air diffusers never be completely closed so as to allow for a steady air flow.
To obtain a greater pressurization inside the cab, it is necessary to take the air from the outside, therefore the inside air
recirculating grille should be fully closed.
Climate control system

A - Condenser
B - Temperature sensor
C - Control switches
D - 2400 Watt electric heating element
(resistance across terminals 0.655 ohm)
E - Defroster
F - Ventilation unit
Heating System
The heater is switched on and adjusted by rotating the control knob at the roof console, then switching on the blower
and setting the selector at the preferred speed.
To warm the cab up quickly, the knob should be rotated fully clockwise and the blower set to speed III.
The screen is demisted or defrosted by air directed through a slot vent.
For defrost or fast demist, all other vents should be closed off.
IMPORTANT: ventilation is provided by a single blower unit serving both the heating system and the air-conditioning
system.
After reaching the desired temperature adjust the system to suit your needs.
N.B. - For ideal system operation, the engine must run at 1600 r.p.m.
WARNING:Before starting the engine, make sure the system is off (by turning off the ventilation fan) so as not to overload the battery.
After using the system at full power for a long period of time, never turn it off suddenly but let it first idle for about 20 seconds.
223
Systems
86
Air conditioning
System configuration
The heating system consist of two units:
1 - Electric heater 3 (3 fig. 1) and blower unit (4 fig. 1) installed behind roof console.
2 - Power supplyng set, consisting of an auxiliary alternator (1 fig.1) located front of the engine and driven by a belt di rectly linked to the engine pulley.
If the air does not come out from the diffusers right away as soon as the system is started, turn off immediately and identify the fault.
N.B. Never turn on the heating system when working in dusty environments.
In the event of the system failing to operate, check the fuse in the roof terminal box.
Fig. 1 - Configuration of ventilation and heating unit.

1 - Alternator
2 - Compressor
3 - 3 speed fan
4 - Electric resistence
5 - Evaporator
6 - Ventilator
7 - Dehydrating filter
8 - Condenser
9 - Air filter
10 - Recirculation inlets
11 - Pivotable air diffusers
224
Systems
Air conditioning
86
Temperature sensor
Ventilation switch
Temperature control potentiometer
Fig. 2 - Ventilation - heating system.
225
Systems
86
Air conditioning
Temperature control knob
Blower motor
Heating relay
Fig. 3 - Components of the ventilation - heating system.
226
Systems
Air conditioning
86
Air conditioning unit for cabs

The air conditioning system will operate only with engine running and the 3-speed electric fan unit switched on.
type of refrigerant
inlet circuit pressure (*):
high bar
normal bar
low bar
delivery circuit pressure
quantity of refrigerant in circuit
quantity of oil
cc
type of oil
minimum pressure switch settingbar
maximum pressure switch setting
electric fan pressure switch setting
tightening torque for pipeline fittings
bar
g
bar
kgm (Nm)
R 134 a
2,5
0,8 2,5
0,8
see page 350
1400
200
Suniso SP20
2
27
close at 15 bar - open at 11 bar
6 (58)
(*) Pressure is influenced by ambient temperature; in normal operating conditions, with a temperature of 27 C, pressure in the delivery circuit will be 12 bar.
Pressure in the same system will register at around 16 bar with an ambient temperature of 38 C.
1 - Electromagnetic coupling
2 - Compressor
3 - Condenser
4 - Fan
5 - Filter
6 - Sight glass
7 - Minimum pressure switch
8 - Electric fan control
pressure switch
9 - Maximum pressure switch
10 - Expansion valve
11 - Evaporator
12 - Bulb
13 - Potentiometer
Fig. 4 - Diagram showing operation of air conditioning system.
227
Systems
86
Air conditioning
Operation and maintenance of the air-conditioning system

Air-conditioning process
The cooler is provided with a three-speed fan which aspirates the air from the cab interior thereafter forcing it across the
radiant block, thus making it cool down.
The heat exchange occurring between the gaseous coolant and the air lapping the walls of the cooler radiant block results in air cooling.
The conditioned air undergoes a humidification process, as the low temperature inside the cooler causes a great deal of
condensate to deposit on the external walls of the cooler. This condensate is subsequently conveyed under liquid state
outside the cab through a special drainage system.
The coolant at the cooler exit is still under gaseous state and has a temperature of 5 to 10C, in spite of the thermal exchange that has taken place, and then it is aspirated by the compressor again.
How to operate the system

Before starting the air-conditioning system set the electric fan onto the desired speed. If the electric fan is switched off,
the conditioning system will not start.
The air-conditioning system is turned on by progressively rotating the control potentiometer clockwise, which is located
in the front top section of the cab compartment. Rotate it anticlockwise to turn the system off.
Warning: Before starting the engine, always make sure the air-conditioning system is switched off so that the battery
will not be overloaded.
When the air-conditioning system is operating, the pivotable air diffusers should never be completely closed.
To obtain a quick cab environment cooling the following is recommended:
Fully open the air recirculation grating and the pivotable air diffusers;
Turn first the fan control and then the potentiometer control all the way out;
Open the doors a few seconds so as to let the hot air out of the cab compartment if the tractor has stood under
the sun radiation for a long period;
Adjust the system according to personal preference when the desired temperature has been attained.
Checking the air-conditioning system charge

System fully charged
(refrigerant entirely in liquid state)
Sight glass clear
System fully discharged
(refrigerant entirely in gaseous state)
System not fully charged
Refrigerant in part gaseous and part liquid state
228
Sight glass cloudy

(Bubbles or foam visible)
Systems
Air conditioning
86
The system is activated by way of the 3 speed

electric fan switch.
Switching on the air conditioning
Once the potentiometer is moved beyond

the initial contact, a voltage of 12 V is generated between terminal B (red wire) and the
brown wire terminal of the potentiometer.
Engagement and disengagement is piloted
by the temperature control potentiometer,
and by the pressure switch located at the
demoisturizing filter which cuts in respectively at: 2 bar and 27 bar.
Electromagnetic coupling
Pressure switch (positioned on demoisturizing filter). Comprises 3 switches:

1 controlling minimum pressure
1 controlling maximum pressure
1 controlling the electric fan of the condenser. The electric fan unit is interlocked to the pressure switch, which is set:
- to close the circuit at 15 bar
- to open the circuit at 11 bar
Pressure switches
Expansion valve
Temperature sensor
Electric fan unit
By-pass the pressure switch (place jumpers across the two terminals of the pressure switch and the 2 leads of the fan
unit).
If the fan operates:
the pressure switch is defective
If the fan does not operate:
a) check the fuse;

b) check the relay.
Tracing faults in the electric fan unit

Fault
Fan does not start
Causes
Action
Defective pressure switch
Replace pressure switch
Defective relay
Replace relay
Defective electrical or mechanical
Replace fan unit
Relay (see electrical diagram)

Place a jumper across terminals 30 and 87a; if the fan comes into operation, the relay needs to be replaced.
Water dripping from the points at which condensate drain lines are connected to the conditioning unit
The problem can be overcome by loosening the clip that fastens the drain line to the cab upright and pulling the tube
downwards, so that the water can run away freely.
229
Systems
86
Air conditioning
Fig. 5 - Compressor, air conditioning system.
Fig. 6 - Demoisturizing filter, air conditioning system.
230
Systems
Air conditioning
86
Checking system
Check belt tension: under finger pressure applied to the mid point between the two pulleys, belt should not deflect more
than 8 to 10 mm maximally.
Always keep condenser fins duly clean.
Cleaning should be carried out by a water or air jet (be careful not to bend the fins, use the special combing tool to straighten them again).
Ascertain the compressor is firmly secured to tractor and the pulleys are properly aligned.
Warning: When removing the strainer or the air-conditioning unit it is required to plug the inlet and the outlet pipes at
once, this is to prevent both dust and moisture from entering.
Even a few minutes exposure to the environmental humidity makes it necessary to replace the filter.
System safety elements

Minimum pressure switch (7 Fig. 4).
Switches the system off when a failure causes the pressure to drop below 2 bar within the high pressure circuit.
Maximum pressure switch (9 Fig. 4).
Switches the system off when pressure exceeds 27 bar inside the circuit as a result of an excessive setting or a failure
(high pressure area).
Condenser fan control pressure switch (8 Fig. 4)
Switches the condenser fan on when coolant attains the same pressure of the switch setting pressure.
Note: The above three safety devices are grouped inside the thermostatic bulb located on the dehydrator filter. (figura
6 page 230).
Temperature regulation
Temperature regulation is obtained through the potentiometer, which automatically regulates the temperature of the air
flow from the radiator according to the environmental temperature, through a combined action with the fan.
A pressure switch located on the electric circuit opens and closes the electric circuit of the compressor electromagnetic
coupling as a consequence of the potentiometer operation. When the circuit is open the pulley will be idling, on the other
hand, when the circuit is closed, this will operate integrally with the compressor shaft.
231
Systems
86
Air conditioning
Charging the system

with recharging station p/n 5.9030.508.6
1 - High pressure gauge

2 - Low pressure gauge
3 - Low pressure valve
4 - Vacuum pump valve
5 - Metering pipeline valve
6 - Recharge pipeline valve
7 - Metering pipeline
8 - Vacuum pump pipeline
9 - Low pressure circuit recharge pipeline
(blue)
10 - High pressure circuit recharge pipeline
(red)
11 - Vacuum pump
12 - Electric switch
13 - Metering gauge
14 - Air bleed valves
15 - Metering unit
16 - Electrical power supply
17 - Compressor
18 - Refrigerant bottle
19 - Electric leak detector
20 - Electric heater element for refrigerant
Fig. 7 - Charging station for air conditioning circuit.
Filling the metering unit

Connect the refrigerant bottle to the metering unit by means of the high or low pressure hose (9 - 10 Fig. 7).
Make certain that the valve (5 Fig. 7) is securely shut, then open the valve of the bottle.
As the refrigerant flows into the metering unit, open and shut the air bleed valve (14, Fig. 7) intermittently.
Read the value given by the hand of the metering unit pressure gauge (13, Fig. 7) and position the value against the indicator.
Once 1400 grams of refrigerant have been transferred into the metering unit, close the valve of the bottle and detach the hose.
Refilling the system with oil

Connect the high pressure hose (9, Fig. 7) of the recharge station by way of the smaller diameter valve A (Fig. 8) positioned
on the pipeline connecting with fitting D (Fig. 5) at the compressor (mounted in the engine compartment), and the low
pressure hose (10, Fig. 7) of the station by way of the larger diameter valve B (Fig. 8) positioned on the pipeline connected with fitting S (Fig. 5) at the compressor; then activate the pump for 30 minutes approx to establish a vacuum in the
circuit.
The valves (3 - 4 - 5 - 6, Fig. 7) must remain open during this operation.
232
Systems
Air conditioning
86
Filling the system with oil

Detach the low pressure hose from the recharge station and immerse the end in a graduated vessel containing 200 g
approx of SUNISO SP 20 or equivalent oil. Allow 250 grams of the oil to be drawn into the circuit.
Reconnect the hose to the station.
Filling the system with R134a refrigerant
When the low pressure gauge (2, Fig. 7) registers a minimum value (760 mm Hg) that remains stable for between 5 and
10 minutes, close the valve (5 Fig. 7).
Open the filler valve (5, Fig. 7) and wait until the specified quantity (1800 g) of refrigerant has entered the system.
In the event that the flow of refrigerant contained in the metering unit should be interrupted, warm the unit by means of
the electric heater (20, Fig. 7), rechecking the pressure on the relative gauge.
Should this not be sufficient, start the engine and throttle up to 1200 rev/min approx. Switch on the air conditioning
system, and the R 134a refrigerant will be drawn directly into the circuit by the compressor.
Close the filler valve (5, Fig. 7), and check with the leak detector that there is no escape of fluid from the fittings of the circuit. Should any leaks be detected, these must be eliminated, and the refrigerant reintroduced.
Caution: In the event of oil leaks being detected, the circuit must be emptied completely and the entire recharge procedure recommenced.
Fig. 8 - Valves for connection of the tractor to the air conditioning recharge and service station.
A - HIGH PRESSURE valve
B - LOW PRESSURE valve
Final checks
Once all the refrigerant has been put into the air conditioning circuit, check (with the engine running and the system in
operation) that the high pressure gauge shows a value of between 15 and 20 bar, and the low pressure gauge a value
between 1.5 and 2.5 bar.
233
Systems
86
Air conditioning
Verifying operation of the system after recharging

The system can be regarded as performing to its full capabilites when the delivery pressure gauge shows the following
values:
Ambient temperature C
Delivery circuit pressure
27
32
35
38
40
43
12 bar
14 bar
15 bar
17 bar
18 bar
20 bar
The temperature values indicated are those likely to be encountered in the course of a typical twelve month period.
Having established that the system is operating correctly, detach the high and lower pressure hoses of the station from
the tractor and check again with the leak detector that there is no escape of fluid from any part of the system.
CAUTION: use only R 134a refrigerant as indicated on the

data plate attached to the compressor of the air conditioning
system.
Connecting the tractor to the air conditioning system recharge

and service station.
Directions for tightening air conditioning system pipeline fittings.

All fittings have an internal seal. Screw the two parts of the fitting together by hand until the nut is finger tight, then holding the one part steady with a fixed wrench, apply a torque wrench to the nut and tighten to the value indicated in the table.
234
Type
Thread
5/8 - 18 UNF
13,6 20,3 Nm (1,4 2,1 kgm)
Tightening torque
3/4 - 16 UNF
33,5 40,0 Nm (3,3 4,0 kgm)
7/8 - 14 UNF
35,5 42,0 Nm (3,6 4,3 kgm)
1 1/16 - 14 UNF
40,3 47,3 Nm (4,1 4,8 kgm)
Systems
Air conditioning
86
Fig. 9 - Control switches

1 - Heating control.
2 - Air conditioning control.
3 - Ventilation control.
Fig. 10 - Receiver-drier located in cab roof.
Fig. 11 - Ventilation - conditioning - heating.
1 - Level sight glass.
235
Systems
86
Air conditioning
Fig. 12 - Components of the ventilation - conditioning - heating system.
236
Fig. 13 - Air handling unit for high visibility cab
Systems
Air conditioning
86
Fig. 14 - Condenser and fan unit for high visibility cab
237
Systems
86
Air conditioning
Fig. 15 - Ventilation-heating unit for high visibility cab
238
Systems
Air conditioning
86
Fig. 16 - Ventilation-heating unit components for high visibility cab
239
Systems
86
Air conditioning
Fig. 17 - Climatisation system components for high visibility cab
240
Systems
86
LOW PRESSURE CIRCUIT
release
system
pressure through
the compressor needle valves
excessive pressure
in the high pressure
circuit
compressor not
operatin smoothly
overcharged circuit
too a low pressure

circuit
pressures inside
both high and low
pressure
circuits
tend to balance
expansion
jammed up
excessive pressure
circuit
bubbles are visible

through the filter inspection glass
air in the circuit
dehydrate the circuit
normal pressure in
the high pressure
circuit
poor system efficiency
Out-of-setting compressor needle valves
replace the valves
after some working

time
humidity inside the replace the filter and

bleed the air. Recircuit
charge the circuit
expansion
jammed up
replace the expansion valve
Excessive pressure
Normal pressure
Excessively low pressure
normal pressure in
the high pressure
circuit
valve
valve replace the valve
blocked circuit
change the part and

replace the filter
low pressure in the

high pressure circuit
discharged system
recharge system
burnt fuse
replace the fuse
disconnected wires
connect the wires
coolant leaks
inspect with
leak-finder
System fails to operate
Poor system efficiency
stop the leakage

and recharge the
system
241
Systems
82
Hydraulic system
Hydraulic system
KEY TO FIGURE 1:
1 - Delivery line pressure test point

2 - Hydrostatic steering - maximum hydrostatic steering pressure
(see instructions on page 186-192)
3 - 4WD steering cylinder pressure test point
4 - 2WD steering cylinder pressure test point
5 - Gearbox oil cooler
6 - Electro-hydraulic control unit (see instructions on page 92)
7 - Hydraulic power unit pressure test point (see instructions on page 40-92)
8 - Lubrication oil pressure test point
9 - POWERSHIFT
10 - Hydraulic unloader for equalising oil level in gearboxes
11 - Gearbox lubrication
12 - Rear P.T.O. (see instructions on page 92)
13 - Diff. lock hydraulic actuators
14 - 4WD engagement hydraulic actuator
15 - Trailer braking hydraulic control valve
16 - Pressure test point for trailer braking hydraulic control valve
17 - 8-way auxiliary control valve (see instructions on pages 250)
18 - Pressure relief valve oil pressure test point
19 - Kick-out oil pressure test point (see instructions on page 250)
20 - Hydraulic ways oil pressure test point
21 - Connected implement
22 - Rear lift
23 - Front lift antishock valve and accumulator (see instructions on page 174)
24 - Implement coupled to rear lift
25 - Lifting cylinder
26 - Rear lift antishock valve
27 - Front lift (see instruction on page 174)
28 - Lifting cylinder pressure test point
29 - Front lift antishock valve
30 - Shut-off valve for oil supply to front lift
31 - Free oil return line on rear of tractor (for hydraulic motors)
32 - Front P.T.O. control valve (see instructions on page 178)
242
Pressione di esercizio
SOLLEVATORE
POSTERIORE
29
100 Bar 2 WD
30
150 Bar 4 WD
18
6/20 L/min.
21
Rear free return
32 cc
Dis.
Diff.look
12
Dis.
31
16
PTO
14
A
1.1
16 bar
P-Ecc.
17
DISTRIBUTORE IDRAULICO
Sec. shaft
T
190 bar
11
Inn.
4 Wd
Main shaft
Trailer brake
13
ATTREZZO COLLEGATO
19
20
190 bar
Rear
190 bar
150 bar
Inn.
26
22
B
GUIDA
IDROSTATICA
210 Bar
27
OSPC 80 OR
Front
25
70 Bar
SOLLEVATORE
ANTERIORE
A
700 cc
82
Rear lift
8 Bar
100 bar
Hydraulic system
(V=0.84 dm )
Sollevatore anteriore
con attrezzo collegato
28
150 bar
23
Pressione dii esercizio
24
ATTREZZO COLLEGATO
Systems
15
P-Reg.
DISTRIBUTORE IDRAULICO
PER LA FRENATURA DEL RIMORCHIO
Y Tractor brake
CENTRALINA COMANDI ELETROIDRAULICI
11 bar
16 bar
99
POWERSHIFT
Rh
1
H
x
3
V max
14.7 cm
Lf
10
V max
11.6 cm
V max
13.9 cm
11 cm 3
27 L/min.
19 cm
47 L/min.
AGROSHIFT
Freno inser.=13 bar,disinser.=5 bar
5 bar
16 bar
5 bar
25 Micr.
Rapp. 1/1.0732 (44/41)
25 Micr.
13 bar
4 bar
32
VALVOLA DI COMANDO
PTO anteriore
F.to A2
Fig. 1 - Points provided for measurement of oil pressures in the tractors hydraulic system (see references on page 242).
243
Systems
82
Hydraulic system
Oil filters
The oil filters are mounted to the rigth hand side of the transmission at the rear end, and are easily replaced.
Filters must be replaced whenever the blockage indicator lights up at the instrument panel.
The filter blockage pressure switch is set at 0.5 bar, and must be replaced with another of identical specifications if faulty.
Ensure that the replacement is stamped with the correct 0.5 bar setting.
Whenever the transmission is stripped down for servicing or overhaul, clean the mesh strainer fitted to the bottom of the housing.
CAUTION - Operate the lift system and auxiliary spool valves only when the blockage indicator is no longer alight.
IMPORTANT - If during normal operation of the machine the clogging filter indicator should light up, remplace the filter.
Hydraulic pumps
The hydraulic pumps require no servicing or adjustment even after a long period of operation, although the splines of the
pump shaft must be inspected with care: there must be no signs of wear or damage.
Checking the relief valves of the hydraulic lift system
Using tool 5.9030.520.4, check that the circuit pressure relief valve incorporated into the auxiliary spool valves is set at 190
bar and the system pressure shock valve at 210 bar.
Remember that for the lift to function correctly, operating pressure in the circuit should not exceed 150 bar.
The operating pressure can be measured by coupling a gauge to the oil pressure line between the directional control valve
and the lift; for machines with assistor cylinders, the gauge can be coupled to the pressure line connecting with the assistors.
Fig. 3 - Pump assembly cover.

A - Cover
B - Pump case
C - Base
Fig. 4 - Pump case.

B - Pump case.
Stripping the hydraulic pump

Removal
The pump is secured to the tractor by 2 of the 4 bolts holding the pump assembly together. These two bolts are diagonally opposite.
Having removed the pump from the vehicle, the components are freed by unscrewing the two remaining bolts which keep the
cover A (see fig 3) clamped to the frame C and the pump body B; this done, remove the washers and then the cover.
Using a proper pointed tool remove gasket E (Fig. 6 pag. 343), mark with a reference the position of the bearings with respect
to the pump case and then take the bearings from their seats by pushing from inside outwards and being careful the connecting pin neither be lost nor damaged.
A - Snap-ring
B - Seal ring
C - Cover
D - Gasket
E - Gasket
F - Gasket
G - Feather key
H - Bearing
I - Bushes
L - Driver gear
M - Pump case
N - Gasket
O - Driver gear
P - Cover
Block the pump case in a vice as shown in figure and then remove snap ring F.
Remove the seal ring.
Fig. 5 - Pump disassembly.

B - Pump case
C - Base
D - Bearings
G - Gears
I - Screw
Fig. 2 - Component parts of the hydraulic pump assembly
244
Systems
Hydraulic system
82
WARNING - If pump bearings, pinions or casing are found to be

damaged or worn, these parts cannot be repaired because of their
construction tolerances.
When performing checks, because of an oil leakage or an excessive and irregular delivery pressure, only the gaskets indicated in
the spare parts lists can be replaced.
D - Bearing
E - Gasket
After checking the pump for wear due to abrasion from impurities
and for any other visible damage, when reassembling use, in any
case, a new set of gaskets.
It is also indispensable to mark each single part to reinstall correctly.

After removing all gaskets, both on the covers and in the pump casing, carefully clean all parts using a proper solvent.
Carefully dry all parts with compressed air; this is to avoid that any
solvent residuals may damage the gaskets on reassembly.
Visually check the pump case internally and ascertain it is not damaged.
Check both pinions and bearings for wear, abrasion due to foreign
matters or cavitation.
Fig. 6 - Internal pump case parts.
NOTE: Should any damage, wear or in any case a component replacement be required, with the exception of the gaskets, the entire pump must be replaced.
WARNING: Do not press onto the stop ring to prevent any damage.
+ 0, 05
Use a dial gauge to make sure the stop ring height be 21
, - 0,15 mm,
otherwise replace taking care the new stop ring installed be measured accordingly.
If reading is above specification fit the new ring in reversed position.
C - Housing
D - Bearing
G - Gear
H - Bush
Fig. 7 - Pump gears.
A - Stop ring
B - Gasket
C - Bearings
C - Base
F - Snap ring
Fig. 9 - Inside seals.
Fig. 8 - Snap ring removal.
245
Systems
82
Hydraulic system
1064-48
A - Seal ring
Fig. 10 - Seal ring.
Fig. 11 - Piloted check valve components
Assembly
Before assembly all parts shall be oiled.
Correctly position the gaskets in their seats paying particular attention stop ring A and gasket B be correctly fitted into bearings C (see fig. 9). Coat the cover inner side with a slight grease layer then apply to pump case and tightening the securing screws to the recommended torque.
WARNING:The securing screws should be tightened gradually making also sure that rotors are not hampered in their
movements.
Tightening torques
Pump cover securing screws:
- M8 2 kgm (20 Nm)
- M10 5 kgm (49 Nm)
Restore the recommended oil level and then bleed the air from the hydraulic circuit.
Fig. 12 - Connection of check valve to hydraulic control valve.
NOTE: To ensure correct operation of the check valve, it must be connected to the element of the control valve
fitted with DETENT (as shown in the figure )
246
Systems
Auxiliary systems
88
Auxiliary hydraulic spool valves

Auxiliary spool valves are used to control hydraulically operated external implements.
The controls consist in 2 levers for a 4-way valve, or 3 levers for a 6-way valve.
The levers are located on the drivers right hand side.
Auxiliary hydraulic spool valves:
Version 1: 4 way, 2 way double acting - 2 way double acting convertible to single acting, with spool detent
Version 2: 6 way, 2 way double acting convertible to single acting, with kickout - 2 way double acting convertible to single acting, with spool detent (with perfect sealing valve) - 2 way double acting with float position - throttle valve (FLOW
DIVIDER) with tap in cab - quick coupling for free discharge.
NB:with the auxiliary spool valve in use (unless a Flow Divider is incorporated), the operation of the hydraulic lift system
remains inhibited (except in FLOAT position).
Important: the lever should be recentred to the neutral position as soon as the external actuator has reached its stroke
limit, to ensure that the hydraulic circuit does not remain pressurized any longer than strictly necessary; prolonged pressure will result ultimately in the hydraulic system being subjected to hazardous levels of stress.
Auxiliary spool valves levers must always be in the neutral position when external services are not in use.
Fig. 1 - 4-way auxiliary control valves.

A - Quick coupling for free discharge
247
Systems
88
Auxiliary systems
Fig. 2 - 4-way auxiliary control valves.

A - Quick coupling for free discharge
B - Pressure relief valve.
248
Systems
Auxiliary systems
88
NOTE : The 6-way auxiliary spool valve incorporates a FLOW DIVIDER which ensures that oil can be delivered at a
constant flow rate of between 3 and 42 l/min to the 2-way kickout section (first valve alongside the flow divider).
The tap has set in the cab, to left hand of the place of guide.
NB: Even when the flow divider is shut off by turning the knob fully in the direction marked (-), a residual flow of oil will
continue to reach the valve at a steady rate of 3 l/min.
5 5
5 5
5 5
Float
A
B
KICK-OUT
B
DETENT.
FLOAT
A
T
190 bar
P-Ecc.
P-Reg.
Fig. 3 - 6-way hydraulic control valve.
A - Pressure relief valve

B - Screws to convert from double-acting to single-acting control valve
C - Perfect seal valve
P - Hydraulic pump
N - To rear lift
T - Return
249
Systems
88
Auxiliary systems
Checking the pressure relief valve setting
The setting of the pressure relief valve must always be 190 bar,
and can be checked by fitting gauge p/n 5.9030.513.0 to either of
the valve work ports and operating the relative lever. If the gauge
reading is not correct, adjust the pressure relief valve see pages
248 - 249
NOTE: Remember that the purpose of the relief valve is to maintain pressure in the hydraulic lift circuit within a given safety limit, in
this instance 190 bar.
Fig. 4 - Checking the operating pressure of auxiliary spool valves.

A - Quick coupler
B - Implement oil line
C - Tee
Checking the operating pressure (see fig 4).

To verify the operating pressure of an implement connnected to
the work ports of the auxiliary spool valves, proceed as follows:
Connect a Tee between quick coupler A and the implement
pressure line B.
Connect pressure gauge p/n 5.9030.513.0 to the Tee.
Start the engine, apply the parking brake in the interests of safety, and operate the spool valve connected to the implement.
The gauge will show the operating pressure currently registering in the circuit.
The operating pressure depends on the weight of the hitched implement, and should not normally exceed 150 bar.
Fig. 5 - A conversion screw allowing conversion

from double to single acting operation; B conversion screw lock washer.
Conversion of auxiliary spool valves from double

acting to single acting operation (see fig 5)
Where particular requirements dictate, a double acting spool valve can be converted to operate in single acting mode.
To effect the conversion from double to single acting, hold the fitting secure and loosen the screw A by between 4 and 5 turns.
NOTE: Once slack, the screw is best rotated by hand to avoid
applying excessive force and unseating the lock washer B; if this
were to happen, the washer would find its way into the hydraulic
circuit and disallow normal operation of the lift system.
The conversion from single to double acting operation is effected
by tightening the screw A fully.
Checking the surface of the valve spools

Check that the machined surface of the spool is free of scoring or
any other kind of wear.
Fig.6 - Longitudinal section through 4/6-way spool valve.
250
Systems
Auxiliary systems
89
Trailer hydraulic braking system

The tractor can be equipped with a trailer hydraulic braking system on request.
For trailers with safety brake (ITALY version), the system is equipped with a specific distributor.
The oil used is drawn from the tractors main hydraulic system by a special distributor.
This distributor is activated by a valve which is hydraulically connected to the tractor hydrostatic braking system control.
Trailer hydraulic braking distributor unit

Specifications (see Fig. 2, page 254)
P
N
B
T
Y
E
Supply
Constant pressure in B
(only for distributor ITALY version)
Maximum pressure in B
(only for distributor ITALY version)
Maximum operating pressure in N
(distributor ITALY version)
Working temperature
Supply in P
Pilot Y (supplied from below)
supply
services connections
trailer brake connection
oil discharge
trailer braking system connection
parking brake signaling pressure switch
l/min
bar
20 80
12,5 2
bar
135 5
bar
200
-20 + 100
with hydraulic mineral oil
with hydraulic mineral oil
251
Systems
89
Auxiliary systems
Fig. 1 - Oil lines connected to directional control valve of hydraulic trailer braking system. A - bistable valve (fitted only in conjunction
with ITALY version of the control valve) allows trailer brake to be applied even when tractor brakes are operated independently.
252
Systems
Auxiliary systems
89
Use of the tractor with CUNA 341/01 hydraulic trailer braking

The trailer hitched to a tractor equipped with this type of trailer braking requires a constant pressure of 12.5 2.5 barin
order to release the parking brake ( spring operated).
Therefore, before hitching or unhitching the trailer, this pressure must be eliminated at the coupler by switching off the
engine, or better still, by applying the tractor handbrake.
The female quick-action couplers are specially-designed to remain connected if the internal pressure exceeds
1.5 bar.
Unless the driver waits the few seconds required to eliminate the pressure, the coupling or uncoupling operation will be
extremely difficult if not impossible.
The correct type of female coupler inserts are marked FASTER VFBO/1815F and can also be identified by the release
ring, which is 44 mm in diameter and 38 mm long.
When uncoupling is performed to hastily, the pressure in the trailer's hydraulic system will lock the coupling, and in addition to compromising the efficiency of the emergency brake, it will prevent re-coupling.
In this event:
Uncouple the push-pull coupler which passes through the reservoir mounted on the trailer, by pulling on the pipe
connecting the trailer to the tractor.
Discharge the pressure.
Re-couple
Special recommendations
In order to change from parking brake applied from the trailer (tractor handbrake in lowered position) to efficient service
braking, the tractor needs to send large quantities of oil to the cylinders.
Some time is therefore required before trailer braking reaches full efficiency and therefore, should it be necessary to
use the service brake urgently, after having released the parking brake, accelerate the engine to maximum
speed before releasing the tractor handbrake.
In general, remember that if the engine revs are high, braking will be more responsive.
Users who have trailers with "France" type non-type approved hydraulic braking may adapt the SAFIM brake valve to
this type of operation by unscrewing the hex socket screw on the pilot side cover by three turns (6 mm Allen wrench).
In this way, the 12.5 bar pressure is eliminated, the red light remains on, only going out on braking.
It is dangerous to leave the valve by-pass lever in the braking position; trailers which do not conform to the Cuna 341/01
standard are not equipped any protection against this.
The lever on the valve serves to completely by-pass the valve when trailers are not to be hitched to the tractor for long
periods (on trailers which conform to the Cuna 341/01 standard, even if the lever is left in the OFF position, the trailer
parking brake is not released).
253
Systems
89
Auxiliary systems
Starting
1 - Trailer parking brake control knob

(present only on mechanically operated valves)
A - Rotation for engagement
B - Rotation for disengagement
Fig. 2 - Control valve for hydraulic trailer braking.
No special precautions are required, simply start the engine and allow time(10-15 seconds) for the hydraulic pipes to fill
with oil before operating the brake pedal.
Checking operation
The red indicator light illuminates when the pressure at the trailer brake coupling is less than 10 bar; the light therefore
gives an indication of whether the system is functioning correctly.
During normal operation, providing the handbrake is released and the brake pedal is not depressed, the red light should
be off.
When the handbrake is applied, the light will stay on even if the brake pedal is pressed.
The light also comes on if the engine stalls under load, as there will be no pressure at the trailer brake coupling.
In normal operation with the handbrake released, on pressing the brake pedal it is possible to hear the pump as it increases the pressure.
To test the pressures, apply a pressure gauge with a minimum full-scale value of 160 bar to the trailer brake coupling.
254
Systems
Auxiliary systems
89
Fig. 3 - Operation of the hydraulic control valve

1 - Brake ON/OFF control
2 - Lift
3 - Trailer brake
4 - Trailer brake lever
255
Systems
89
Auxiliary systems
The pressure readings to be taken are:

Engine running with handbrake released: 12.5 2.5 bar (10 to15 bar)
With handbrake applied: 0 bar
With handbrake released and brake pedal depressed, the pressure will rise from 12.5 to 130 10 bar (120 to
140 bar).
N.B.: the valve is factory-set by Safim.
( ) values in brackets refer to pressure limits specified by the Cuna standard.
Malfunctions
Insufficient pressure
For valves with mechanical parking brake control
Check the position of the valve by-pass lever, which should be aligned with the axis of the valve.
Release the handbrake lever.

Check that the lever on the valve returns to the limit stop when the
handbrake is lowered.
Check that the microswitch is functioning correctly (operated
when the handbrake is lowered).
For electrically controlled valves
Check the power fuse and the power supply in general.

Check the connections to the coil on the two opposite poles.
If the coil is energised, by loosening the retaining nut it is possible
to feel the pull of the magnet; the coil will be very hot.
The valve pressure rises very

slowly
The parking brake is slow to

release
Low and high pressure settings
256
Clean the holes of the main piston; to access the piston, remove
the plug on the opposite side to the pilot side (27 mm wrench).
Withdraw the piston and blow clean.
Close the hex socket adapter screw (France type).
Clean the holes (by washing and blowing) the rapid discharge piston, which can be accessed by first removing the solenoid valve
and the adapter.
Warning: the valve has been tested and calibrated correctly
prior to delivery.
Before attempting to adjust the springs and the shims, to solve
pressure problems, clean all the holes of the piston and solenoid
valve with petrol and compressed air.
The pressure settings are regulated by way of shims, which can
be accessed by removing the pilot valve and withdrawing the 25
mm diameter piston.
The internal spring regulates the pressure of 12.5 2.5 bar, while
the outer spring regulates the pressure of 130 10 bar.
Systems
Auxiliary systems
89
Fig. 4 - View of the hydraulic control valve.

1 - Lever position with handbrake fully applied
2 - Start of trailer braking
3 - Lever position with handbrake released
257
Systems
89
Auxiliary systems
Installing the hydraulic braking valve for trailers equipped with safety brake (ITALY version)
For correct valve and related controls installation, it is necessary to proceed as follows:
Secure the distributor to the tractor and connect the various oil tubes;
Bring the tractor parking brake lever to position A (4th notch of the toothed sector) and carry out the parking brake adjustment so that, in this position, the tractor is braked. Then bring the parking brake lever to position B
(stop notch).
Keeping the parking brake lever in position B, hook the hose fork to lever Y, pushing it against stop screw X.
Then connect the hose to lock plate C by means of the special adjusting nuts.
Under these conditions, acting on the parking brake hand lever of the tractor synchronizes the tractor and trailer
stationary braking.
Connect the wiring of the pressure switch, that is screwed on the distributor, to the specific warning light installed on the instrument panel of the dashboard.
Then, when engaging the parking brake, the tractor warning light and the trailer warning light will light up at the
same time.
CAUTION:
When the trailer is hitched to the tractor the knob on the control valve must always be turned counter-clockwise to position "1". When a trailer is not hitched or during trailer hitching/unhitching operations, the lever on the control valve must
always be in the position "0".
On the hydraulic distributor is placed a sensor (E Fig, 5). This sensor active the warning light on the dashboard, when
the trailer brakes is operated.
Fig. 5 - Diagram illustrating adjustment of brake control valve for trailer equipped with safety brake (ITALY version)
258
Systems
Auxiliary systems
89
Fig. 6 - Components of the hydraulic control valve - FRANCE version.
259
Systems
89
Auxiliary systems
Fig. 7 - Components of the hydraulic control valve - FRANCE version
260
Systems
Electrical system
84
ELECTRICAL WIRING
AGROPLUS 60 (up serial number 1017) - 70 (up serial number 2773) - 80
CONTENTS
THE STRUCTURE OF THE UNIT ..................................................................................263
HOW TO CONSULT THE UNIT......................................................................................264
1.
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
INTRODUCTION.........................................................................................................265
List of wiring looms....................................................................................................265
Definition of components and symbols .....................................................................266
General rules.............................................................................................................266
1.3.1 Modification of the tractors electrical/electronic circuits ............................266
1.3.2 Main wiring faults .......................................................................................266
1.3.3 Removal, refitting and drying of connectors and wiring .............................266
Diagnostic instruments..............................................................................................268
Wire colour codes .....................................................................................................268
2.
2.1
2.2
2.3
INDICES......................................................................................................................269
Component description index....................................................................................269
Component code index .............................................................................................274
Connector index ........................................................................................................278
3.
3.1
3.2
3.3
COMPONENTS ..........................................................................................................286
Connector layouts .....................................................................................................268
Component technical data ........................................................................................288
Pinouts and descriptions of electronic control units ..................................................296
3.3.1 HML control unit.........................................................................................296
3.3.2 Power lift control unit .................................................................................297
3.3.3 Analogue instrument panel ........................................................................298
3.3.4 Digital instrument panel .............................................................................300
4.
SYSTEMS ...................................................................................................................302
4.1
Earthing points ..........................................................................................................303
4.2
Starting and preheating.............................................................................................305
4.3
Lights - steering column switch unit (platform)..........................................................306
4.4
Lights - steering column switch unit (standard cab) ..................................................307
4.5
Lights - steering column switch unit (high-visibility cab)............................................308
4.6
Accessories - Diagnostics (platform).........................................................................309
4.7
Accessories - Diagnostics (standard cab).................................................................310
4.8
Accessories - Diagnostics (high-visibility cab) ..........................................................311
4.9
Wipers (standard cab)...............................................................................................312
4.10 Wipers (high visibility cab).........................................................................................314
4.11 Front instrument panel ..............................................................................................312
4.12 Radio (version with standard cab).............................................................................315
4.13 Radio (version with high-visibility cab) ......................................................................315
4.14 Heater (standard cab) ...............................................................................................316
4.15 Heater (high-visibility roof) ........................................................................................317
4.16 Heating and air conditioning (standard cab) .............................................................318
4.17 Heating and air conditioning (high-visibility roof).......................................................319
4.18 Braking system - trailer braking.................................................................................320
4.19 HML transmission .....................................................................................................321
4.20 Electronic lift..............................................................................................................322
4.21 Rear and front PTOs .................................................................................................323
261
Systems
84
Electrical system
LAYOUTS, ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAMS, CONNECTOR POSITIONS
Engine wiring ....................................................................................................................... 325
Central wiring....................................................................................................................... 333
Front light wiring (Version with cab) .................................................................................... 335
FULLDRIVE wiring .............................................................................................................. 349
Electronic lift wiring.............................................................................................................. 353
Standard cab
Roof wiring........................................................................................................................... 359
Worklights wiring ................................................................................................................. 367
Screenwash pumps wiring................................................................................................... 373
Windscreen wiper wiring...................................................................................................... 375
Speaker wiring..................................................................................................................... 375
Roof power supply wiring .................................................................................................... 381
Heater wiring ....................................................................................................................... 387
Air conditioning wiring.......................................................................................................... 393
Air conditioning fan wiring.................................................................................................... 399
High-visibility roof
Roof wiring........................................................................................................................... 403
Worklights wiring ................................................................................................................. 409
Screenwash pump wiring .................................................................................................... 413
Windscreen wiper wiring...................................................................................................... 415
Speaker and radio wiring..................................................................................................... 417
Roof power supply wiring .................................................................................................... 423
Heater wiring ....................................................................................................................... 429
Air conditioning wiring.......................................................................................................... 435
Air conditioning fan wiring.................................................................................................... 441
262
Systems
Electrical system
84
THE STRUCTURE OF THE UNIT

For easier consultation, this unit has been divided into the following chapters:
1. Introduction
Contains a brief description of the terminology used, the procedures to follow for troubleshooting
and repairs, and the instruments required for troubleshooting.
2. Indices
Contains the indices arranged by connector name, by component code and by component
description.
3. Components
Contains the layouts of the connectors used in the electrical system, descriptions of the
components installed on the tractor, the technical data necessary for functional testing and the
pinouts of the electronic control units.
4. Systems
Contains the electrical diagrams of the tractors systems.
5. Layouts, electrical wiring diagrams, connector positions

Contains the layouts, the wiring diagrams and the positioning of connectors on the tractor.
263
Systems
84
Electrical system
How to consult the table
HOW TO CONSULT THE UNIT

A
The quickest way to determine the cause of a malfunction of a

component (e.g. the starter motor) is to check all the components
in the system in which the component is incorporated.
The example given on this page assumes a malfunction of the
starter motor, which fails to start the engine.
1 -Look in paragraph 2.1. Component description index
(figure A) for the starter motor and identify the system
in which it is incorporated.
The system is indicated in the column System (para
4.xx) and in this case is 2 (figure A).
2 - 2 -Consult paragraph 4.2 Starting (figure B), in which all
the components in the system are indicated in the electrical diagram; these components are accompanied by
numbers that correspond to the key on the same page.
3 - 3 -Check all the components in the system, starting, for
example, with the switch 12.
4 -Look in paragraph 2.1. Component description index
(figure A) for Rear PTO control switch and check in
the column Technical description (para 3.2.xx) if
there is a technical description of the component (in
this case it is given at n 42 of the paragraph 3.2
Component technical data) (figure C).
Make a note also of the name of the connector to which the
component is connected (in this case X10).
B
2
9
2.7659.108.0
42
X10
40
12
Motorino davviamento
2.9619.360.0
X37
0.011.6955.4
Interruttore comando
PTO posteriore
X10
22
X10
X10
42
12
Interruttore comando PTO posteriore
X10
0.011.6855.4
0.011.6955.4
2.7659.108.0
Interruttore comando
PTO posteriore
F
X10
G
6
0.011.6855.4
264
Only if the position of the component is not known

5 - Look in paragraph 2.3 Connector index (figure D) for
the name of the connector to which the component is connected (in this case X10) and note down the wiring loom
in which it is incorporated (in this case 0.011.6955.4 or
0.011.6958.4) and the type of connector (in this case
6).
6 - 6 -Look for the wiring loom in chapter Layouts, electrical wiring diagrams, connector positions using the
main index .
7 - 7 -Look for the name of the connector in the photos attached to the electrical diagrams and determine its position on the tractor from the drawing (figure E).
NOTE.
The electrical diagrams (figure F) contain the names
of the connectors and the descriptions used in all the
tables in chapter 2.
8 - 8 -Using the data contained in the paragraph 3.2 Component technical data (figure C) at position n 42, check
the operation of the switch.
If the pinout of the connector is not known, look in paragraph
3.1 Connector layouts (figure G) for the number found
in the column Type of paragraph 2.3 Connector index.
Systems
Electrical system
84
1. INTRODUCTION
This section of the workshop manual is intended as a practical guide to troubleshooting the
tractors electrical and electronic systems.
The following pages provide the technician with all the necessary information about the
tractors systems and components.
Due to the possible time difference between the introduction of technical modifications (in line
with our policy of continuous product improvement) and the corresponding amendment of our
printed documentation, we are obliged to state that the data contained in this document are
subject to modification and as such are not binding.
1.1 LIST OF WIRING LOOMSI
DESCRIPTION
NOTES
CODE
Cab accessories wiring
Standard roof
0.009.7851.4/40
POWERSHIFT lever wiring
0.011.7972.4
Roof power supply wiring
Standard roof
0.009.7852.3/40
Roof power supply wiring
0.011.3761.3/30
Speaker wiring
Standard roof
0.011.0729.4/10
Speaker and radio wiring
0.011.3596.3/30
Air conditioning wiring
Standard roof
0.010.2130.1
Air conditioning wiring
0.010.2562.1
Front light wiring
Only with cab
0.010.5582.3/01
Central wiring
Worklights line wiring
0.010.5303.4/60
0.011.3595.3/10
Engine wiring
0.009.7624.4/50
Electronic lift wiring
0.011.6943.4/10
Roof wiring
Standard roof
0.009.7850.4/50
Roof wiring
0.011.3606.4/51
Screenwash pump wiring
0.011.3743.3
Screenwash pumps wiring
Standard roof
0.009.7854.3/10
Heater wiring
Standard roof
0.010.2123.2
Heater wiring
0.010.2558.1
Windscreen wiper wiring
Standard roof
0.010.4516.3/01
Windscreen wiper wiring
0.011.3597.3/03
Air conditioning fan wiring
Standard roof
0.009.7853.3/21
Air conditioning fan wiring
0.011.3610.3/20
265
Systems
84
Electrical system
1.2 DEFINITION OF COMPONENTS AND SYMBOLS

To prevent any misunderstanding or ambiguity, listed below are definitions for some of the key
terms used in this unit.
TERM
DESCRIPTION
Connector
Element used to connect two components (e.g. wiring-switch,

wiring-wiring)
Temperature
sensor
Electrical component that converts the temperature of a medium

(air, water, oil, etc.) into a voltage or resistance
Pressure
sensor
Electrical component that converts the pressure of a medium (air,

water, etc.) into a voltage or resistance
Position
sensor
Electrical component that converts the angular or linear position of

an object into a voltage
Pressure
switch
Switch that changes state (opens or closes a contact) according to

the operating pressure in the circuit in which it is installed
Thermostat
Switch that changes state (opens or closes a contact) according to

the temperature of the medium in which it is immersed.
Switch
Mechanical component that opens or closes one or more electrical

contacts.
Solenoid valve
Valve operated by applying electrical current to a coil (or solenoid)
Chapter 3.2 Component descriptions contains the wiring diagrams for some switches and
pushbuttons.
The following symbols are used for clarity:
SYMBOL
DESCRIPTION
Contact between pins CLOSED (stable switch position)
Contact between pins CLOSED (non-stable switch position)
LED warning light
Warning light
1.3 GENERAL RULES

The inspection, maintenance, troubleshooting and repair operations are essential to ensure
that the tractor continues to operate correctly over time and to prevent malfunctions and
breakdowns.
The scope of this paragraph is to describe repair procedures and to help improve the quality
of repairs.
1.3.1MODIFICATION OF THE TRACTORS ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS
The manufacturer prohibits any modification or alteration of the electrical wiring for the
connection of any non-approved electrical equipment or components.
In particular, if it is discovered that the electrical system or a component has been modified
without authorisation, the Manufacturer will accept no liability for any damage to the vehicle
and the vehicle warranty will be invalidated.
1.3.2MAIN WIRING FAULTS
a. Poor contact between connectors
The main causes of poor contact between connectors are incorrect insertion of the male
into the female connector, deformation of one or both connectors, and corrosion or
oxidisation of the pin contact surfaces.
266
Systems
Electrical system
84
b.
Welding or crimping of defective pins

The pins of the male and female connectors make good contact in the crimped or welded
area, but the wires are subjected to excessive tension, leading to breakage of the
insulation or the wire itself and a poor connection.
c.
Disconnecting wiring
If components are disconnected by pulling on the wires, or if components are removed
with the wires still connected, or if the wiring is subject to a heavy impact this could
damage the connections at the pins, breaking strands of wire.
d.
Penetration of water in connectors

The connectors are designed to prevent penetration of liquids (water, oil etc.); however,
it is possible that when the tractor is cleaned using high-pressure water or steam, water
could penetrate or condense in the connectors.
As the connectors are designed to prevent liquid penetration, any water that does get in
will not be able to drain out, and thus may cause shortcircuits across the pins.
For this reason it is good practice to dry the connectors with a low pressure jet of
compressed air after washing the tractor.
e.
Oil or dirt on connectors

Oil or grease on the connectors or pins can create a poor contact (oil and grease are nonconductors). Clean the connectors thoroughly using a dry cloth or a low pressure jet of
compressed air and use specific products (deoxidising sprays, etc.) to degrease the
contacts.
Take care not to bend the pins when cleaning them.

Use dehydrated but not lubricated compressed air.
1.3.3REMOVAL, REFITTING AND DRYING OF CONNECTORS AND WIRING

a.
Disconnection of connectors
When disconnecting wiring, pull on the connectors rather than on the wires themselves.
For connectors that are held in position with screws or levers, fully loosen the screws,
then pull on the connector. For connectors that are clipped together, fully depress the
clip then pull the connector apart. After disconnecting connectors, cover them in a
waterproof material to prevent dirt or moisture getting into the contacts.
b.
Connecting the connectors

Check the condition of the connectors:
Make sure the pin contact surfaces are free of water, dirt or oil.
Check that the connectors are not deformed and that the pins are not corroded.
Check that the connector casings are not damaged or split.

If a connector is contaminated with oil or grease, or if moisture has penetrated the
casing, clean it as described in paragraph 1.3.2.
If a connector is damaged, deformed or broken, replace it with a new one.
When connecting connectors, make sure they are properly aligned before applying any
force.
For connectors with clips, insert the two halves until they clip together.
c.
Cleaning and drying wiring

When wiring is dirty or contaminated with oil or grease, clean it with a dry cloth, or, if
necessary, with water or steam.
If the wiring has to be cleaned with water, avoid directing the water or steam jet on the
connectors; if water penetrates the connector, proceed as described in paragraph 1.3.2.
Check that the connector is not short circuited by humidity by testing the continuity
across the pins.
267
Systems
84
Electrical system
d.
After checking the connector is good condition, degrease the contacts using a
deoxidising product.
Renewal of damaged electrical components.
When replacing electrical components (fuses, relays, etc.), use only original parts
supplied by the manufacturer.
When replacing fuses, check that the new fuse conforms to DIN 72581 standards
and in particular:
- fuse F1 (100A) DIN 72581/2
- bayonet fuse (F2, F3, etc.) DIN 72581/3C
The fitting of replacement fuses that do not comply with these standards will
invalidate the warranty with immediate effect and release the manufacturer from
any liability.
When replacing relays, make sure that the new relay conforms to the standards
marked on the original relay.
1.4 DIAGNOSTIC INSTRUMENTS

For the correct diagnosis of any faults in tne tractors electrical system, the following
instruments are required:
1 - Digital multimeter with the following minimum characteristics:
AC VOLT
0-600
DC VOLT
0-600
OHM
0-32M
AC AMP
0-10
DC AMP
0-10
2 - All Round Tester
1.5 WIRE COLOUR CODES
268
COLOUR CODES
COLOUR CODES
Light blue
Brown
White
Black
Orange
Red
Yellow
Pink
Grey
Green
Dark blue
Purple
Systems
Electrical system
84
2. INDICES
2.1 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION INDEX
Tech.
descr.
(Chap.
3.2.x)
Connector
System
(Chap. 4.xx)
2.7099.770.0
X2
6-7-8
Alternator ISKRA 65A
2.9439.420.0
X65
2.9439.460.0/10
X65
Heating alternator ISKRA 70A
2.9439.440.0/10
X109/B+/B-
14-15-16-17
RH speaker
X133
12-13
LH speaker
X132
12-13
X86-X131
12-13
2.8419.003.0
X61
3-4-5
Glowplug
01175757
X57
Preheating control unit
01178976
X43
0.011.2992.4/20
X71
6-7-8-20
2.8639.007.0
X40
3-4-5
0.010.8869.4/20
X72
19
Heater settings control unit
0.007.6766.4
X136
14-15-16-17
Fan speed selector switch
0.009.4743.1
X139
14-16
0.010.2528.1
X154
15-17
Air conditioning compressor
0.009.7660.4
X59
16-17
Compressor for
drivers seat air suspension
0.007.6273.4
X12
6-7-8
X42
6-7-8-20
Component description
Component
code
Cigar lighter
Radio
Horn
Rear lift control unit

Hazard lights control unit
HML control unit
Diagnostics connector
Analogue instrument panel
2.8339.212.0/10
X3
2-3-4-5-1118-19-21
Digital instrument panel
2.8339.153.0/30
X3
2-3-4-5-1118-19-21
Lights selector switch
0.009.6491.4
39
X36
3-4-5-6-7-8
Diff lock control solenoid valve

(DF)
2.3729.240.0/10
X16
19
4WD control solenoid valve
2.3729.240.0/10
X15
19
High range control solenoid valve

(HI)
2.3729.240.0/10
11
19
Low range control solenoid valve

(LO)
2.3729.240.0/10
12
19
Preheating control solenoid valve
01179366
X58
X17
21
Rear PTO control solenoid valve

(PTO)
2.3729.240.0/10
10
Lift lowering solenoid valve
2.3729.460.0
EV DW
20
Front PTO solenoid valve
2.3729.400.0
X63
21
Lift raising solenoid valve
2.3729.460.0
EV UP
20
269
Systems
84
Electrical system
Tech.
descr.
(Chap.
3.2.x)
Connector
System
(Chap. 4.xx)
2.8019.970.0
X13
Front left headlamp
2.8019.960.0
X27
Front right worklight
2.8029.730.0
X124
4-5
Front left worklight
2.8029.730.0
X121
4-5
Rear right worklight
2.8029.730.0
X123
4-5
Rear left worklight
2.8029.730.0
X122
4-5
Number plate light
2.8029.240.0/10
X28
3-4-5
Front right lights
2.8029.820.0/30
X64
3-4-5
Front left lights
2.8029.830.0/30
X62
3-4-5
Front right sidelight and direction

indicator
04411920.4
X13
4-5
Front left sidelight and direction

indicator
04411921.4
X27
4-5
Rear right light
2.8019.190.0
X14
3-4-5-18
Left rear light
2.8019.180.0
X29
3-4-5-18
Rear worklight
(platform version)
2.8029.300.0
X22
X104
5-8-10
X32
2-3-4-5-6-7-8-910-11-14-15-1617-18-19-20-21
X158
17
Component
code
Front right headlamp
Roof wiring fuse (40 Amp)

Starter switch
2.7659.127.0
Air conditioning control switch
0.010.2560.1
Diff lock control switch
2.7659.163.0
32
X9
19
0.007.5945.0/20
34
X8
19
Rotating beacon control switch
2.7659.159.0
31
X96
2.7659.126.0
X81
X100
X85
X99
X78
X80
10
X80
4WD control switch
Front worklights switch

Rear worklights switch
2.7659.154.0
30
2.7659.078.0
2.7659.155.0
2.7659.079.0
Front screen washer switch
2.7659.223.0
28
29
24
2.7659.091.0
Rear PTO control switch
2.7659.108.0/10
36
X10
2-21
Front PTO control switch
2.7659.108.0/10
35
X35
21
Front wiper control switch
2.7659.092.0
25
X84
270
Systems
Electrical system
84
Component
code
Tech.
descr.
(Chap.
3.2.x)
Connector
System
(Chap. 4.xx)
2.7659.224.0
38
X98
10
Rear wiper control switch
2.7659.146.0
26
X79
2.7659.192.0
37
X97
10
Start enable switch
2.7659.097.0
X31
Handbrake switch
2.7659.129.0
17
X24
18
Hazard warning lights switch
2.7659.110.0
27
X33
3-4-5
X34
X5
18
X127
7-8

(Not utilised)
Brake pedal switch
2.7659.097.0
Flashing light
Windscreen wiper motor
04413192
X130
9-10
Rear screen wiper motor
2.9019.100.0/20
X125
2.9019.180.0
X125
10
01180928
X37-X38
Clock
2.9389.002.0
X83
7-8
Interior roof light
2.8339.032.0
X74
7-8
X41
Starter motor
Fuel pump
Front screen washer pump
0.9241.566.1
X129
9-10
Rear screen washer pump
0.9241.566.1
X135
9-10
Max. lift height adjustment

potentiometer
0.011.2990.0
H1
20
Lift position adjustment

potentiometer
0.011.2990.0
P1
20
Potentiometer adjustment heading
0.98707.67.3
X138-X145
14-15-16-17
Draft/wheelslip adjustment
potentiometer
0.011.2990.0
M1
20
Lift lowering speed adjustment

potentiometer
0.011.2990.0
20
Outlet socket (in cab)
2.6039.017.0
X11
6-7-8
X26
3-4-5-18
Trailer socket
(For lights and
auxiliary power)
Air conditioning pressure switch
0.010.2140.0
X118-X120
16
0.010.2262.0
X116
17
Trailer braking low pressure switch
2.7099.430.0
X25
18
X20
11
X19
11
Hydraulic oil low pressure switch
2.7099.660.0/10
15
Pressure switch
- hydraulic oil filter clogging
Engine oil pressure switch
Engine governor reset button
01181549
16
X55
11
2.7659.139.0
18
X45
11
271
Systems
84
Electrical system
Component
code
Tech.
descr.
(Chap.
3.2.x)
Connector
System
(Chap. 4.xx)
Rear lift "lower"

control pushbutton
2.7659.182.0
22
DW
20
HML control pushbutton
0.010.5330.4
19
Preheating control pushbutton
2.7659.140.0
21
X67
Rear lift "raise"

control pushbutton
2.7659.182.0
23
UP
20
0.011.7720.0/10
33
C-I
20
Selection pushbutton
2.7659.140.0
19
X52
11
Display pushbutton
2.7659.173.0
20
X44
11
Relay - cab roof wiring
X103
4-5-7-8-9-1014-15-16-17
Relay -1st heater fan and air

conditioning on
X156
17
Relay - 3rd heater fan vspeed
X157
15-17
Relay - air conditioning
X143
16
Relay - alternator excitation
X142-X147
14-15-16-17
Relay - maximum fan speed
X146
15-17
Relay - heat exchanger fan
X115
16-17
Relay - supplementary heat

exchanger fan
X114
17
Relay RL1
RL1
Relay RL2
RL2
Heater unit resistance
X106
14-15-16-17
Rear lift control pushbutton
Resistor - right heater fan
0.010.2555.0
X149
15-17
Resistor - heater fan
0.010.2122.0
X140
14-16
Resistor - left heater fan
0.010.2555.0
X148
15-17
Air cleaner clogged sensor

Fuel level sensor
2.7099.320.0/10
14
X60
11
2.7059.998.0
13
X23
11
X66
18
Brake fluid level sensor

Rear lift position sensor
0.009.2194.4
P2
20
0.011.2164.0/10
S1
20
0.010.2124.1
X137
14-15-16-17
Coolant temperature sensor
01177090
X54
11
Transmission speed sensor
0.008.1646.0
X50
11
PTO engagement sensor
2.7659.097.0
21
1000 rpm PTO engagement sensor
2.7659.131.0
21
2.7659.131.0
21
750 (ECO) PTO engagement sensor
2.7659.131.0
21
Intermittent windscreen wiper

interval timer
2.8639.008.0
X82
9-10
Lift draft sensor

Heating air temperature sensor
272
Systems
Electrical system
84
Tech.
descr.
(Chap.
3.2.x)
Connector
System
(Chap. 4.xx)
0.009.4744.1
X144
16
Air conditioning thermostat
0.010.2522.0
X159
17
Right heater fan
0.011.2047.4
X153
15
Right heater fan
0.011.8858.4
X153
17
Heater fan
0.010.2121.1
X141
14-16
Air conditioning heat exchanger fan
0.010.0618.4
X119
16
0.010.2545.2
X117a
17
Left heater fan
0.011.2047.4
X151
15
Left heater fan
0.011.8858.4
X151
17
Supplementary air conditioning heat

exchanger fan
0.010.2545.2
X117b
17
Component
code
Antifrost thermostat
273
Systems
84
Electrical system
2.2 COMPONENT CODE INDEX
Code
0.007.5945.0/20
Description
4WD control switch
Tech.
descr.
(Chap.
3.2.x)
Connector
System
(Chap. 4.xx)
34
X8
19
0.007.6273.4
Compressor for drivers seat air suspension
X12
6-7-8
0.007.6766.4
X136
14-15-16-17
0.008.1646.0
X50
11
0.009.2194.4
P2
20
0.009.4743.1
X139
14-16
0.009.4744.1
X144
16
0.009.6491.4
X36
3-4-5-6-7-8
0.009.7660.4
X59
16-17
0.010.0618.4
X119
16
0.010.2121.1
Heater fan
X141
14-16
0.010.2122.0
X140
14-16
0.010.2124.1
X137
14-15-16-17
0.010.2140.0
X118-X120
16
0.010.2262.0
X116
17
0.010.2522.0
Air conditioning
thermostat
X159
17
0.010.2528.1
X154
15-17
0.010.2545.2
X117a
17
0.010.2545.2

exchanger fan
X117b
17
0.010.2555.0
X149
15-17
0.010.2555.0
X148
15-17
0.010.2560.1
X158
17
0.010.5330.4
19
39
0.010.8869.4/20
HML control unit
X72
19
0.011.2047.4
Right heater fan
X153
15
0.011.2047.4
Left heater fan
X151
15
0.011.2164.0/10
Lift draft sensor
S1
20
0.011.2990.0
Max. lift height adjustment potentiometer
H1
20
0.011.2990.0
Lift position adjustment potentiometer
P1
20
274
Code
Description
Systems
Electrical system
84
Tech.
descr.
(Chap.
3.2.x)
Connector
System
(Chap. 4.xx)
0.011.2990.0
potentiometer
M1
20
0.011.2990.0

potentiometer
20
X71
6-7-8-20
C-I
20
0.011.2992.4/20
0.011.7720.0/10
33
0.011.8858.4
Right heater fan
X153
17
0.011.8858.4
Left heater fan
X151
17
0.9241.566.1
X129
9-10
0.9241.566.1
X135
9-10
0.98707.67.3
X138-X145
14-15-16-17
01175757
Glowplug
X57
01177090
X54
11
01178976
X43
01179366
X58
01180928
Starter motor
X37-X38
01181549
X55
11
16
04411920.4
Front right sidelight and direction indicator
X13
4-5
04411921.4
Front left sidelight and direction indicator
X27
4-5
X130
9-10
04413192
2.3729.240.0/10
Diff lock control solenoid valve (DF)
X16
19
2.3729.240.0/10
4WD control solenoid valve
X15
19
2.3729.240.0/10
Rear PTO control solenoid valve (PTO)
10
X17
21
2.3729.240.0/10
High range control solenoid valve (HI)
11
19
2.3729.240.0/10
Low range control solenoid valve (LO)
12
19
X63
21
2.3729.400.0
2.3729.460.0
EV DW
20
2.3729.460.0
EV UP
20
2.6039.017.0
X11
6-7-8
2.7059.998.0
Fuel level sensor
13
X23
11
14
X60
11
2.7099.320.0/10
275
Systems
84
Electrical system
Code
2.7099.430.0
2.7099.660.0/10
Description
Tech.
descr.
(Chap.
3.2.x)

15
Connector
System
(Chap. 4.xx)
X25
18
X20
11
2.7099.770.0
Cigar lighter
X2
6-7-8
2.7659.078.0
Front worklights control switch
X85
2.7659.079.0
Rear worklights control switch
X78
X80
X84
2.7659.091.0
Front screen washer control switch
2.7659.092.0
2.7659.097.0
Start enable switch
X31
2.7659.097.0
Brake pedal switch
X5
18
2.7659.097.0
21
2.7659.108.0/10
35
X35
21
2.7659.108.0/10
36
X10
2-21
2.7659.110.0
27
X33
3-4-5
2.7659.126.0
X81
2.7659.127.0
Starter switch
28
X32
2-3-4-5-6-7-8-910-11-14-15-16
17-18-19-20-21
2.7659.129.0
Handbrake switch
17
X24
18
2.7659.131.0
21
2.7659.131.0
21
2.7659.131.0
21
2.7659.139.0
18
X45
11
2.7659.140.0
19
X52
11
2.7659.140.0
21
X67
2.7659.146.0
26
X79
2.7659.154.0
30
X100
2.7659.155.0
29
X99
2.7659.159.0
31
X96
2.7659.163.0
32
X9
19
2.7659.173.0
Display pushbutton
20
X44
11
2.7659.182.0
Rear lift "lower" control pushbutton
22
DW
20
276
25
Code
Description
Systems
Electrical system
84
Tech.
descr.
(Chap.
3.2.x)
Connector
System
(Chap. 4.xx)
2.7659.182.0
Rear lift "raise" control pushbutton
23
UP
20
2.7659.192.0
37
X97
10
2.7659.223.0
Front screen washer control switch
24
X80
10
2.7659.224.0
38
X98
10
2.8019.180.0
Rear left light
X29
3-4-5-18
2.8019.190.0
Rear right light
X14
3-4-5-18
2.8019.960.0
Front left light
X27
2.8019.970.0
Front right light
X13
2.8029.240.0/10
Number plate light
X28
3-4-5
2.8029.300.0
Rear worklight
(platform version)
X22
2.8029.730.0
X124
4-5
2.8029.730.0
X121
4-5
2.8029.730.0
X123
4-5
2.8029.730.0
Rear left worklight
X122
4-5
2.8029.820.0/30
Front right light
X64
3-4-5
2.8029.830.0/30
Front left light
X62
3-4-5
Interior roof light
X74
7-8
2.8339.153.0/30
X3
2-3-4-5-1118-19-21
2.8339.212.0/10
X3
2-3-4-5-1118-19-21
2.8419.003.0
Horn
X61
3-4-5
2.8639.007.0
X40
3-4-5
2.8639.008.0
Intermittent windscreen wiper interval timer
X82
9-10
2.9019.100.0/20
X125
2.9019.180.0
X125
10
2.9389.002.0
Clock
X83
7-8
2.9439.420.0
X65
X109/B+/B-
14-15-16-17
X65
2.8339.032.0
2.9439.440.0/10
2.9439.460.0/10
277
Systems
84
Electrical system
2.3 CONNECTOR INDEX

Wiring code
Connection
wiring or
component code
0.010.5303.4
2.7659.131.0
0.010.5303.4
2.7659.131.0
Connector
Type
0.009.7852.3
B-
2.9439.440.0/10
2.9439.440.0/10
0.011.6943.4
0.011.7720.0/10
0.011.6943.4
2.7659.182.0
Rear lift "lower"

control pushbutton
0.010.5303.4
2.7659.131.0
0.011.3761.3
0.009.7852.3
B+
0.011.3761.3
C
DW
E
EV DW
0.011.6943.4
2.3729.460.0
EV UP
0.011.6943.4
2.3729.460.0
H1
0.011.6943.4
0.011.2990.0
Max. lift height adjustment

potentiometer
0.011.7972.4
2.3729.240.0/10
High range control solenoid valve

(HI
0.011.6943.4
0.011.7720.0/10

Low range control solenoid valve
(LO)
I
L
0.011.7972.4
2.3729.240.0/10
M1
0.011.6943.4
0.011.2990.0
potentiometer
0.011.7972.4
0.010.5330.4
P1
0.011.6943.4
0.011.2990.0
P2
0.011.6943.4
0.009.2194.4
RL1
0.010.5303.4
Relay RL1
RL2
0.010.5303.4
Relay RL2
S1
0.011.2164.0/10
Lift draft sensor
0.010.5303.4
2.7659.097.0
UP
0.011.6943.4
2.7659.182.0
Rear lift "raise" control

pushbutton
0.011.6943.4
0.011.2990.0

potentiometer
X1
0.010.5302.4
0.010.5303.4
0.010.5303.4
2.7099.770.0
X2
278
0.011.6943.4
Cigar lighter
Systems
Electrical system
84
Connector
Type
Wiring code
Connection
wiring or
component code
X3
0.010.5303.4
2.8339.153.0/30
X4
0.010.5303.4
0.010.5582.3
0.010.5303.4
2.7659.097.0
X5
Brake pedal switch
X6
0.010.5303.4
0.011.7972.4
X7
0.010.5303.4
0.011.6943.4
X8
0.010.5303.4
0.007.5945.0/20
X9
0.010.5303.4
2.7659.163.0
X10
0.010.5303.4
2.7659.108.0/10
X11
0.010.5303.4
2.6039.017.0
X12
0.010.5303.4
0.007.6766.4
Compressor for drivers seat

air suspension
0.010.5582.3
04411920.4
Front right sidelight and

direction indicator
0.010.5303.4
2.8019.970.0
0.010.5303.4
2.8019.190.0
Rear right light
X13
X14
Four-wheel drive control switch

PTO control switch
X15
0.010.5303.4
2.3729.240.0/10
4WD control
solenoid valve
X16
0.010.5303.4
2.3729.240.0/10
Diff lock control solenoid valve

(DF)
X17
0.010.5303.4
2.3729.240.0/10
Rear PTO
control solenoid valve (PTO)
X18
0.010.5303.4
Connector for joint
X19
0.010.5303.4
Pressure switch hydraulic oil filter clogging
X20
0.010.5303.4
X21
0.010.5303.4
X22
0.010.5303.4
2.8029.300.0
Rear worklight
(platform version
0.010.5303.4
2.7059.998.0
Fuel level sensor
0.010.5303.4
2.7659.129.0
Handbrake switch
0.010.5303.4
2.7099.430.0
Trailer braking low pressure

switch
X23
X24
X25
X26
2.7099.660.0/10

Connector for joint
Trailer socket (For lights and auxiliary

power)
0.010.5303.4
0.010.5582.3
04411921.4
Front left sidelight and direction

indicator
0.010.5303.4
2.8019.960.0
Front left headlamp
X27
279
Systems
84
Electrical system
Wiring code
Connection
wiring or
component code
X28
0.010.5303.4
2.8029.240.0/10
X29
0.010.5303.4
2.8019.180.0
Left rear light
X31
0.010.5303.4
2.7659.097.0
Start enable switch
X32
0.010.5303.4
2.7659.127.0
Starter switch
2.7659.110.0
Connector
Type
Number plate light
X33
0.010.5303.4
X34
0.010.5303.4
X35
0.010.5303.4
2.7659.108.0/10
X36
0.010.5303.4
0.009.6491.4
X37
0.010.5302.4
0.009.7852.3
0.011.3761.3
0.010.5303.4
01180928
Starter motor
X38
0.010.5302.4
0.010.5303.4
01180928
Starter motor

(Not utilised)
0.009.7852.3
X39
0.010.5303.4
0.011.3761.3
X40
0.010.5303.4
X41
0.010.5302.4
Fuel pump
X42
0.010.5303.4
X43
10
0.010.5303.4
01178976
X44
0.010.5303.4
2.7659.173.0
Display pushbutton
X45
0.010.5303.4
2.7659.139.0
X50
11
0.010.5303.4
0.008.1646.0
X52
0.010.5303.4
2.7659.140.0
X54
0.010.5302.4
01177090
X55
0.010.5302.4
01181549
X57
0.010.5302.4
01175757
Glowplug
X58
0.010.5302.4
01179366
X59
0.010.5302.4
0.007.7660.4
X60
0.010.5302.4
2.7099.320.0/10
X61
0.010.5302.4
2.8419.003.0
X62
0.010.5302.4
2.8029.830.0/30
0.010.5302.4
2.3729.400.0
X63
280
2.8639.007.0
Horn
Front left lights
Systems
Electrical system
84
Wiring code
Connection
wiring or
component code
X64
0.010.5302.4
2.8029.820.0/30
X65
0.010.5302.4
Connector
Type
X66
X67
X71
X72
14
Front right lights
2.9439.420.0
2.9439.460.0/10
0.010.5302.4
3
0.010.5303.4
2.7659.140.0
0.011.6943.4
0.011.2992.4/20
0.011.7972.4
0.010.8869.4/20
HML control unit
2.8339.032.0
Interior roof light
0.009.7850.4
X74
0.011.3606.4
0.009.7850.4
0.009.7854.3
0.011.3606.4
0.011.3743.3
X76
0.009.7850.4
0.009.7853.3
X77
0.009.7850.4
0.009.7851.4
X78
0.009.7850.4
2.7659.079.0
X79
0.009.7850.4
2.7659.146.0
Rear screen washer switch
0.009.7850.4
2.7659.091.0
0.011.3606.4
2.7659.223.0
0.009.7850.4
2.7659.126.0
2.8639.008.0
Intermittent windscreen wiper interval

timer
2.9389.002.0
Clock
X75
X80
X81
0.009.7850.4
X82
0.011.3606.4
0.009.7850.4
X83
0.011.3596.3
X84
0.009.7850.4
2.7659.092.0
X85
0.009.7850.4
2.7659.078.0

0.009.7850.4
X86
Radio
0.011.3596.3
X87
0.009.7850.4
0.009.7852.3
X88
0.009.7850.4
0.010.4516.3
281
Connector
Systems
84
Electrical system
Type
Wiring code
Connection
wiring or
component code
0.010.2123.2
X89
0.009.7850.4
0.010.2130.1
X90
0.009.7850.4
0.010.2130.1
X91
0.011.3761.3
0.011.3606.4
0.011.3606.4
0.011.3597.3
X92
12
0.010.2558.1
X93
0.011.3606.4
0.010.2562.1
X94
0.011.3606.4
0.010.2562.1
X95
0.011.3606.4
0.011.3595.3
X96
0.011.3606.4
2.7659.159.0
X97
0.011.3606.4
2.7659.192.0
X98
0.011.3606.4
2.7659.224.0
X99
0.011.3606.4
2.7659.155.0
X100
0.011.3606.4
2.7659.154.0
X101
0.011.3606.4
0.011.3596.3
X102
0.011.3606.4
0.011.3610.3

Winscreen wiper control switch
0.009.7850.4
X103
Relay - cab roof wiring

0.011.3606.4
0.009.7852.3
0.009.7850.4
0.011.3761.3
0.011.3606.4
X103-30
X104
Roof wiring fuse

(40 Amp)
0.011.3606.4
0.009.7852.3
X106

0.011.3761.3
0.010.2123.2
X107
0.009.7852.3
0.010.2130.1
0.009.7852.3
X108
Connector for joint

0.011.3761.3
0.009.7852.3
X109
2.9439.440.0/10
0.011.3761.3
282
Connector
Type
Wiring code
Systems
Electrical system
84
Connection
wiring or
component code
0.009.7852.3
X111
Connector for joint

0.011.3761.3
0.010.2558.1
X113
0.011.3761.3
0.010.2562.1
X114
Relay - supplementary heat exchanger

fan
0.011.3610.3
0.009.7853.3
X115

0.011.3610.3
X116
13
0.011.3610.3
0.010.2262.0
X117a
15
0.011.3610.3
0.010.2545.2
X117b
15
0.011.3610.3
0.010.2545.2

exchanger fan
X118
0.009.7853.3
0.010.2140.0
X119
0.009.7853.3
0.010.0618.4
X120
0.009.7853.3
0.010.2140.0
2.8029.730.0
2.8029.730.0
Rear left worklight
2.8029.730.0
2.8029.730.0
0.009.7851.4
X121
0.011.3595.3
0.009.7851.4
X122
0.011.3595.3
0.009.7851.4
X123
0.011.3595.3
0.009.7851.4
X124
0.011.3595.3
0.009.7851.4
2.9019.100.0/20
0.011.3596.3
2.9019.180.0
X125

0.009.7851.4
X126
Connector for joint

0.011.3596.3
0.009.7851.4
X127
Flashing light
0.011.3596.3
0.009.7854.3
X129
0.9241.566.1
0.011.3743.3
0.010.4516.3
X130
04413192
Front screen wiper motor
0.011.3597.3
283
Connector
Systems
84
Electrical system
Type
Wiring code
Connection
wiring or
component code
0.011.0729.4
X131
Radio
0.011.3596.3
0.011.0729.4
X132
Left speaker
0.011.3596.3
0.011.0729.4
X133
Right speaker
0.011.3596.3
0.009.7854.3
X135
0.9241.566.1
0.007.6766.4
0.010.2124.1
0.98707.67.3
0.009.4743.1
0.010.2122.0
0.010.2121.1
Heater fan
0.011.3743.3
0.010.2123.2
0.010.2130.1
X136
010.2558.1
0.010.2562.1
0.010.2123.2
0.010.2130.1
X137
010.2558.1
0.010.2562.1
0.010.2123.2
X138
0.010.2130.1
0.010.2123.2
X139
0.010.2130.1
0.010.2123.2
X140
0.010.2130.1
0.010.2123.2
X141
0.010.2130.1
0.010.2123.2
X142

0.010.2130.1
X143
0.010.2130.1
X144
0.010.2130.1
Relay - air conditioning

0.009.4744.0
0.98707.67.3
010.2558.1
X145
0.010.2562.1
010.2558.1
X146
Relay - maximum fan speed

0.010.2562.1
284
Connector
Type
Wiring code
Systems
Electrical system
84
Connection
wiring or
component code
010.2558.1
X147

0.010.2562.1
010.2558.1
X148
0.010.2555.0
0.010.2555.0
0.010.2562.1
010.2558.1
X149
0.010.2562.1
010.2558.1
X150
Connector for joint

0.010.2562.1
010.2558.1
0.011.2047.4
0.010.2562.1
0.011.8858.4
X151
Left heater fan

010.2558.1
X152
Connector for joint

0.010.2562.1
010.2558.1
0.011.2047.4
0.010.2562.1
0.011.8858.4
X153
Right heater fan

010.2558.1
X154
0.010.2528.1
0.010.2562.1
X156
Relay -1st heater fan and air

conditioning on
0.010.2562.1
010.2558.1
Relay - 3rd heater fan

speed
X157
0.010.2562.1
X158
0.010.2562.1
0.010.2560.1
X159
0.010.2562.1
0.010.2522.0
285
Systems
84
Electrical system
3. COMPONENTS
This chapter contains:
1 - Connectors table: the shapes and pinouts of the connectors
2 - Components table: technical and functional description of the components
3 - Pinouts of the electronic control units
3.1 CONNECTOR LAYOUTS
1
4
15
14
14
15
20
20
21
25
26
29
26
5
4
286
29
25
21
36
28
27
19
18
10
7
6
5
4
5
7
3
12
1
2
10
10
Electrical system
84
11
7
8
4
5
6
Systems
17
13
6
3
4
4
14
1
1
12
15
A
A
B
B
287
Systems
84
Electrical system
3.2 COMPONENT TECHNICAL DATA

N Description
Code
Characteristics
Notes
Connector
0.009.2194.4
Pin1 = earth
Pin2 = output signal
Pin3 = 10Vdc power
0.2Vdc output (sensor not engaged)
8.3 Vdc
(Sensor fully pressed)
P2
0.011.2164.0
Pin1 = earth
Pin2 = analogue signal
Pin3 = 10V power
Signal with sensor disconnected
from the tractor between pins 1 and 2:
~5 V
S1
H1
Lift draft sensor
Max. lift height

adjustment
potentiometer
0.011.2990.0
Resistance between pin1 and pin 3:

~4.7 kOhm
04.7 kOhm
Lift position adjustment

potentiometer
0.011.2990.0

~4.7 kOhm
04.7 kOhm
P1
Draft/wheelslip
adjustment
potentiometer
0.011.2990.0

~4.7 kOhm
04.7 kOhm
M1
Max. lift height

adjustment
potentiometer
0.011.2990.0

~4.7 kOhm
04.7 kOhm
Transmission speed
sensor
008.1646.0

~1000 Ohm at 20C
X50
Diff lock control solenoid

valve (DF)
2.3729.240.0

~ 8 Ohm at 20C
X16
4WD control solenoid

valve
2.3729.240.0

~ 8 Ohm at 20C
X15
10
Rear PTO control

solenoid valve (PTO)
2.3729.240.0

~ 8 Ohm at 20C
X17
High range control

11 solenoid valve (HI)
2.3729.240.0

~ 8 Ohm at 20C
12 L o w r a n g e c o n t r o l
solenoid valve (LO)
2.3729.240.0

~ 8 Ohm at 20C
13 Fuel level sensor
2.7059.998.0
Air cleaner clogging

14 sensor
2.7099.320.0
288
Resistance between pin 2 and pin 3:

___ Ohm (Tank full ___ mm)
___ Ohm (Tank half full ___ mm)
___ Ohm (Tank empty ___ mm)
Illumination reserve warning light
(Closes contact between pins 1 and 3):
at _____ mm from tank empty signal
Normally open contact
X23
X60
N Description
Hydraulic oil
15 pressure switch
Code
low
Electrical system
84
Characteristics
Notes
Connector
X20
01181549
Normally closed contact
X55
17 Handbrake switch
2.7659.129.0
Normally closed contact

(Handbrake on)
X24
Engine governor reset

18 button
2.7659.139.0
X45
19 T y r e s i z e s e l e c t i o n
pushbutton
2.7659.140.0
X52
Engine governor display

pushbutton
2.7659.173.0
X73
21 Preheating control pushbutton
2.7659.177.0
Normally open contact (NO)

resistance with contact closed 3.9
Ohm
X67
Rear lift "lower" control

22 pushbutton
2.7659.182.0

Ohm
DW
Rear lift "raise"

23 control pushbutton
2.7659.182.0

Ohm
UP
2.7659.223.0
Normally open contact between

contacts 2 and 3.
32
16 Engine oil pressure

switch
20
24
Front screen washer

control switch
2.7099.660.0
Systems
289
Systems
84
Electrical system
N Description
Code
Characteristics
Connector
0
1
2
25
Winscreen wiper
control switch
2.7659.092.0
X84
Pin
Pos
0
1
2
0
1
2
26 Rear wiper control switch
2.7659.146.0
X79
Pin
Pos
0
1
2
b
30
30
49a
15
49
Hazard warning lights

27
switch
X33
Pin
Pos
0
1
290
2.7659.110.0
15
49
30
49a
Code
Electrical system
84
Connector
Characteristics
1
15
30
N Description
Systems
50
30/1
17
19
28 Starter switch
2.7659.127.0
Pin
Pos
15 30/1 50
19
30
X32
17
P
0
1
2
0
1
Rear worklights control

29 switch
2.7659.155.0
X99
Pin
Pos
0
1
0
1
30
Front worklights control

switch
2.7659.154.0
X100
Pin
Pos
0
1
291
Systems
84
Electrical system
N Description
Code
Connector
Characteristics
0
1
Rotating beacon control

31
switch
2.7659.159.0
X96
Pin
Pos
0
1
0
3
5
32 Diff lock control switch
2.7659.163.0
X9
Pin
Pos
0
1
Rear
lift
33 pushbutton
control
1 2 3 4 5
2
0
1
0.011.7720.0
Pin
Pos
1
0
2
292
C-I
1
N Description
Code
Systems
Electrical system
84
Characteristics
Connector
30
49a
15
30
49
34 4WD control switch
007.5945.0
X8
Pin
Pos
15
49
30 30b
0
1
30
49a
15
30
49
35 Rear PTO control switch
2.7659.108.0
X10
Pin
Pos
15
49
30 30b
0
1
b
30
30
49a
15
49
36 Front PTO control switch
2.7659.108.0
X35
Pin
Pos
15
49
30 30b
0
1
293
Systems
84
Electrical system
N Description
Code
Characteristics
1
2
37 Rear wiper control switch
Connector
2.7659.192.0
X97
Pin
Pos
0
1
2
1
2
38 Winscreen wiper
control switch
2.7659.224.0
X98
Pin
Pos
0
1
2
Pin
Pos
39 Lights selector switch
0.009.6491.4
Freccia sx
Freccia dx
Clacson
Lampeggio
Luci di
posizione
Luci
anabbagl.
Luci
abbagl.
294
X36
N Description
Code
Systems
Electrical system
84
Characteristics
Connector
0
C
1
31
PTO engagement
40 pushbutton
S1
2.7659.142.0
X10
Pos
Pin S1
31
0
1
295
Systems
84
Electrical system
3.3 PINOUTS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS

3.3.1 HML CONTROL UNIT
CONNECTOR X72
12 11 10 9
12
Pin
Volts.
0V
Abbreviation
Description
Battery negative
"M" warning light output
+12V
0V
Power (+) commmon for "H-M-L" solenoid valves

Configuration pin
Not utilised
Digital signal - range downshift pushbutton
Digital signal - range upshift pushbutton
0V
Range switch common
Power for "L" solenoid valve
10
Power for "M" solenoid valve
11
Power for "H" solenoid valve
12
296
+12V
Battery positive
Systems
Electrical system
84
3.3.2 POWER LIFT CONTROL UNIT

CONNECTOR X71
12 11 10 9
12
Pin
Volts.
+12V
Abbreviation
Description
Battery positive
Power for "UP" solenoid valve
Power for "DOWN" solenoid valve
0V
+10V
Battery negative
Power (+) common for solenoid valves and sensors
Analogue input - lift position sensor
Analogue input - lift draft sensor
Analogue input - lift lowering speed adjustment trimmer
Analogue input - max. lift height adjustment trimmer
10
Analogue input - lift draft-wheelslip adjustment trimmer
11
Analogue input - lift position adjustment trimmer
12
ISO 9141 serial interface (Diagnostics connector)
297
Systems
84
Electrical system
3.3.4 ANALOGUE INSTRUMENT PANEL
27
16
17
18
26
25
15
23
REF.SAME-10S-10N ANALOGICO
2200RPM=567A-473W HZ 12V
REF.AST/Rev. DATE........
AST
MADE IN SPAIN
W
A
11
10
14
13
29
21
12
20
19
28
22
30
31
24
32
33
34
35
36
CONNECTOR X3
Pin
Volts.
Abbreviation
Description
Warning light - "Memorising selected gear"
Analogue input - "W" (Alternator rotation)
Not utilised
Input - engine temperature sensor
Input - fuel level sensor resistance
Warning light - "High beam"
Warning light - "Preheating"
"Clogged air cleaner" warning light
Warning light - "Low engine oil pressure"
10
Warning light - "Handbrake - Low fluid level"
11
Warning light - "Low gear" (L)
12
Warning light - "Fuel reserve"
13
Warning light - "Low trailer braking pressure"
14
Warning light - "Battery charging"
15
Warning light - "Hydraulic oil filter clogged - Low oil presure"
16
Warning light - "Front PTO engaged"
17
Warning light - "Rear PTO engaged"
18
Warning light - "Broken belt alarm"
19
Instrument panel lighting
20
Warning light - "Diff lock"
21
Warning light - "4wd engaged"
22
Warning light - "Direction indicators"
23
Warning light - "1st trailer direction indicators"
24
Warning light - "2nd trailer direction indicators"
298
Systems
Electrical system
84
25
Warning light - "Rear PTO Groundspeed"
26
Warning light - "High gear" (H)
27
Warning light - "Medium gear" (M)
28
Warning light - "Rear PTO at 540 rpm"
29
30
Warning light - "Rear PTO ECO"
31
0V
32
+12V
Common earth fore warning lights (pins 1,6,16,18,19,22,23,24)

Power common for warning lights
(Pins 7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,15,17,20,21,25,26,27,28,29,30)
33
Power for "External alarm" warning light
34
Not utilised
35
Not utilised
36
Not utilised
299
Systems
84
Electrical system
3.3.5 DIGITAL INSTRUMENT PANEL
27
16
17
18
26
25
15
23
SWITCH SELEZIONE ACQUA/ARIA
REF.SAME-10S-10N DIGITALE
2200RPM=1760 Hz12V
REF.AST/Rev. DATE........
AST
MADE IN SPAIN
11
10
14
13
29
21
12
20
19
28
22
30
31
24
32
33
34
35
36
CONNECTOR X3
Pin
Volts.
Abbreviation Description
Warning light - "Memorising selected gear"
Input - engine speed signal (from engine control unit - Pin 22)
Digital input - transmission speed sensor
Input - engine temperature sensor
Input - fuel level sensor resistance
Warning light - "High beam"
Warning light - "Preheating"
Spia "Intasamento filtro aria"
Warning light - "Low engine oil pressure"
10
Warning light - "Handbrake - Low fluid level"
11
Warning light - "Low gear" (L)
12
Warning light - "Fuel reserve"
13
Warning light - "Low trailer braking pressure"
14
Warning light - "Battery charging"
15
Warning light - "Hydraulic oil filter clogged - Low oil presure"
16
Warning light - "Front PTO engaged"
17
Warning light - "Rear PTO engaged"
18
Warning light - "Broken belt alarm"
19
Instrument panel lighting
20
Warning light - "Diff lock"
21
Warning light - "4wd engaged"
22
Warning light - "Direction indicators"
23
Warning light - "1st trailer direction indicators"
24
Warning light - "2nd trailer direction indicators"
300
Systems
Electrical system
84
25
Warning light - "Rear PTO Groundspeed"
26
Warning light - "High gear" (H)
27
Warning light - "Medium gear" (M)
28
29
30
Warning light - "Rear PTO ECO"
31
0V
32
+12V
Common earth fore warning lights (pins 1,6,16,18,19,22,23,24)

Power common for warning lights
(Pins 7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,15,17,20,21,25,26,27,28,29,30)
33
Power for "External alarm" warning light
34
Input - "Display" pushbutton
35
Input - "Reset" pushbutton
36
Input - "Select" pushbutton
301
Systems
84
Electrical system
4. SYSTEMS
N
Systems
Platform
Standard cab
High Visib. Cab
Earths
Starting and preheating
Lights - steering column switch unit
Accessories - Diagnostics
Wipers
10
Wipers
11
Front instrument panel
12
Radio
13
Radio
14
Heating
15
Heating
16
Heating and air conditioning
17
Heating and air conditioning
18
Braking system - Trailer braking
19
HML transmission
20
Electronic lift
21
Rear and front PTO
302
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Systems
Electrical system
84
4.1 EARTHING POINTS

GND5
GND4
F0028100
F0028140
GND9
GND5
GND1
GND2
F0028120
GND8
GND3
F0026980
F0028560
D0007220
303
Systems
84
Electrical system
GND6
F0027370
GND7
F0027210
D0007860
304
Systems
Electrical system
84
4.2 STARTING AND PREHEATING

4
2
30 86 85 87
X67
ON
13
87a
87 85 86 30
30 50
30/1
15
X32
RL1
RL2
0.010.5303.4
210
X10
R
30b
Fmax
31
14
+12 VOLT
32
W (ROTAZIONE ALTERNATORE)
PRERISCALDO
X3
X43
X31
5
X38
X1
29 5
12 11 13
X37
GND4
+30
CARICA BATTERIA
12
20A
+50
-VCC
F6
40A
30
F1
OFF
4
15
40A
49
11
10
BATTERY
0.010.5302.4
GND3
X41 X57
1
X65
X58
D+
B+
W
+
7
9
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
Preheating push button

Relay RL2
Relay RL1
Starter switch
Starter motor
Alternator
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
8
Glowplug
Fuel pump
Start enable switch
Instrument panel
D0008840
305
Systems
84
Electrical system
4.3 LIGHTS - STEERING COLUMN SWITCH UNIT (PLATFORM)
X3
49
49a
32 19 22 24 23 18 31
X33
11
-VCC
-31
9
ABBAGLIANTI
IND. DIR. 1 RIMORCHIO
IND. DIREZIONE
+12 VOLT
1 3
49
30 50
49a
30/1
15
X32
+30
+15
0.010.5303.4
ILL. CRUSCOTTO
ON
2 1 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
8
OFF
C2
C3
X40
X26
X22
X21
GND5
X4
5
7
6
GND4
X13
X34
7
X14
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
2
X28
9
8
7
X27
4
3
12
X36
+1
X29
30
5
FS
FD
F12
10A
F11
10A
F10
10A
F9
10A
F8
10A
F4
20A
F3
15A
F2
20A
Fmax
40A
F6
20A
57/58
56b
56a
X38
X37
X1
7
9 10 6
+30
+50
16
BATTERY
X61
X62
X64
1
GND3
15
D0008850
306
14
13
0.010.5302.4
Rear left light

Front left headlamp
Number plate light
Rear right light
Starter switch
Instrument panel
Trailer socket
(For lights and auxiliary power)
Hazard warning control unit
Rear worklight
Horn
Front left lights
Front right lights
Starter motor
Systems
Electrical system
84
4.4 LIGHTS - STEERING COLUMN SWITCH UNIT (STANDARD CAB)
15
10
9
32 19 22 24 23 18 31
X33
49
49a
-31
7 5
C
C2
C3
-VCC
ABBAGLIANTI
+12 VOLT
49
1 3 6 5 7 4
30 50
30/1
X32
49a
0.010.5303.4
+30
0.010.5582.3
+15
2 10
IND. DIREZIONE
ON
OFF
ILL. CRUSCOTTO
8
7
1 4 2 3 5 6
4 1 3
X40
X26
X3
5
5
7
6
9
8
7
X13
GND5
3
1
2
4
5
6
X27
X4
GND4
11
12
1 3 4 2
1 3 4 2
4
3
1
2
3
4
X78
X85
1
2
1 2
2 1
15
16
X121 X124
1 2
X122
2 1
X123
F8
X28
14
GND6
X14
13
10A
6
4
5
3
F7
10A
X87
X39
X29
10A
F12
10A
F11
10A
10A
F10
F9
10A
F8
20A
F6
F3
15A
F2
20A
40A
Fmax
F7
10A
X77
3
1
2
1
2
X111
5
6
1
2
X103-30
50A
BATTERY
22
30
FS
FD
56b
57/58
6 4 3 2 8 7 9 5 1
56a
0.010.5302.4
+30
+50
X36
8 7 9 10 6
M
+
X1
X37
X38
X103
0.009.7852.3
30 86 85 87
0.009.7850.4
0.009.7851.4
17
X62
X64
2 1 3
X61
2 1 3
2 1
GND6
18
21
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Rear left light

Number plate light
Rear right light
Starter switch
Instrument panel
Trailer socket
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
19

Rear left worklight
Roof wiring power relay
Horn
20
21
22
Front left lights

Front right lights
Starter motor
D0008860
307
Systems
84
Electrical system
4.5 LIGHTS - STEERING COLUMN SWITCH UNIT (HIGH-VISIBILITY CAB)
15
30 50
30/1
X32
1 3 6 5 7 4
10
9
7 5 4 1 3
49
49a
-31
32 19 22 24 23 18 31
X33
C
C2
C3
-VCC
ABBAGLIANTI
IND. DIREZIONE
49
I+12 VOLT
+30
0.010.5303.4
49a
0.010.5582.3
+15
2 10
ILL. CRUSCOTTO
ON
OFF
1 4 2 3 5 6
X40
X26
X3
X13
5
7
6
GND5
X4
3
1
2
4
5
6
X27
9
8
7
GND4
11
3
1
2
3
4
1
2
6
4
5
3
13
14
15
16
1 2
2 1
GND7
X14
7 2 3 1 5 6 4 8
12
7 2 3 1 5 6 4 8
1 2
X99
X100
X121
1 2
X124
X122
X123
X28
F8
10A
F7
10A
X29
X91
X39
10A
F12
10A
F11
F10
10A
10A
F9
F8
10A
20A
F6
15A
F2
F3
20A
40A
F7
10A
Fmax
X95
X111
4
3
2
1
X103-30
50A
23
30
FS
FD
56b
57/58
0.010.5302.4
BATTERY
X104
X103
6 4 3 2 8 7 9 5 1
H
+30
+50
X36
8 7 9 10 6
M
+
X1
X37
56a
X38
30 86 85 87
0.011.3761.3
40A
18
X64
X62
2 1 3
1 2
17
X61
2 1 3
2 1
GND6
19
22
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
D0008870
308
Rear left light

Number plate light
Rear right light
Starter switch
Instrument panel
Trailer socket
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
21
20

Rear left worklight
Roof wiring power fuse (40 Amp)
20
21
22
23
Horn
Front left lights
Front right lights
Starter motor
0.011.3606.4
GND7
0.011.3595.3
Systems
Electrical system
84
4.6 ACCESSORIES - DIAGNOSTICS (PLATFORM)
2
3
2 1 0
15
30 50
30/1
X2
10A
X7
F10
X71
F2
20A
+12 VCC
F4
X11
20A
12
GND
40A
ISO 9141
Fmax
F13
15A
F5
10A
X42
X12
X32
PRESA
DIAGNOSTICA
0.010.5303.4
GND5
0.011.6986.4
0.011.6943.4
X38
X36
X37
1
+30
+50
30
FS
8
FD
56b
2
57/58
4
56a
BATTERY
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Starter switch
Cigar lighter
Starter motor
D0008880
309
Systems
84
Electrical system
4.7 ACCESSORIES - DIAGNOSTICS (STANDARD CAB)
0.009.7851.4
2 1
X127
1 2
1 2
15
30 50
30/1
X32
PRESA
DIAGNOSTICA
2 1
GND5
0.011.6986.4
2 1 3
X11
X12
X42
30 86 85 87
8 7 6 5 4
X103
X2
X103-30
1
2
3
2
1
7
X126
2 10
X39
2
2
3
0.011.6943.4
0.010.5303.4
+30
FS
30
FD
56b
57/58
X83
X37
X38
56a
6 4 3 2 8 7 9 5 1
+50
X36
11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
D0008900
310
Starter switch
Cigar lighter
Flashing light
Interior roof light
Clock
Starter motor
GND6
X74
4 3 2 1
15
30
58
BATTERY
12
0.009.7852.3
10
1 2
2 4 3 1
X81
0.009.7850.4
F1
10A
F6
10A
20A
F10
F4
F2
20A
40A
15A
Fmax
F5
F13
X111
X7
50A
X71
10A
1
2
3
12
4
1
F7
GND
+12 VCC
10A
ISO 9141
13
10A
X87
Systems
Electrical system
84
4.8 ACCESSORIES - DIAGNOSTICS (HIGH-VISIBILITY CAB)
1 2
1 2
2 10
15
30 50
30/1
X12
X32
PRESA
DIAGNOSTICA
2 1 3
X11
2 1
7 2 3 1 8
X96
X74
X2
X42
1
2
3
X91
X39
2
2
3
X104
2
1
X36
X38
F1
X103
X101
X37
0.010.5303.4
+30
+50
30
FS
FD
56b
57/58
6 4 3 2 8 7 9 5 1
10A
5A
F2
F6
F
0.011.6943.4
10A
10A
20A
F10
F4
20A
40A
15A
F13
Fmax
F5
X7
56a
87
85
86
30
X111
50A
X71
10A
1
2
3
GND
F7
12
4
+12 VCC 1
ISO 9141
14
10A
X103-30
40A
2
1
7
GND7
GND5
0.011.6986.4
0.011.3606.4
4 2 3 1
0.011.3761.3
GND6
1 2
X126
BATTERY
13
X83
1 3 2 4
15
30
58
11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Starter switch
Cigar lighter
Interior roof light
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
1 2
X127
0.011.3596.3
12
10

Flashing light
Clock
Starter motor
D0008890
311
Systems
84
Electrical system
4.9 WIPERS (STANDARD CAB)
X82
2 1
X80
X75
3
0.010.4516.3
2
1
2 3 6
1
X135
F5
F6
X130
X88
2 3 6
X129
1
2
10
T 31 15 53S 53M
3
7
6
5
8
0.009.7854.3
M
X84
7.5A
5 6 7 8 4 3 2 1
7.5A
11
1
2
5 6 7 8 4 3 2 1
X79
X77
X125
0.009.7850.4
0.009.7851.4
GND6
X87
30 86 85 87
F
30/1
30 50
F7
40A
Fmax
X37
+30
+50
X38
10A
X39
X32
0.010.5303.4
50A
2 10
0.009.7852.3
X111
15
X103
X103-30
BATTERY
1
2
3
4
5
6
D0008910
312

Front windscreen wiper control switch
Intermittent wipe timer for windscreen wiper
Windscreen washer pump control switch
7
8
9
10
11
Starter motor
Starter switch
Front windscreen washer pump
Systems
Electrical system
84
4.10 WIPERS (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB)
1 3 2 6 5
1 3 2 6 5
GND6
X97
X101
2
1
4
I
T 31 15 53S 53M
X98
X82
2 3
X80
X125
0.011.3597.3
7.5A
2 3 1 4
0.011.3743.3
F6
X129
7.5A
11
X75
3
2
1
F5
1
2
X92
2 3 1 4
12
0.011.3606.4
0.011.3596.3
X130
X135
1
X103-30
X91
X104
X103
30 86 85 87
1 2
GND7
10
9
F
30/1
30 50
X39
X37
+30
+50
X38
F7
40A
Fmax
X32
0.010.5303.4
10A
15
50A
2 10
40A
0.009.7852.3
X111
BATTERY
1
2
3
4
5
6

7
8
9
10
11
12

Starter motor
Starter switch
Front windscreen washer pump
D0008920
313
Systems
84
Electrical system
4.11 FRONT INSTRUMENT PANEL
OLIO IDRAULICO
36 35 34
32 31
15 12
LIVELLA CARBURANTE
-VCC
5 33
15
30 50
30/1
X32
X3
X1
2
3
1
40A
20A
Fmax
GND4
0.010.5302.4
40A
Fmax
20A
F6
F6
X32
X3
+12 VOLT
30 50
30/1
2 1 0
0.010.5303.4
TEMP. MOTORE
15
RISERVA CARBURANTE
INT. FILTRO ARIA
GND4
0.010.5302.4
BASSA PRESS. OLIO MOTORE
-VCC
LIVELLA CARBURANTE
5 33
-VCC
15 12
+12 VOLT
+12 VOLT
0.010.5303.4
RISERVA CARBURANTE
32 31
2 1 0
+12 VOLT
+12 VOLT
DISPALY
AZZERAMENTO
36 35 34
OLIO IDRAULICO
TEMP. MOTORE
INT. FILTRO ARIA
X45
BASSA PRESS. OLIO MOTORE
-VCC
X52
SELEZIONE
2
+12 VOLT
SENS. VEL. TRASMISSIONE
X1
2
3
1
X18
X18
GND5
Fn
X60
X55
X37
X20
X54
X19
X23
X38
2
GND3
GND5
X37
1
+30
X38
+50
X23
+30
X19
+50
GND3
X20
X44
X54 X50
X60
X55
13
12
11
10
13
12
11
BATTERY
BATTERY
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
D0009010
314
Selection pushbutton (only digital panel)

Reset button (only digital panel)
Instrument panel
Starter switch
Starter motor
Fuel level sensor
Hydraulic oil filter clogging pressure switch
8
9
10
11
12
13

Display pushbutton (only digital panel)
Transmission speed sensor (only digital panel)
D0009110
4.12 RADIO (VERSION WITH STANDARD CAB)
Systems
Electrical system
84
4.13 RADIO (VERSION WITH HIGH-VISIBILITY CAB)
2 4 1 3
0.011.3596.3
5A
0.009.7850.4
X86
F2
X132
X131
2 1
X86 X101
3
X132
2
1
4
X87
X133
2 1
F2
5A
0.011.0729.4
X131
1 2
2
1
X133
0.011.3606.4
GND6
2 4 1 3
X91
2 1
GND6
F
50A
X37
+50
+30
+50
X37
X111
M
+
BATTERY
1
2
3
4
D0007500
+30
50A
X111
0.009.7852.3
0.009.7852.3
BATTERY
Radio
Starter motor
RH speaker
LH speake
1
2
3
4
Radio
Starter motor
RH speaker
LH speake
D0007510
315
Systems
84
Electrical system
4.14 HEATER (STANDARD CAB)
X142
12
1 2 3
1 2
010.2123.2
X137
X138
87
85
X139
86
30
11
3
10
6
3
8
9
4
5
7
2
1
3
0
2
3
X140
10
X141
2 1
1 2
X106
F4
X89
X103-30
2 1
X108
20A
X107
X103
30
86
2
85
X87
87
X111
GND6
2 10
X109
B+
X39
1 2
B-
B+
15
DF D+
30/1
30 50
X32
0.010.5303.4
B-
50A
0.009.7852.3
3 1 2 4
40A
F7
10A
Fmax
G
-
9
X37
+30
+50
X38
BATTERY
316
2
3
4
5
1
X136
D0008930
0.009.7850.4
11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

Resistor for heater fan
Heater fan
Starter switch
Starter motor
Heating alternator
Systems
Electrical system
84
4.15 HEATER (HIGH-VISIBILITY ROOF

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
010.2558.1
X153
X150
X152
2
1
2
1
X149
II
III
IV
C
2
1
X148
2
3
4
2
3
4
X154
I
X151
2
1
X146
87b
2
3
4
5
87
86
85
30
X145
1
2
3
4
5
X147
X137
1
2
87b
8
9
30
85
86
87
12
6
10
3
4
5
1
2
7
11
87b
X157
1 2
2 1
X93
X106
F
40A
X113
X103-30
2 1
11
X136
12
3 1 2 4
X103
30
86
85
87
X108
2
X91
13
GND6
X111
2 10
B+
B-
X109
1 2
B- +
B+
14
50A
0.011.3761.3
10
X39
2
15
DF D+
X32
F7
10A
Fmax
40A
16
X37
30 50
+30
+50
X38
30/1
0.010.5303.4
0.011.3606.4
30
85
86
87
Control relay for 3rd heater fan speed

Relay - alternator excitatione
Resistor for right heater fan
Right heater fan
Left heater fan
Resistor for left heater fan
Control relay for maximum fan speed
Starter switch
Starter motor
Heating alternator
15
BATTERY
D0008940
317
Systems
84
Electrical system
4.16 HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (STANDARD CAB)
1 2 3
1 2
X138
0.010.2130.1
30 85 86 87
X137
X143
X144
X142
1
2
87
85
X139
86
30
11
4
5
10
6
12
3
0
2
1
X140
10
X141
1
1 2
X106
F3
30A
X107
X108
2
X141
X89
F4
20A
0.009.7850.4
X136
X103-30
X87
12
30
86
2
85
87
11
30 86 85 87
X115
4
2
3
1
B+
X109
1
B+
X76
1
DF D+
Fmax
40A
F7
10A
18
X1
X38
X32
X37
318
30 50
16
X59
17
D0008950
30/1
+30
15
+50
0.009.7624.4
15
2 10
BATTERY
15
0.010.5303.4
B-
X39
3 2
X119
X118 X120
0.009.7853.3
GND6
X111
F
50A
0.010.5303.4
B-
14
13
X103
M
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Heater control unit

Control relay for alternator excitation
Heater control potentiometer
Heater air temperature sensor
Control relay for air conditioning
Demister thermostat
Resistor for heater fan
Heater fan
Heater resistance
Control relay for air conditioning fan
Air conditioning fan
Starter switch
Starter motor
Heating alternator
Systems
Electrical system
84
4.17 HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HIGH-VISIBILITY ROOF)

1 2
X153
X152 X158
2
1
X150
X159
2
1
X151
2
1
2
1
X149
1
2
3
4
X154
III
IV
C
X146
87b
2
3
4
5
87
86
85
30
30
85
86
87
30
85
86
87
X156
X145
1
2
3
4
5
12
1
2
13
X147
X137
87b
30
85
86
87
8
9
12
6
10
3
4
5
1
2
7
11
87b
X157
15
X136
40A
X93
7.5A
F3
X108
F4
X94
X106
X113
2 1
3 2 1
1 2
304
3 1 2 4
X103-30
2 1
30
86
85
87
1
3
F
50A
0.011.3761.3
B+
X109
X102
X39
1 2
B+
18
20
19
21
16
2 1
X117a
30 86 85 87 87a
X115
30 86 85 87 87a
X114
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2
X116
X117b
GND6
X111
B-+
17
X103
X91 2
B-
14
0.011.3606.4
11
1
2
4
5
7
8
6
3
0.011.3610.3
II
10
Control relay for 3rd heater fan speed

Control relay for alternator excitation12
Control relay for 1st fan speed and air conditioning on
Right heater fan
Left heater fan
Heater control unit
Heater resistance
Air conditioning fan
Control relay for air conditioning fan
Control relay for supplementary air conditioning fan
Supplementary air conditioning fan
Starter switch
Starter motor
Heating alternator
X148
1
2
3
4
0.010.2562.1
1 2
1 2
DF D+
0.010.5303.4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
40A
F7
10A
Fmax
25
X38
X32
X37
15
30/1
30 50
+30
+50
0.010.5302.4
X1
15
X59
210
BATTERY
23
22
24
D0008960
319
Systems
84
Electrical system
4.18 BRAKING SYSTEM - TRAILER BRAKING

4
X14
X29
15
30/1
30 50
X26
-VCC
+12 VOLT
2 10
FRENO A MANO
13 10 32 31
0.010.5303.4
PRESS. RIMORCHIO
X3
X32
40A
Fmax
X5
F6
20A
F7
10A
GND4
10
X25
1
P
X24
1
2
X38
X37
+30
+50
20
GND5
X1
M
+
0.010.5302.4
BATTERY
X66
1
GND3
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
D0008970
320
Rear left light

Rear right light
Trailer socket
Starter switch
Instrument panel
7
8
9
10
Starter motor
Handbrake switch
Brake pedal switch
Systems
Electrical system
84
4.19 HML TRANSMISSION
2 1
GND
CONFIG
EV HI 11
SPIA M
EV LO
COM EV
LEVA LO
LEVA COM.
LEVA HI
X16
X15
49
30
15
30b
2 10
49
X9
X72
+12 Vcc 12
X73
ON
15
30/1
30 50
X8
0.010.5303.4
X32
X6
Fmax
40A
ON
OFF
F6
20A
GND5
1
30b
30
15
OFF
7
10
5
X38
X3
X37
HML control unit

Solenoid valve for High range control (HI)
Solenoid valve for Low range control (LO)
DF control switch
Differential lock control solenoid valve (DF)
7
8
9
10
11
10
BATTERY
11
1
2
3
4
5
6
+30
GND4
+50
-VCC
+12 VOLT
BLOCC. DIFF.
DOPPIA TRAZIONE
MARCIA VELOCE (H)
MARCIA LENTA (L)
0.010.7972.3
MARCIA MEDIA (M)
11 27 26 20 21 32 31
4WD control solenoid valve (DT)

4WD control switch
Starter switch
Starter motor
Instrument panel
D0008980
321
Systems
84
Electrical system
4.20 ELECTRONIC LIFT

14
ISO 9141
+10 VCC
MAX ALZATA
MIX
POSIZIONE
VEL. DISCESA
SFORZO
EV DW
EV UP
GND
+12 VCC
POSIZIONE
13
9 10 11 8
15
30 50
30/1
X71
0.010.5303.4
12 5
UP
2 10
X32
12
11
40A
F5
DW
Fmax
10A
3
1
4
3
4.7 Khom
4.7 Khom
4.7 Khom
4.7 Khom
X7
I
4
3
3
1 Khom
P1
X42
3
1 Khom
H1
X38
1
GND5
1
3
1 Khom
15
16
3
1 Khom
M1
S1
F
U
1
3
P2
1
1
EV DW
EV UP
0.011.6943.4
Lift UP solenoid valve
Lift draft sensor
Draft/wheelslip control potentiometer
Lift lowering speed potentiometer
Maximum lift height potentiometer
D0008990
322
BATTERY
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
X37
2
+30
10
+50
2
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

Rear lift down control pushbutton
Rear lift Up control pushbutton
Starter switch
Starter motor
Systems
Electrical system
84
4.21 REAR AND FRONT PTO
GND5
15
14
30 50
30/1
0.010.5303.4
49
X32
X10
40A
F6
20A
X1
Fmax
X17
30
15
ON
2 10
+12 VOLT
PTO POST.
PTO 540 rpm
PTO 1000 rpm
31 16 25 30 29 28 17 32
X3
X35
X63
PTO ECO
PTO ANT.
-VCC
30b
30b
49
ON
5
OFF
0.010.5302.4
GND4
1
30
15
PTO POST. SYNCRO
2
OFF
GND3
S
2
X38
X37
1
+30
+50
11
10
BATTERY
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

Instrument panel
Starter switch
Starter motor
540 PTO engagement sensor
D0009000
323
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
Systems
Electrical system
84
ENGINE WIRING (1/2)

X61
X58
X60
X59
X57
X37
X62
X55
X54
X1
TO 0.010.5303.4
3
8
14
X63
20
15
21
26
25
29
X64
X66
X41
X65
X1
X37
X41
X54
X55
X57
D0008300
To central wiring
Starter motor
Fuel pomp
Cooling engine sensor
Glowplug
X58
X59
X60
X61
X62
X63

Horn
Front left lights
X64
X65
X66
GND3
Front right lights

Alternator
0.010.5302.4
325
Systems
84
Electrical system
ENGINE WIRING (2/2)

X55
X37
BN 1
RN 1.5
M1
RN 1.5
N 16
R1
X58
X59
N1
VN 1.5
X57
X54
X60
B1
N1
N1
X61
Z1
R1
TEMPERATURE
ENGINE OIL PRESS.
P. OLIO MOT.
AIR FILTER
FILTRO ARIA
RPM INDICATOR
W CONTAGIRI
GENERATOR
GENERATORE
M1
N1
TEMPERAT.
B1
BR 1
HN 1
V1
L1
X62
Z1
AVV. ACUSTICO
DIPPED HEAD LIGHTS
ANABBAGL.
H1
N1
HORN
ANABBAGL.
FULL BEAM HEAD LIGHTS
ABBAGLIANTI
FULL BEAM HEAD LIGHTS
ABBAGLIANTI
10
PLUG
CANDELATTA
11
PLUG
CANDELATTA
12
ELECKTROVALVE
ELETTROVALVOLA
13
FRONT PTO
PTO ANT.
14
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESS.
15
DIPPED HEAD LIGHTS
HN 1
H1
V1
V1
X64
V1
RN 1.5
RN 1.5
BN 1
N1
N1
MN 1
N1
VN 1.5
N1
BRAKES OIL
OLIO FRENI
20
+12 VOLT
+12 VOLT
29
GND3
N1
ZN 1
N1
N1
MB 1
MN 1
N1
BR 1
L1
N 16
N1
ZN 1
MB 1
14
20
25
26
21
15
29
AMP
X41
X1
X66
X63
X65
D0008310
326
0.010.5302.4
Systems
Electrical system
84
POSITION OF ENGINE WIRING CONNECTORS
1
X66
X1
X54
F0028460
X55
F0028480
3
X58
F0028450
327
Systems
84
Electrical system
4
X60
F0028420
X62
X64
F0028430
X61
X63
F0028440
328
Systems
Electrical system
84
7
GND3
X67: conector
for engine cooling
fan speed with air
conditioning
system
F0026980
8
X41
F0028490
9
X59
F0028520
329
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
Systems
Electrical system
84
ENGINE WIRING
10
1
2
3
X65
4
5
F0028410
11
X37
10
11
F0028390
0.010.5302.4
331
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
Systems
Electrical system
84
CENTRAL WIRING (1/2)
D0008360
GND5
TO 0.011.6943.4
X3
X40
X8
X9
X10
X11
X7
X2
TO 0.010.5302.4
X43
4 3
X1
X52
X12
X45
X13
X42
X5
X14
X15
3
X67
X16
X4
TO 0.011.7972.4
X6
X17
GND4
TO 0.009.7852.3
0.011.3761.3
X21
X20
X21
X22
S
S
X44
10 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
20 A
10 A
10 A
STOP
ELECT.2
20 A
X50
X24
X36
15 A
RL1
X32
15 A
SERVIZI
X39
X19
X18
20 A
X5
X6
X7
X8
X9
X10
X11
X12
X13
X14
X15
X16
X17
X18
X19
X20
X21
X22
X23
X24
X25
X26
X27
X28
X29
X31
X32
X33
X34
X35
X36
X37
X38
X39
X40
X41
X42
X43
X44
X45
X50
X52
X67

750 PTO (ECO) engagement sensor
To engine wiring
Cigar lighter
Connector (Platform version)
To front light wiring (Version with cab)
Brake pedal switch
To HML wiring
To electronic lift wiring
Four-wheel drive control switch
PTO control switch
Rear right light
Four-wheel drive control solenoid valve
Differential lock control solenoid valve (DF)
Connector
Pressure switch for hydraulic oil filter clogging
Connector
Rear worklight (platform version)
Fuel level sensor
Handbrake switch
Trailer socket
Front left headlamp
Number plate light
Rear left light
Start enable switch
Starter switch
Rear worklights switch (Not utilised)
Starter motor (+12V)
Starter motor (Start)
To cab wiring
Hazard warning lights control unit
Alarms control unit
Display pushbutto
40 A
1
5
E
S
X1
X2
X3
X4
X23
5
RL2
FM1
X38
X37
X25
X31
X26
X35
X34
X33
X29
X28
X27
0.010.5303.4
333
84
Electrical system
AN1
AN1
AMP
CENTRAL WIRING (2/2)
AMP
AN1
X19
AMP
Systems
N1
1
6
AN1
X20
AMP
6
5
CB1
X44
N1
Z0.5
AR0.5
X45
MG 0.5
X52
MN 0.8
N1
N1
X18
26
20
13
14
14
15
17
M1
B1
S1
MB1
C1
R1
GV1
BR1
N1
18
MN1
BN1
MN0.8
VN1.5
MG0.5
CB1
RN0,5
AR0,5
Z0,5
HG1
ZB1
ZV1
X10
X9
6
3
RV1
MB1
1
6
3
X3
36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28
RN1,5
AR1
MB1
AR1
MB1
ZB1
N1
MB1
*ZN1
ZV1
8
7
6
3
5
4
X8
AR1
N1
HR1
7
13
MV1
HR1
N1
19
GN1
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
HR1
6
18 12
24
HV1
ZN1
HN1
CN1
L1
AN1
MN1
GR1
V1
HR1
23
29
12
17 11
27
28
RN 1.5
GR1
10
MB1
16
22
X6
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
VM1
GR1
N1
26
MB1
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
N1
15
21
MB1
RN 1.5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
R1
M1
B1
BR1
L1
Z1
H1
H1
V1
V1
RN1,5
MB
3 4
R1
X1
X40
MB
M4
MB
S1
BM1
N1
B1
N1
AG1
5 6
B1.5
BN1
RN0.5
SG1.5
X43
MB1
MB1
X36
H1.5
G1.5
R1.5
AN1.5
A1.5
7
6
B1.5
Z1
R1.5
X37
5 4
X35
NM1
6
5
GV1.5
N1
7
M1
M1
1
2
6
3
N1
VM1
VB1
MN1
MN1
RV1
MB1
X11
X12
MN1
N1
AN1.5
A1.5
V1.5
X2
X39
N1
A 1.5
N1.5
N1.5
N1.5
N1.5
N1.5
N1.5
N1.5
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
CN1
X22
N1
GN1
N1
RN1
G1
AN1
N1
1
2
X28
3
4
5
X29
6
7
8
X27
N1
RN1
X5
X25
GND5
N1
A1
X31
GN 1
1
6
X26
4
7
GN1
7
8
G1
X4
X32
4
5
M1
1
X50
X4
N1
A 1.5
X13
AN1
MV1
N1
30
L4
RL 2
AN 1.5
M4
50
17
VN1.5
LB1
19
RN1.5
M1
30
M4
L4
86
M1
LB1.5
MV1
N1
H2,5
X38
85
86
AR4
15
87
GV0.8
87
GN1
AN1.5
N1
H2,5
N1.5
2
1
X14
MV1
F13
15A
G1
AR1.5
H1
G1
H1.5
G1.5
AR4
VN1.5
F12
10A
H1
H1
F11
10A
GN1.5
G1.5
10A
F10
MN 1.5
L4
L4
F9
10A
F8
10A
F7
BN1.5
BM1.5
LB1.5
G1.5
10A
BM1.5
F6
20A
M0.5
M1.5
F5
10A
F4
20A
GV1.5
GV1.5
VB1.5
F3
15A
R1.5
20A
R4
M4
40A
F2
GN1.5
GN 1.5
40A
F1
F1
R1.5
GN 1
X21
VN1.5
R6
M1
A1.5
AN1.5
G1
A1.5
N1
2 1
N1
HG 1
B1.5
M1
MB1
X34
B1.5
MB1.5
VB1.5
SG1.5
GND4
MB1
GV1.5
MB1
B1.5
MB1
MB1
FM1
N1
X24
RN1
GN1
A1
N1
A1.5
A1.5
MB1
M4
X33
A1
X15
X16
A1
N1
30
X17
MV 1
BN1.5
AN1
MB1
85
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
87
N1
HV1
M4
RL1
GV1.5
G1
X23
MB1
AG1
GV1.5
MB1.5
VN1
MB1
1
VB1
C1
HN1
N1
X67
MB1
MB1
R1
MB1
G1
AN 1.5
GN 1
N1
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Yellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
HG 0.5
N1
AMP
X42
Arancio/Orange
M 0.5
1
Marrone/Brown
M 1.5
TABELLA COLORI / COLOURS TABLE
HG 0.5
D0008330
334
AMP
X7
N1
0.010.5303.4
Systems
Electrical system
84
FRONT LIGHT WIRING (VERSION WITH CAB)
X4
TO 0.010.5303.4
X13
X4
X13
X27
D0009120
X27
To central wiring
0.010.5582.3
335
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
Systems
Electrical system
84
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
1
X1
GND4
X43
X67
F0028510
2
X45
X2
X67
X32
F0028750
X40
F0027610
337
Systems
84
Electrical system
X52
X33
F0028730
X5
F0027680
X42
X36
RL2
X44
RL1
FM1
F0028740
338
Systems
Electrical system
84
7
X31
F0027670
8
X38
X37
F0027820
339
Systems
84
Electrical system
X39
F0027550
10
X17
X16
X18
X15
F0027790
11
X20
F0027750
340
Systems
Electrical system
84
12
X19
F0027810
13
X50
F0027930
14
X24
F0027710
341
Systems
84
Electrical system
15
X23
F0027780
16
5
1
E
F0027760
17
X25
F0027770
342
18
Systems
Electrical system
84
X26
F0027740
19
X14-X29
F0027720
20
X28
F0027730
343
Systems
84
Electrical system
21
X11
X12
F0027700
22
GND5
X7
F0027800
23
X8
X10
X9
F0027690
344
Systems
Electrical system
84
24
X4
F0027580
25
X3
F0027620
26
X13-X27
F0027590
345
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CENTRAL WIRING
CAB
1
27
25
24
23
Systems
Electrical system
84
22
20
21
19
19
X21
26
18
2
17
3
4
F0028540
5
6
7
10
11
12
13
PLATAFORM
14
16
26
X22
26
19
19
27
0.010.5303.4
0.010.5582.3
347
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
Systems
Electrical system
84
POWERSHIFT WIRING (1/2)
X6
TO 0.010.5303.4
X72
H
L
M
X6
X72
D0008340
Solenoid valve for High range (HI) control

Solenoid valve for Low range (LO) control
To HML lever wiring
To central wiring
HML control unit
0.011.7972.4
349
Systems
84
Electrical system
POWERSHIFT WIRING (2/2)

M
X6
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Yellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
ZB 1
M1
N1
ZN 1
ZB 1
ZN 1
ZV 1
MB 1

M
M1
B1
H1
Z1
H1
N1
ZV 1
N1
M 1.5
Z1
B1
X72
ZN 1
10
H1
12
11
ZB 1
D0008350
350
MB 1
0.011.7972.4
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
Systems
Electrical system
84
POWERSHIFT WIRING
1
M
3
H
F0027830
2
X72
F0028530
3
1
X6
F0028550
0.011.7972.4
351
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
Systems
Electrical system
84
ELECTRONIC LIFT WIRING (1/2)
P1
H1
M1
UP
3
2
S1
DW
UP
X7
TO 0.011.6955.4
0.011.6958.4
DW
3
1
X71
UP
C
DW Rear lift Down control pushbutton
EV DWLift DOWN solenoid valve
EV UPLift UP solenoid valve
H1
Maximum height adjustment potentiometer
D0006640
I
M1
P1
P2
S1
UP
DW

Draft/wheelslip control adjustment potentiometer
Lift draft sensor
Rear lift Up control pushbutton
EV UP
V
X7
X71
EV DW
P2
Lift lowering speed potentiometer

To central wiring
0.011.6943.4/10
353
Systems
84
Electrical system
ELECTRONIC LIFT WIRING (2/2)
H1
M1
P1
+12 VCC
ISO 9141
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Yellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
UP
MB1
H05
MB1
V05
MB1
V05
H05
HR1
MB1
HR1
2
MB1
N1
M1
VO5
2
M05
N05
1
BN 1
MB1
M05
S05
1
S05
HR1
11
L05
N05
H05
M05
N05
L05
M05
L05
N05
12
V05
10
S05
POSIZIONE
MIX
VEL.DISCESA
H05
BN1
B1
MAX ALZATA
POSIZIONE
+10VCC
SFORZO
EV DW
AN1
AB1
M1
N1
GND
EV UP
X71
DW
AN1
N1
1
1
M1
N1
B1
M1
N1
BN1
N1
AB1
X7
S1
P2
EV UP
EV DW
D0006650
354
0.011.6943.4/10
Systems
Electrical system
84
POSITION OF ELECTRONIC LIFT CONNECTORS
P1
H1
M1
I
F0027440
2
C
X71
F0027420
3
X71
X7
F0027430
355
Systems
84
Electrical system
4
UP
DW
F0027410
5
P2
F0027400
EV DW
EV UP
F0027380
356
Systems
Electrical system
84
ELECTRONIC LIFT WIRING
7
3
S1
2
5
F0027390
0.011.6943.4/10
357
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFY BLANK
Systems
Electrical system
84
ROOF WIRING (STANDARD CAB) (1/2)
X 79
4
3
2
3
X 76
4
8
X 80
X 81
2
2
X 75
TO 0.009.7854.3
TO 0.009.7853.3
X 77
TO 0.009.7851.4
5
8
X 78
X 82
X 74
30
H
85
86
87
X 103
1 2 3 4
D0006890
X 83
X 84
X 86
X 85
TO 010.2153.2
X 90
X 87
3
2
5
4
TO 0.010.1359.3
X 88
X 89
TO 0.010.4516.3
GND4
TO 010.2147.2
010.2153.2
Interior roof light

To screenwash pumps wiring
To air conditioning fans wiring
To worklights wiring
Rear screen wiper control switch
Clock
Radio
To heater power supply wiring
To windscreen wiper wiring
To heater or air conditioning wiring
To air conditioning wiring
Relay for roof wiring power
X74
X75
X76
X77
X78
X79
X80
X81
X82
X83
X84
X85
X86
X87
X88
X89
X90
X103
0.009.7850.4/50
359
Systems
84
Electrical system
ROOF WIRING (STANDARD CAB) (2/2)

X85
X78
X81
X84
X79
A-N 1
A-N 1
X80
X83
4 43 32 21
3 4
7 8
1 2
5 6
3 4
7 8
H-N 1
A1
H-N 1
C1
A1
N1
R1
A1
AR1
AR1
AN1
A-N 1
G-R 1
V1
V-N 1
R-N 1
M 1.5
N1
M 1.5
R1.5
N1
G-N 1.5
G-N 1.5
G-V 1.5
G1
N1
G1
M-G 1.5
V1
1 2
5 6
H-N 1
M 1.5
X77
N 1.5
N 2.5
G-N 1.5
G 1.5
RN1
GR1
53N
AR1
V1
N 2.5
AN1
V1
N1
V1
N 1.5
N1
X75
X82
15 31
X76
A-N 2.5
T 53S
A-R 1
R4
N4
1
4 3
N1
V1
V-N 1.5
V1
C1
X90
X89
G-R 1
N1
1
4
X88
AN 1
V-N 1
2
3
L-B 1
R 2.5
X87
V-N 1.5
30
X86
GND6
X103
85
LB 1
M-G 1.5
A1
G-V 1.5
A-N 1
A1
R4
A-N-2.5
R1
R1.5
R1
N1
R1
R1
1
N1
R1
N1
N4
N1
N 2.5
N 2.5
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
A-N 1

M
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Yellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
86
87
X74
M 2.5
R 2.5
D0006900
360
10 A
10 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
30 A
20 A
5 A RADIO
10 A
M 2.5
0.009.7850.4/50
Systems
Electrical system
84
POSITION OF ROOF WIRING CONNECTORS (STANDARD CAB)
1
X86
F0027290
X88
F0027300
3
X74
F0027310
361
Systems
84
Electrical system
4
X77
X75
X87
F0027320
X83
X103
F0027330
6
X76
F0027340
362
Systems
Electrical system
84
7
X89
X90
F0027350
X82
F0028180
GND
F0027370
363
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFY BLANK
Systems
Electrical system
84
ROOF WIRING (STANDARD CAB)
10
X84
X79
X81
1
10
9
8
X78
X85
X80
F0028170
3
4
0.009.7850.4/50
365
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFY BLANK
Systems
Electrical system
84
WORKLIGHTS WIRING (STANDARD CAB) (1/2)

X124
X121
TO 0.009.7850.4
X77
X126
X122
X127
X123
X125
X77
X121
X122
X123
D0006770
To roof wiring
Rear left worklight
X124
X125
X126
X127

Connector
Rotating beacon
0.009.7851.4/40
367
Systems
84
Electrical system
WORKLIGHTS WIRING (STANDARD CAB) (2/2)
GN 1.5
X122
N 1.5
GN 1.5
1
N 1.5
GN 1.5
X123
G 1.5
6
N 1.5
N 1.5
HN 1
3
N 1.5
G 1.5
M 1.5
N 1.5
X124
N 1.5
X77
G 1.5
X121
N 1.5
M 1.5
M 1.5
X127
N 1.5
N 1.5
N 1.5
X125
2
HN 1
X126
D0006780
368
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Yellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
0.009.7851.4/40
Systems
Electrical system
84
POSITION OF WORKLIGHTS CONNECTORS (STANDARD CAB)
X121-X122
X123-X124
F0027200
X77
F0027270
3
X126
F0027180
369
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFY BLANK
Systems
Electrical system
84
WORKLIGHTS WIRING (STANDARD CAB)
5
X127
4
3
F0027170
X125
F0027280
0.009.7851.4/40
371
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFY BLANK
Systems
Electrical system
84
SCREENWASH PUMPS WIRING (STANDARD CAB)
X135
X129
TO 0.009.7850.4
X75
3

M
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Yellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
2
1
X75
C 1.5
X135
1
AR 1.5
2
N 1.5
N1
1
2
X129
X75 To roof wiring

X129 Front windscreen washer pump
X135 Rear screen washer pump
D0006750
0.009.7854.3/10
373
Systems
84
Electrical system
WINDSCREEN WIPER WIRING (STANDARD CAB)
G-R 1
M-N 1
R-N 1
G-R 1
(+AZZ)
(+MOT)
(AZZ.)
V-N 1
(+MOT)
(AZZ.)
R-N 1
TO 0.009.7850.4
X130
V-N 1
G-R 1
(+AZZ)
X88
M-N 1
(GND)
V-N 1
M-N 1
(GND)
R-N 1

M
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Yellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
X88 To roof wiring

X130 Windscreen wiper motor
D0006740
374
0.010.4516.3/1
Systems
Electrical system
84
SPEAKER WIRING (STANDARD CAB)
R
X131
X132
X133
X131 Radio
X132 Left speaker
X133 Right speaker
D0006760
0.011.0729.4/10
375
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFY BLANK
Systems
Electrical system
84
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
X130
F0027120
2
X88
F0027240
X131
F0027250
377
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFY BLANK
Systems
Electrical system
84
WIRING FOR SCREENWASH PUMP - WINDSCREEN WIPER - SPEAKERS (STANDARD CAB)
X132-X133
F0027260
3
X135
X129
2
6
X129
F0027130
X75
F0028060
0.009.7854.3/10
0.010.4516.3/1
0.011.0729.4/10
379
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFY BLANK
Systems
Electrical system
84
HEATER POWER SUPPLY WIRING (STANDARD CAB) (1/2)
X108
TO 010.2123.2
010.2130.1
X109
2
X108
SOLO PER 65A
X107
B+
X106
BX106
TO 0.009.7850.4
X87
X111
X37
X111
50A
TO 0.009.7850.4
(X103)
R6
1
2
X39
X103-30
B+
Heater alternator (+)
B
Heater alternator ()
X37 Starter motor
X39 To central wiring
X87 To roof wiring
X103-30 To roof wiring (X103)
X106 Heater resistance
X107 To heater or air conditioning power wiring
X108 Connector
X109 Heater alternator
X111 Connector
D0006800
0.009.7852.3/40
381
Systems
84
Electrical system
POSITION OF HEATER POWER CONNECTORS (STANDARD CAB)
X108
AMP
B1
B1
G-R 1
G-R 1
N-L 1
G-R 1
X107
X108
L1
B1
X109
L1
N 16
X106
N 16
B+

N-L 1
N 16
X106
N 16
B-
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Yellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
R 2.5
3
2 1
V-N 1.5
X87
LB1
L-B 1
X39
V-N 1.5
X111
X103-30
D0006790
382
R6
X111
X37
R 2.5
0.009.7852.3/40
Systems
Electrical system
84
POSITION OF HEATING CONNECTORS (STANDARD CAB)
1
X106
F0028150
2
X106
F0027050
3
X107
X103-30
F0028160
383
Systems
84
Electrical system
4
X87
F0027070
5
X111
X37
X39
F0026880
X108
X109
F0028720
384
Systems
Electrical system
84
HEATER POWER SUPPLY WIRING (STANDARD CAB)
B+
B-
X108
F0026890
0.009.7852.3/40
385
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
PAGINA INTENZIONALMENTE
LASCIATA BIANCA
Systems
Electrical system
84
HEATER WIRING (STANDARD CAB) (1/2)

X141
X140
X136
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
85
2
X107
30
86
TO 0.009.7852.3
87
X142
TO 0.009.7850.4
2
1
X138
1 2 3
X89
X137
X139
X89
X107
X136
X137
X138
D0007780
To roof wiring
To heater power wiring
Heater control unit
X139
X140
X141
X142

Heater fan resistor
Heater fan
Relay for alternator excitation
0.010.2123.2
387
Systems
84
Electrical system
HEATER WIRING (STANDARD CAB) (2/2)
X136
12
10
11
L1
X137
N 0.5
GR 1
N 0.5
NL 1
B1
N4
C4
1
2
3
X107
X89
2
H 0.5
C 0.5
X138
V 0.5
N4
X141
R4
B1
Z 0.5
C 0.5
R1
87
86
X142
85
30
M 2.5
C4
R4
B 0.5
R 2.5
LR 1.5
3
2
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Yellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
X140
0
D0007770
388
X139
0.010.2123.2
Systems
Electrical system
84
POSITION OF HEATING CONNECTORS (STANDARD CAB)
1
X107
X89
F0028260
X141
X140
F0028230
X138
X137
X139
F0028240
533
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
LASCIATA BIANCA
Systems
Electrical system
84
HEATER WIRING (STANDARD CAB)
2
X136
X142
F0028250
0.010.2123.2
391
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
LASCIATA BIANCA
Systems
Electrical system
84
AIR CONDITIONING WIRING (STANDARD CAB) (1/2)

X90
TO 0.009.7850.4
X141
X136
X140
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
2
85
X107
86
30
TO 0.009.7852.3
87
X143
TO 0.009.7850.4
X89
2
1
X138
1 2 3
30 85 86 87
X137
X142
X144
X139
X89
X90
X107
X136
X137
X138
D0007750
To roof wiring
To roof wiring
To heater power wiring
Heater control unit
X139
X140
X141
X142
X143
X144

Heater fan resistor
Heater fan
Relay for alternator excitation
Air conditioner control relay
Demister thermostat
0.010.2130.1
393
Systems
84
Electrical system
AIR CONDITIONING WIRING (STANDARD CAB) (2/2)
X136
12
10
11
L1
X137
N 0.5
GR 1
N 0.5
NL 1
B1
2
3
X107
N4
X89
C4
H 0.5
X138
C 0.5
BV 0.5
V 0.5
NZ 0.5
CR 1
B 0.5
1
2
3
X90
B 0.5
X144
B 0.5
N4
X141
R4
B1
Z 0.5
C 0.5
R1
CR 1
NZ 0.5
M 2.5
BV 0.5
C1
86
X142
85
30
87
86
X143
85
30
C4
R4
B 0.5
R 2.5
LR 1.5
87
3
2
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Yellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
X140
0
D0007760
394
X139
0.010.2130.1
Systems
Electrical system
84
AIR CONDITIONING WIRING (STANDARD CAB)
1
X107
X89
X90
F0028270
X141
X140
F0028230
3
X137
X138
X144
X139
F0028290
395
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
LASCIATA BIANCA
Systems
Electrical system
84
AIR CONDITIONING WIRING (STANDARD CAB)
2
X136
X142
1
X143
F0028280
0.010.2130.1
397
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
LASCIATA BIANCA
Systems
Electrical system
84
AIR CONDITIONING FAN WIRING (STANDARD CAB) (1/2)
X120
X118
X115
X119
TO 0.009.7850.4
85
86
87
87
WHITE
BIANCO
X76
30
ITALAMEC 037
X76
X115
X118
X119
X120
D0006620
To roof wiring
0.009.7853.3/21
399
Systems
84
Electrical system
AIR CONDITIONING FAN WIRING (STANDARD CAB) (2/2)
X120
X118
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Yellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
BIANCO
Marrone/Brown
X115
WHITE
X119

M
AN 1
AN 2.5
87
86
VN 1
N1
87
CB 1
V1
CB 1
N 2.5
85
A 2.5
30
A 2.5
V1
N 2.5
N1
X76
AN 2.5
VN 1
D0006630
400
0.009.7853.3/21
Systems
Electrical system
84
AIR CONDITIONING FAN WIRING (STANDARD CAB)
2
1
X118
X120
F0028210
2
3
X115
X119
F0028220
3
X76
F0027340
0.009.7853.3/21
401
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFY BLANK
Systems
Electrical system
84
ROOF WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB) (1/2)

TO 0.011.3595.3
X74
X95
TO 0.010.2560.0
X94
TO 0.010.2554.2
0.010.2560.0
X93
X80
GND7
X82
X96
TO 0.011.3597.3
X92
X97
TO 0.011.3743.3
X75
X98
TO 0.011.3754.3
X91
Interior roof light

To screenwash pumps wiring
Intermittent wipe timer PTO
To windscreen wiper wiring
To heater wiring
To heater or air conditioning wiring
To worklights wiring
Rear screen wiper control switch
Windscreen wiper control switch
To speaker and radio wiring
To air conditioning fan wiring
Relay for roof wiring power
X100
10A
5A
30A
7.5A
7.5A
7.5A
10A
10A
TO 0.011.3596.3
X101
RADIO
FREON
X74
X75
X80
X82
X91
X92
X93
X94
X95
X96
X97
X98
X99
X100
X101
X102
X103
X104
X99
TO 0.011.3610.3
X102
X103
X104
D0008810
0.011.3606.4/51
403
Systems
84
Electrical system
ROOF WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB) (2/2)
4
1
3
2
HN 1
M 1.5
AR 1
AR 1
AN 1
A1
C1
A1
HN 1
VN 1
X80
X97
V1
RN 1
M 1.5
AN 1
AN 1
N1
R 1.5
GN 1.5
M 1.5
N1
GV 1.5
G1
X98
G1
G1
GN 1
X95
X96
A1
R1
X101
N1
MG 1.5
G1
X99
GN 1
X100
GN 1
4
2
A
LAMPEGGIANTE
TERGI
POSTERIORE
N1
TERGI
VN 1.5
ANTERIORE
V1
V1
AN1
POSTERIRI
X82
FARI LAVORO
31
POMPA TERGI
15
ANTERIORI
53S
FARI LAVORO
V1
53N
T
ANTERIORE
2
1
N1
N1
AR1
RADIO
FREON
C1
5A
10A
30A
AR 1
X93
7.5A
RN1
GR1
X94
7.5A
N 1.5
AN 1.5
V1
X75
7.5A
N 1.5
10A
X102
10A
V1
R1
R1
AN 1.5
R6
N6
VN 1
GR 1
53
X92
N1
R6
AN 1
X91
LB 1
LB 1
MG 1.5
GV 1.5
AN 1
A1
A1
R 1.5
X103
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Yellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
N1
N1
R1
N1
N1
N1
N 1.5
N 1.5
N1
N6
R1
VN 1.5
R1
AN 1.5
AN 1.5
VN 1.5
R4
40A
X104
M 10
R4
M4
VN 1.5
GND7
D0006880
404
X74
0.011.3606.4/51
Systems
Electrical system
84
POSITION OF ROOF WIRING CONNECTORS (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB)
X75
GND7
X103
X91
F0026770
2
X99
X80
X97
X96
X100
X98
F0026780
3
X82
X104
F0026790
405
Systems
84
Electrical system
X93
X94
X95
F0026800
5
X101
X102
F0026820
X74
F0026810
406
Systems
Electrical system
84
ROOF WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB)
3
1
2
3
6
X92
7
F0026830
0.011.3606.4/51
407
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFY BLANK
Systems
Electrical system
84
WORKLIGHTS WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB)
TO 0.011.3606.4
X95
X123
X124
GND7
X122
GN 1.5
X123
N 1.5
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Yellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
X121
X95
4
N 1.5
GN 1.5
X122
G 1.5
X124
N 1.5
GND7
G 1.5
X121
X95
X121
X122
X123
X124
D0006840
N 1.5
To roof wiring
Rear left worklight
0.011.3595.3/10
409
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFY BLANK
Systems
Electrical system
84
WORKLIGHTS WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB)
X121-X122
X123-X124
2
1
F0027200
2
GND7
F0027210
X95
F0027220
0.011.3595.3/10
411
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFY BLANK
Systems
Electrical system
84
SCREENWASH PUMP WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB)
X129
X75

3
TO 0.011.3606.4
X135
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Yellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
2
1
X75
C 1.5
X135
1
AR 1.5
2
N 1.5
N1
1
2
X129
X75 To roof wiring

X129 Front windscreen washer pump
X135 Rear screen washer pum
D0006820
0.011.3743.3
413
Systems
84
Electrical system
WINDSCREEN WIPER WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB)
G-R 1
G-R 1
M-N 1
R-N 1
G-R 1
(+AZZ)
(+MOT)
V-N 1
TO 0.011.3606.4
X130
V-N 1
M-N 1
(AZZ.)
(GND)
X92
V-N 1
R-N 1
M-N 1
R-N 1
CORRISPONDENZA TRA CAVI CABLAGGIO E CAVI TERGI ANTERIORE
CABLAGGIO
G-R
(+MOT)
M-N
(GND)
R-N
(+AZZ)
V-N
V-N
(AZZ.)
WIRES
MOTORINO
TERGI
Wiper
X92 To roof wiring

X130 Windscreen wiper motor
D0006830
414
0.011.3597.3/33
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
Systems
Electrical system
84
WIRING FOR SCREENWASH PUMP & WINDSCREEN WIPER (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB)
1
X75
X92
F0027110
X130
F0027120
X135
X129
X129
F0027130
0.011.3743.3
0.011.3597.3/33
415
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFY BLANK
Systems
Electrical system
84
X101
TO 0.011.3606.4
SPEAKER AND RADIO WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB)
GND7
X83
2
N1
R1
A1
X101
1
M 1.5
R1
A1
HN 1
N1
X126
X83
N 1.5
N 1.5
N1
X86
X131
X132
X126
C1
CN 1
B1
BN 1
N1
2xR 1
BN 1
B1
CN 1
C1
HN 1
N 1.5
X125
M 1.5
N 1.5
GND7
X133
X132
X133
X125
X86
X131
X127
M 1.5
N 1.5

M
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Yellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
X127
X83 Clock
X86 Radio
X101 To roof wiring
X125 Rear screen wiper motor
X126 Connector
D0006810
X127 Rotating beacon

X131 Radio
X132 Left speaker
X133 Right speaker
0.011.3596.3/30
417
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFY BLANK
Systems
Electrical system
84
SPEAKER AND RADIO WIRING CONNECTORS (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB)
1
GND7
X101
F0027140
2
X132-X133
F0027150
X125
F0027160
419
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFY BLANK
Systems
Electrical system
84
X127
1
2
F0027170
5
5
6
X126
F0027180
6
X131
X83
X86
F0027190
0.011.3596.3/30
421
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFY BLANK
Systems
Electrical system
84
HEATER POWER SUPPLY WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB) (1/2)
X109
1
TO 010.2558.1
010.2562.1
X108
1
X108
X113
B+
X106
B-
TO 0.011.3606.4
X91
X111
X37
X111
50A
TO 0.011.3606.4
R 10
X103-30
1
2
X39
B+
Heater alternator (+)
B
Heater alternator ()
X37 Starter motor
X39 To central wiring
X91 To heater power supply wiring
X103-30 To roof wiring (X103)
X106 Heater resistance
X108 Connector
X111 Connector
X113 To heater or air conditioning wiring
D0007210
0.011.3761.3/30
423
Systems
84
Electrical system
GR 1
L1
B1
X108
1
X108
2
3
2
GR 1
G-R 1
B1
NL 1
HEATER POWER SUPPLY WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB) (2/2)
B1
1
X113
X109
L1
N 16
N 16
B+
X106
NL 1
N 16
B-
N 16
R4
3
VN 1.5
LB 1
2 1
X91
LB 1
X39
VN 1.5
X111
X103-30
R 10
X37
X111
R4
R 10
D0006710
424
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Yellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
0.011.3761.3/30
Systems
Electrical system
84
1
X103-30
X91
F0026840
2
X113
F0026850
X106
F0026860
425
Systems
84
Electrical system
4
X106
F0026870
5
X111
X37
X39
F0026880
B+
B-
X108
F0026890
426
Systems
Electrical system
84
HEATER POWER SUPPLY WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB)
X108
X109
F0028720
0.011.3761.3/30
427
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
LASCIATA BIANCA
Systems
Electrical system
84
HEATER WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB) (1/2)

TO 0.011.3606.4
TO 0.011.3761.3
X157
X147
X146
X93
X113
3 2
X145
1
85 86 30 87 87a
85 86 30 87 87b
85 86 30 87 87B
2
3
4
X154
2
1
X148
1 2 3 4 5 6
5
4
3
B
X137
X149
X150
10
X152
X136
12
11
X150
X152
X151
B
X93
X113
X136
X137
X145
D0007850

To roof wiring
Heater control unit
X146
X147
X148
X149
X150

Connector
X151
X152
X153
X154
X157
X153
Left heater fan

Connector
Right heater fan
Relay for 3rd fan speed and air conditioning on
0.010.2558.1
429
Systems
84
Electrical system
HEATER WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB) (2/2)
X136
X146
X145
X137
12
10
11
30
X93
C6
N6
L 0.5
Z B0.5
GR 0.5
GR 0.5
LN 0.5
LN 0.5
A 0.5
V 0.5
H 0.5
Z 0.5
Z 0.5
Z 0.5
A 0.5
C 0.5
H 0.5
V 0.5
CB 0.5
C6
85
B 1.5
86
N 0.5
R 2.5
87
A1
V 1.5
AR 2
BR 2
N 2.5
B 2.5
BR 2.5
87b
CB 0.5
X148
Z 0.5
X151
BR 2.5
X150
L 0.5
GR 1
LN 1
X113
N 2.5
R 1.5
B1
TABELLA COLORI / COLOURS T
30
II
III
IV
85
86
87
87b
30
85
AR 2
GL 2
N 0.5
S 1.5
C4
B1
B1
ZB 0.5
C 1.5
R1
C 2.5
B 1.5
S 1.5
LR 2
A 1.5
A 1
V 1.5
GL 2
R2
R 1.5
N 2.5
X152
86
87
87b
ABLE
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/V iolet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Y ellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
M
X153
D0007840
430
X149
X154
X147
X157
0.010.2558.1
Systems
Electrical system
84
POSITIONOF HEATER CONNECTORS (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB
1
X154
X145
F0028300
2
X146
X147
X157
F0028570
3
X113
X93
F0028330
431
Systems
84
Electrical system
4
X148-X149
X151-X153
F0028340
X150-152
F0028350
6
X137
F0028360
432
Systems
Electrical system
84
HEATER WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB)
3
4
2
6
7
X136
F0028370
0.010.2558.1
433
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
Systems
Electrical system
84
AIR CONDITIONING WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB) (1/2)

TO 0.011.3606.4
X93
X157
X147
X146
X156
TO 0.011.3606.4
X94
X137
A
85 86 30 87 87a
85 86 30 87 87b
85 86 30 87 87b
1 2 3
85 86 30 87 87a
X158
2
2
3
X154
4
3
X148
1
2
3
4
5
X145
TO 0.011.3761.3
X113
X159
X150
X149
10
X152
X136
12
11
X150
X152
X151
B
X93
X94
X113
X136
X137
X145
X146
D0007820

To roof wiring
To roof wiring
Heater control unit
X147
X148
X149
X150
X151
X152
X153

Connector
Left heater fan
Connector
Right heater fan
X154
X156
X157
X158
X159
X153

Relay for1st fan speed and air conditioning on
Relay for 3rd fan speed and air conditioning on
0.010.2562.1
435
Systems
84
Electrical system
AIR CONDITIONING WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB) (2/2)
X136
X146
X145
X137
12
10
11
30
X93
C6
N6
L 0.5
Z B0.5
GR 0.5
GR 0.5
LN 0.5
LN 0.5
A 0.5
V 0.5
H 0.5
Z 0.5
Z 0.5
Z 0.5
A 0.5
C 0.5
H 0.5
V 0.5
CB 0.5
C6
85
B 1.5
86
N 0.5
R 2.5
87
A1
V 1.5
AR 2
BR 2
N 2.5
B 2.5
BR 2.5
87b
CB 0.5
X148
Z 0.5
X151
BR 2.5
X150
L 0.5
GR 1
X113
LN 1
GB 1
N 2.5
R 1.5
B1
V 0.5
X94
B 0.5
30
85
86
87
87b
30
85
86
87
87b
30
85
86
B 0.5
VN 0.5
VN 0.5
A 0.5
GB 1
V 0.5
N 0.5
C 1.5
AR 2
GL 2
N 0.5
S 1.5
C4
B1
B1
ZB 0.5
C 1.5
R1
C 2.5
B 1.5
S 1.5
LR 2
A 1.5
A 1
V 1.5
GL 2
R2
R 1.5
N 2.5
X152
87
TABELLA COLORI / COLOURS T

I
II
III
IV
M
X153
D0007810
436
X149
X154
X147
X157
X156
X158
ABLE
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/V iolet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Y ellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
X159
0.010.2562.1
Systems
Electrical system
84
POSITION OF AIR CONDITIONING CONNECTORS (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB)
1
X158
F0028310
2
X154
X145
F0028300
3
X156
X157
X146
X147
F0028320
437
Systems
84
Electrical system
4
X113
X93
F0028330
5
X148-X149
X151-X153
F0028340
X150-152
F0028350
438
Systems
Electrical system
84
AIR CONDITIONING WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB)
4
5
3
7
8
2
1
X137
F0028360
8
9
X136
F0028370
X159
F0028380
0.010.2562.1
439
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
Systems
Electrical system
84
AIR CONDITIONING FAN WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB) (1/2)
X116
TO 0.011.3606.4
X102
1
X117a
87
86
ITALAMEC 037
X117b
X115
X114
85
87
30
85
87
86
87
30
ITALAMEC 037
X102 To roof wiring

X114 Relay for supplementary air conditioning fan
X115 Relay for air conditioning fan
X116 Air conditioning pressure switch
X117a Air conditioning fan
X117b Supplementary air conditioning fan
D0006860
0.011.3610.3/20
441
Systems
84
Electrical system
AIR CONDITIONING FAN WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB) (2/2)
X117a
X117b
X116
AN 1.5
AN 1.5
6
A
X114
1
30
86
VN 1
C1
CB 1
87
N 1.5
R1
A 1.5
87
87
CB 1
L 1.5
85
R1
N 2.5
86
C1
N1
87
30
V1
85
X115
A 1.5
L 1.5
V1
N 1.5
N 1.5
N1
N 1.5
N 1.5
X102
AN 1.5
AN 1.5
AN 1.5
VN 1
R1
R1
D0006870
442

M
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
Verde/Green
Azzurro/Blue
Viola/Violet
Bianco/White
Nero/Black
Blu/Dark Blue
Rosa/Pink
Giallo/Yellow
Rosso/Red
Grigio/Gray
0.011.3610.3/20
Systems
Electrical system
84
AIR CONDITIONING FAN WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB)
3
1
X114
X115
F0027080
X102
F0027090
X117b
X117a
X116
F0028190
0.011.3610.3/20
443
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFY BLANK
Systems
Electrical system
84
Electrical system AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number
2772)
The electrical system is fully equipped for use on the road, with sidelights, main/dipped beam headlamps, direction indicators doubling as hazard warning lights, and work lights, all fully in compliance with legal requirements as embodied in
the highway code.
There are four essential components and assemblies: battery, alternator, starter motor, and auxiliaries.
The system operates at a nominal 12 Volts (the maximum voltage in operation is 14,30,5 V).
The battery charge level is indicated by a relative meter on the instrument panel.
Specifications
battery
type
voltage
discharge capacity over 20 hours
rated current
starter motor
voltage
nominal rated power
electromagnetic control
alternator
RECHARGE SYSTEM
code
HEATING SYSTEM
code
type
nominal rated voltage
pulley nut tightening torque
V
Ah
A
maintenance free
12
100
(470)
V
12
cv
4 (3 kW)
electro-magnetic with translation and rotation of pinion
65A AA 125 R 14V 65A (MARELLI)

K1-14V 65A 20 (BOSCH)
AA K3563 14V 65A (ISKRA)
85A
AA K5114 14V 85A (ISKRA)
70A
AA5112 12V 70A (ISKRA)

three-phase
12
5,5 (62 Nm)
V
kgm
445
Systems
84
Electrical system
AGROPLUS 60 (under s.n. 1016) 70- (under s.n. 2772)
GENERAL SAFETY DIRECTIONS

PRECAUTIONS AGAINST DAMAGE TO ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT
Disconnect any electronic equipment from the system when the tractor is placed in any environment where temperatures are likely to exceed 80 C.
Remove battery connections when carrying out servicing or repair operations on the electrical system.
Avoid overvoltages in the electrical system. Always remove battery and alternator connections before carrying out
welding operations or when recharging the battery from the mains.
Never disconnect the battery while the engine is running.
In the event that the battery needs topping up, use only distilled or demineralized water; top up only when the battery
is AT REST and at AMBIENT TEMPERATURE (allow time for cooling after operation and following recharge).
Never carry out servicing operations on the electric heating system with the engine running.
When washing the tractor, ensure that the alternator and starter motor are well protected. These components must
not be sprayed or splashed directly with water.
PRECAUTIONS AGAINST ACCIDENT AND INJURY

WHEN COMMENCING ANY KIND OF WORK:
Turn off the main ignition switch.
Disconnect the battery; remember that electric shocks discharged through the human body will damage pacemakers.
The battery generates powerful and inflammable gases when recharging, which if ignited can cause the battery itself
to explode.
Do not make temporary or makeshift connections to the battery, as these can cause dangerous sparks.
The electrolyte in the battery is a solution of dilute sulphuric acid; if splashed on the skin, wash straight away with
plenty of water and sodium bicoarbonate.
Seek attention immediately from a doctor if electrolyte is splashed into the eyes.
Never allow the battery near a naked flame.
Keep a safe distance from a recharging battery when testing or measuring, and always wear suitable eye protection.
Make certain that the electrical system and all its components are inspected and serviced periodically; any faults
must be eliminated without delay, and parts subject to everyday wear replaced at the recommended intervals.
Ensure that trailers are fitted with regulation lights.
IMPORTANT REMINDERS
The maker declines all liability in respect of any damages resulting from operations performed other than in the recommended manner and/or by unskilled hands.
To ensure smooth operation of the machine, use only genuine replacement parts.
446
Systems
Electrical system
84
JUMP START UTILIZING ANOTHER BATTERY

NB: Emergency starting with the aid of a battery charger is not recommended.
PRECAUTIONS
The battery may be that of another tractor, but must in any event have the same rated voltage (and therefore an identical
number of cells).
1 - Make certain the two vehicles are not in contact with one another.
2 - Ensure that all auxiliary services are switched off.
3 - Make certain the flat battery is securely connected to earth, that the filler caps are properly tightened and that the
electrolyte is up to the correct level.
PROCEDURE:
A - Connect the two batteries as indicated in figure 1 (part A).
B - If the jump battery is that of another tractor, start the engine and run at approximately 1/4 of full throttle.
C - Turn the ignition key to start the engine of the stranded tractor, following the procedure given in the operators
handbook.
D - Remove the jump leads following the sequence as indicated in figure 1 (part B).
A - connection of leads to the 2 batteries
B - disconnection of leads from the 2 batteries
Separate
Batteries
connected batter.
STEP 1
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 2
STEP 6
STEP 3
connected batteries
separate batteries
Fig. 1 - Diagram of battery connections and relative leads.
447
Systems
84
Electrical system
PRACTICAL HINTS
Before installing a battery, and periodically thereafter:
Check over the electrical system, giving particular attention to connections; make certain there are no traces of oxidation and that there is no loss of current.
Check the alternator and the voltage regulator setting. If the charging voltage is inordinately high, distilled water will
be consumed at a high rate, whereas a low voltage will not charge the battery sufficiently.
Check the charge level of a new battery with a density indicator or voltmeter; if the density is less than 1.25 kg/l or the
no-load voltage after at least 3 - 4 hours at rest is lower than 12.5 V, proceed to recharge.
Install the battery in the machine with care, utilizing the anchorages provided.
When connecting the battery to the system:
secure the clamp.
before connecting the negative, make certain there is no sparking on contact with the corresponding terminal of the
battery. Sparks are due to insulation defects that must be located and eliminated.
Tighten the clamps on the terminals, smearing with petroleum jelly.
TABLE OF WIRING COLOUR CODES

BK =BLACK
BL=BLUE
BR=BROWN
DK BL=BLACK/BLUE
DK GN=BLACK/GREEN
GN=GREEN
GY=GREY
OR=ORANGE
PK=PINK
RD=RED
VL=VIOLET
WH=WHITE
YL=YELLOW
EXEMPLE:
DK BL/WH 1 680
DK BL/WH
DARK BLUE WITH WHITE LINE
1
680
=
=
CROSS SECTION OF WIRE (mm)

LENGTH OF WIRE (mm)
EXAMPLE OF CONNECTORS (CAN BE 4-PIN, 6-PIN OR 8-PIN)
448
Systems
Electrical system
84
RECHARGE SYSTEM
65A ALTERNATOR
ISKRA AAK3563 14V 65A
RECHARGE SYSTEM
65A ALTERNATOR
BOSCH K1-14V 65A 20
RECHARGE SYSTEM
65A ALTERNATOR
ISKRA AA 125R 14V 65A
449
Systems
84
Electrical system
RECHARGE SYSTEM
85A ALTERNATOR
HEATING SYSTEM
70A ALTERNATOR
STARTING SYSTEM
EV 12V 3.0
JF 12V 3.1 KWKW
450
Systems
Electrical system
84
Fig. 2 - Check panel with digital display
Ignition switch
Electtrical system deenergized - key removable
(On version with electronic RPM control, the engine shuts off automatically;
On versio with machanical throttle linkage, the engine is stopped by pulling the knob on the right of the instrument panel).
Active electric circyit: - Lamps indicating operation of the alternator and low engine oil pressure light up on
the instrument panel. A lamp indicating pre-heating lights up when ambient temperature is below 10C; wait
until the lamp has gone out (approx. 55 seconds) before turning the key to the next position. If the ignition
key is turned to the start position with the thermostart indicator still alight, the heater cuts out and power is
supplied to the starter motor.
Engine starting
451
Systems
84
Electrical system
IGNITION KEY
VENTILATION CONTROL
for tractors equipped with
standard cab
PUSH BUTTON CONTROL
HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS
452
Systems
Electrical system
84
PUSH BUTTON CONTROL

P.T.O. CLUTCH
cod. 2.7659.108.0/10
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK
cod. 008.1335.0
4WD COUPLER
cod. 007.5945.0/20
PUSH BUTTON CONTROL

cod. 2.7659.138.0
SWITCH DIGITAL DISPLAY
453
Systems
84
Electrical system
WARNING SWITCH
cod. 2.7659.080.0
WORK LIGHTS
FRONT
cod. 2.7659.078.0
REAR
cod. 2.7659.079.0
SCREEN WASHER SWITCH

FRONT
cod. 2.7659.145.0
REAR
cod. 2.7659.146.0
BEACON PUSH BUTTON

cod. 2.7659.126.0
454
Systems
Electrical system
84
RELAY
cod. 2.7659.107.0
ELECTRONIC FLASHER UNIT

cod. 2.8639.004.0
455
Systems
84
Electrical system
INTERIOR ROOF LIGHT COD. 2.8339.032.0
SWITCH CONTROLLING: differential lock - 4RM - 540 1000 rpm/min P.T.O.

Economy P.T.O. - Live P.t.o. - electric starter system.
cod. 2.7659.097.0
SWITCH FOR EMERGENCY BRAKE
456
cod. 2.7659.129.0
speed selector -
Systems
Electrical system
84
Fuse box
tractor fuse box

F1 - Thermostart
F2 - Side/tail lights - horn
F3 - Hazard warning lights
F4 - Work light - 12V socket
F5 - Engine RPM control unit
F6 - Thermostart/panel/HML
F7 - Engine STOP
F8 - Flashers
F9 - Side/tail light
F10 - Side/tail light
F11 - Dipped beam
F12 - Main beam
cab fuse box

F1 - Flasher unit
F2 - Radio
F3 - Air conditioning
F4 - Blower/heater
F5 - Front wiper
F6 - Rear wiper
F7 - Front work lights
F8 - Rear work lights
457
Systems
84
Electrical system
Instrument panel with digital display
The basic panel is the same as described above, except that the dial is replaced by a 4-digit display showing:
Lapsed time (hours)

Ground speed (speedometer)
P.T.O. speed
Trip meter (distance in metres)
There are also 4 high brightness Leds which indicate the function currently being displayed.
Any specifications not individually listed below will be the same as for the basic panel.
Operation
The selection and content of the functions displayed are governed by pressing buttons, denoted P1, P2 and P3.
Button P1 - Red - Positioned to right of panel.
Button P2 - Red - Positioned to right of panel.
Button P3 - Red - Positioned near fuse box (cover must be removed to gain access).
Auxiliary electrical systems on (turn the ignition key to position

displayed.
Then, turn the ignition key to position
(speedometer).
) the current total of working hours lapsed will be
, when the engine is started, the display sets itself to indicate ground speed
To display a function other than ground speed, simply press P1 repeatedly to select the function required.
1 - Lapsed work time indicated by 4 digits, to the nearest hour.

2 - Ground speed indicated by 3 digits, one of which after the decimal point (XX.X), in km/h. In the event that bigger or
smaller rear tyres are fitted, the new size must be entered (see directions point 5 page 373).
458
Systems
Electrical system
84
IMPORTANT: If a function other than speedometer is currently selected, the panel will revert automatically to displaying ground speed if 20 km/h is exceeded.
3 - P.T.O. speed is indicated by 4 digits (XXX0), in revolutions per minute.

4 - The trip meter uses 4 digits (XXXX), indicating the distance covered by the tractor in metres. The trip meter can be
reset; this is done by selecting the function then pressing and holding P2 for at least 3 seconds, during which time the figures will blink before returning to zero. If P2 is released before the 3 seconds have passed, there will be no reset.
5 - Entering the speed constant according to the tyre size.
This operation becomes necessary only if the rear tyres are replaced with others of a different size.
With the engine at standstill and the ignition key in the off position
, press and hold button P3 while turning the key
to the auxiliary position

(without starting the engine), then release the button only when the tyre code appears in
the display. This code will correspond to the type of rear tyre currently fitted.
Now press button P1 repeatedly to view the permissible tyre sizes, which will be displayed in sequence.
When the size displayed matches that of the new tyres, press P3 again to memorize.
If the key is returned to the off position without completing this last step, the tyre size code will not be updated.
Listed below are the tyre options specified for the tractor. Each size has a relative display code which corresponds to the
number of impulses per 100 metres picked up by the speedometer sensor.
Tyre
Impulses for 100 metres
480/65 x 28
14.9 x 32
14.9 x 28
1100
14.9 x 30
420/70/30
16.9 x 28
480/70/28
540/65 x 28
12.4 x 36
540/65 x 30
16.9 x 30
480/70/30
13.6 x 28
380/70/28
420/70/24
14.9 x 24
13.6. X 36
1058
1050
1020
A - Button P 1, used to select

the function displayed - Colour
red.
The 3 available functions (speedometer, P.T.O. speed, trip meter) are displayed cyclically by
pressing P1 repeatedly.
The function selected is indicated
by a relative Led on the instrument panel.
1050
1153
1192
B - Button P 2, used to reset the

function selected - Colour red
Press this to select another function.
984
1 Diagnostics socket (on version with electronic RPM control only)

-
2 Tyre size selection button (on version with the Instrument panel
with digital display)
-
459
Systems
84
Electrical system
Operation of the broken belts alarm control unit
IMPORTANT: (for tractors equipped with air conditioning) if the engine fan belt breaks:
a safety device will activate the emergency warning light on the dashboard (red triangle) and a warning buzzer will sound;
(on tractors also equipped with electronic governors) with the handbrake on, the engine will also stop.
This control unit allows the operator to leave the tractor with the engine running.
The control unit acquires signals from the sensors and generates alarm conditions and may also stop the engine when
necessary.
control unit connections
INPUTS
- engine oil pressure
- alternator d+
- broken fanbelt sensor
- auxiliary input
handbrake
NOTE: the auxiliary input is optional. If it is not to be utilised,

leave the relative contact on the control unit free. This input
can be connected to a relay which connects the signal to
earth in the event an alarm.
OUTPUTS
- control signal for engine oil pressure warning light
- engine stop control signal
- buzzer
Input and output operation
Inputs
Input D+ serves two functions:
- alarms control enabling
- alarms.
When the engine is switched off, this signal is low to illuminate the alternator warning light. The control unit considers
the signal status low when it is below 3 volts. On starting the engine, this signal goes to +12 volts. If the signal voltage remains high (+12V) for 7 seconds, the control unit is enabled to check for alarm conditions.
Once the alarm check has started, this input becomes itself a potential cause of an alarm; an alarm will be generated if
the +12V is absent for at least 2 seconds.
If the alternator is faulty, the signal D+ will never be activated and consequently control unit operation will not be initiated.
The broken fanbelt input is connected to a sensor on the cooling fan on air-cooled engines.
The broken fanbelt alarm is activated when a frequency below 10 Hz ( 10 pulses/second) is detected on the input.
The oil pressure input is considered activated when it is low (earth) for at least 2 seconds, and deactivated when it stays
high (12V) for the same duration.
The auxiliary input is considered activated when it remains low (earth) for at least 2 seconds, and deactivated when it
stays high (12V) for the same duration.
The handbrake input is used by the control unit to determine the type of output in the event of an alarm condition.
Outputs
The engine stop command output is activated when one off the alarm inputs is activated while the handbrake is on. The
control unit is capable of determining if this output is connected or not.
The engine oil pressure warning light is used to generate a diagnostic code if the alarm is activated when the handbrake
is released.
If the alarm is caused by the absence of engine pressure, the warning light will illuminate steadily.
460
Systems
Electrical system
84
The buzzer is used to alert the operator to the status of the control unit.
The buzzer emits three different signals:
- two short acoustic signals (0.3 seconds) each time the handbrake is released to indicate that the control unit is in
alarm signalling condition (diagnostic code on oil pressure warning light) but without generating the engine stop output.
- one long acoustic signal (1 second) each time the handbrake is applied to indicate that the control unit will activate the
engine stop output in the event of an alarm.
- intermittent signal ( 3 Hz) to signal that the control unit has activated the engine stop output.
OPERATION
The control unit only operates after the engine has been started. The control unit uses the D+ signal of the alternator to
determine whether the engine is running.
This signal must stay at high voltage for a duration of 7 seconds before control unit operation is initiated.
If there is an alternator fault (signalled by the alternator warning light staying on when the engine is started), control unit
operation will not be initiated.
The start of control unit operation is signalled by an acoustic signal which will depend on the handbrake status:
- two short acoustic signals (approx. 0.3 sec) id the handbrake is released.
- one long signal (1 sec.) if the handbrake is on.
At this point, the control unit will monitor the status of the broken fanbelt input, the oil pressure input, the auxiliary input
and the D+ input.
If one of these inputs is activated, the control unit will signal an alarm.
There are two levels of alarm:
Level 1 alarm - handbrake released.
Level 1 alarm monitoring is activated when the handbrake is released, and is signalled by two short acoustic signals
(0.3 seconds).
If the handbrake is not on:
- and the fanbelt is broken, the engine oil pressure warning light will flash with diagnostic code 2.
- and the auxiliary input is activated, the engine oil pressure warning light will flash with diagnostic code 4.
- and the D+ input voltage is low (earth), the engine oil pressure warning light will flash with diagnostic code 3.
- and the oil pressure is low, the engine oil pressure warning light will illuminate steadily (controlled by the pressure
switch).
The warning light will stop flashing the moment the alarm condition ceases to exist.
Level 2 alarm 2 - handbrake on.
Level 2 alarm monitoring is activated when the handbrake is applied, and is signalled by a long acoustic signal (1 second).
If the handbrake is on:
- and any alarm is activated, the control unit will generate the ENGINE STOP signal. Consequently the engine oil pressure warning light will be steadily illuminated (as when the engine is stopped, the oil pressure will fall and thus the warning light will come on) unless there is no connection between the control unit and the engine stop device.
The control unit will signal the ENGINE STOP condition with an intermittent acoustic signal (approx. 3 signals per second).
To deactivate the ENGINE STOP, switch off and then restart the engine.
461
Systems
84
Electrical system
ENGINE STOP DEVICES

The alarm control unit can generate an output signal to control a device which stops the engine.
The alarm control unit output can be connected to an engine control unit type 2MH (manufacturers code for control unit
with 26 contact connector) and is also capable of operating a relay with currents up to 250mA.
ENGINE STOP OPERATION WITH A TYPE 2MH ENGINE CONTROL UNIT

The operation of the engine control unit in the presence of a STOP signal is very simple.
The control unit starts to monitor the STOP signal 2 seconds after the engine has been started, i.e. when it has attained idling
speed.
The control unit checks for a STOP signal which remains active for at least 1 second.
On detection of a STOP signal, the control unit switches off the engine.
The engine control unit signals operation of the engine stop by 7 flashes of the HOLD led on the keypad.
The engine control unit will ignore the STOP signal if the engine is switched off. For example, if the engine stalls (under
excessive load), a STOP signal may be generated but it will be ignored.
Using the ALL ROUND TESTER it is possible to check that the STOP signal is connected correctly.
One of the following messages will also appear on the monitor:
1) STOP NOT CONNECTED
2) STOP CONNECTED
3) STOP ACTIVE
On models equipped with STOP control units, the valid messages are nos. 2 and 3. Should message no. 1 STOP NOT
CONNECTED appear, check the connection between pin 5 of the alarm control unit and pin 11 of the engine control
unit.
If none of the above messages appears, this means that the engine control unit does not have the correct program.
DIAGNOSTICS
To enable the operator to identify the problem which caused the intervention of the engine stop, the control unit provides
a diagnostic code by means of the oil pressure warning light, but only when the handbrake is released.
The diagnostic code is only given after the engine has been re-started and the control unit has given the first acoustic signal, typically 7 seconds after the alternator warning light goes out.
The diagnostic code consists of a series of flashes each with a duration of 0.3 seconds at 1 second intervals.
The oil pressure input does not provide a diagnostic code as the illumination of the warning light is forced by the pressure switch.
462
Systems
Electrical system
84
Diagnostic codes
Below is a list of the diagnostic codes and their meanings:
flashes
WARNING LIGHT
2
3
4
5
Broken fanbelt sensor

Alternator signal D+
Auxiliary input
Engine STOP output
example of code 2
ON
OFF
Description of faults
This chapter provides useful information for fault tracing.
Code 2 - Broken fanbelt sensor
This fault is signalled when the input signal from the fanbelt sensor fails to arrive at the control unit.
If this fault occurs :
- Check that the battery voltage is present between pins 1 and 2 of the sensor connector.
- Check that pin 3 of the sensor connector is connected to pin 6 of the alarm control unit.
Code 3 - Alternator signal D+
This fault is signalled when the alternator signal D+ is no longer present after the alarm control unit has entered into
operation.
If this fault occurs:
- Check the alternator warning light: if on, the problem concerns the alternator itself; if off, the wire carrying the signal to
the control unit may have come disconnected.
Code 4 - Auxiliary input
This fault is signalled when the voltage on pin 8 of the control unit falls below 12V.
This input is not currently utilised, consequently if this fault is signalled, check that pin 8 of the control unit is at +12V. If
necessary, remove the contact from the connector and test again.
Code 5 - Engine STOP output
This fault is signalled when the control unit does not detect any connection to its STOP output.
If this fault occurs:
- Check that pin 5 of the alarm control unit is connected to pin 11of the engine control unit.
463
Systems
84
Electrical system
Broken belt alarm system and diagnostic codes. (If the light stays on continuously this indicates low engine oil pressure).
A - Alternator
B - Engine oil pressure
C - Fan pick-up
D - Brake fluid level
E - Handbrake
F - Alarm control unit
G - Engine control unit
464
H - Electro stop
I - Connection for engines with electronic governor
L - Diagnostic codes
M - N* of flashes
2 - Broken belt sensor
3 - Alternator signal
5 - Engine stop output
Systems
Electrical system
84
ELECTRICAL WIRING
TRACTOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM

KEY TO ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM
TAV.1
-
TRACTOR WIRING
COMPLETE CENTRAL UNDERBODY WIRING
TAV. 2
COMPLETE FRONT WIRING
TAV. 3
GEARBOX WIRING
TAV. 4
BATTERY WIRING
TAV. 5
POWERSHIFT CONTROL WIRING
TAV. 6
CAB WIRING
CAB WIRING DIAGRAM
TAV. 7
CENTRAL WIRING
TAV. 8
CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM WIRING
TAV. 9
WORK LIGHTS - SCREEN WIPER - ROTATING LIGHTWIRING
TAV. 10
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM WIRING
TAV. 11
AIR HEATING WIRING
TAV. 12
SCREENWASH PUMPS WIRING
TAV. 13
FRONT SCREEN WIPER WIRING
TAV. 14
CAB POWER SUPPLY WIRING
TAV. 15
FUEL LEVEL SENDER
TAV. 16
465
Systems
84
Electrical system
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
466
TAV. 1 - TRACTOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)
467
KEY TO FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM OF TRACTOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
1 - PREHEATING SOLENOID VALVE

2 - STARTING ENABLING SENSOR
3 - STOP SENSOR
4 - STOP LIGHTS
5 - STOP LIGHTS
6 - GLOWPLUG
7 - GLOWPLUG WARNING LIGHT
17 - FUEL RESERVE WARNING LIGHT
18 - FUEL LEVEL INDICATOR
19 - SENSOR FOR FUEL LEVEL INDICATOR
20 - ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
21 - OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
22 - 540 RPM REAR P.T.O. INDICATOR LIGHT
23 - 540 RPM P.T.O. ENGAGEMENT SENSOR
24 - 1000 RPM REAR P.T.O. LIGHT
25 - 1000 RPM P.T.O. ENGAGEMENT SENSOR
30 - 4WD INDICATOR LIGHT
32 - TRAILER BRAKING INDICATOR LIGHT
33 - TRAILER BRAKING SENSOR
34 - CHRONOMETER-TACHOMETER
35 - ALTERNATOR WARNING LIGHT
36 - HYDRAULIC SERVICES OIL FILTER WARNING LIGHT
37 - HYDRAULIC SERVICES OIL FILTER SENSOR
40 - AIR FILTER WARNING LIGHT
41 - AIR FILTER SENSOR
42 - BRAKE OIL LEVEL WARNING LIGHT
43 - BRAKE OIL LEVEL SENSOR
44 - REAR P.T.O. IN OPERATION WARNING LIGHT
45 - SOLENOID VALVES OIL SENSOR
46 -SYNCHRONISED P.T.O. INDICATOR LIGHT
47 - SYNCHRONISED P.T.O. SENSOR
48 - ENGINE OIL LOW PRESSURE WARNING LIGHT
49 - ENGINE OIL LOW PRESSURE SENSOR
50 - DIFFERENTIAL LOCK INDICATOR LIGHT
51 - DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SWITCH
52 - DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SOLENOID VALVE
53 - 4WD ENGAGEMENT SWITCH
54 - 4WD ENGAGEMENT SOLENOID VALVE
55 - FRONT P.T.O. CONTROL SWITCH
56 - P.T.O. ENGAGEMENT INDICATOR LIGHT
57 - FRONT P.T.O. SOLENOID VALVE
59 - REAR P.T.O. SOLENOID VALVE
60 - REAR P.T.O. CONTROL SWITCH/ STARTING ENABLE
TRACTOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)
468
61 - ECONOMIC P.T.O. SELECTION INDICATOR LIGHT

62 - ECONOMIC P.T.O. SENSOR
63 - HANDBRAKE SENSOR
66 - SIDE LIGHTS INDICATOR LIGHT
67 - LEFT FRONT SIDE LIGHT
68 - RIGHT FRONT SIDE LIGHT
69 - RIGHT REAR SIDE LIGHT
70 - LEFT REAR SIDE LIGHT
71 - NUMBER PLATE LIGHT
72 - RIGHT LOW BEAM HEADLIGHT
73 - LEFT LOW BEAM HEADLIGHT
74 - LEFT MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHT
75 - RIGHT MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHT
76 - MAIN BEAM WARNING LIGHT
77 - HORN
83 - DIRECTION INDICATORS WARNING LIGHT
84 - DIRECTION INDICATORS WARNING LIGHT -1ST TRAILER
85 - DIRECTION INDICATORS WARNING LIGHT - 2ND TRAILER
86 - LEFT FRONT DIRECTION INDICATOR
87 - LEFT REAR DIRECTION INDICATOR
88- RIGHT FRONT DIRECTION INDICATOR
89 - RIGHT REAR DIRECTION INDICATOR
91 - WORK LIGHT
93 - REAR WORK LIGHTS
94 - FLASHER SOCKET
A - IGNITION SWITCH
B - STARTER MOTOR
C - ELECTRONIC GOVERNOR
D - FANBELT ALARM CONTROL UNIT
E - 65A ALTERNATOR WITH SOCKET W
F - LIGHTS, DIRECTION INDICATORS AND HORN CONTROL
G - DIRECTION INDICATORS CONTROL UNIT
H - DIRECTION INDICATORS CONTROLS
I - TRAILER SOCKET
N - PRE-HEATING CONTROL UNIT
O - HIGH-MEAN-LOW CONTROL UNIT
R1 - PRE-HEATING RELAY
R2 - STARTING ENABLEMENT RELAY
TRACTOR WIRING
TAV. 2 - COMPLETE CENTRAL UNDERBODY WIRING - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)
469
TRACTOR WIRING
470
TAV. 3 - COMPLETE FRONT WIRING - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)
TRACTOR WIRING
TAV. 4 - GEARBOX WIRING - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)
471
1200 3 CIL.
1300 4 CIL.
TRACTOR WIRING
472
TAV. 5 - BATTERY WIRING - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)
TRACTOR WIRING
TAV. 6 - POWERSHIFT WIRING - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)
473
KEY TO COMPONENTS
1 - FLASHING SWITCHES
2 - FLASHING
3 - COURTESY LIGHT
4 - 12V RADIO SOCKET
5 - CONDITIONER RELAY
6 - CONDENSER FAN
8 - PRESSURE SWITCH
9 - COMPRESSOR (R 132A)
10 - HEATING ALTERNATOR
11 - SCREEN WIPER SWITCH
12 - FRONT SCREEN WIPER MOTOR

13 - FRONT SCREEN WASH PUMP
14 - SCREEN WASH BUTTON
15 - SCREEN WIPER SWITCH
16 - REAR WIPER MOTOR
17 - REAR SCREEN WASH PUMP
18 - FRONT WORK LIGHTS SWITCH
19 - FRONT WORK LIGHTS
20 - REAR WORK LIGHTS SWITCH
21 - REAR WORK LIGHTS
7 - HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING UNIT
A OPTIONAL CLIMATE CONTROL CONNECTOR

B POWER SUPPLY CONNECTOR
R OPTIONAL ELECTRIC HEATER CONNECTOR
CAB WIRING
474
TAV. 7 - CAB WIRING DIAGRAM - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)
CAB WIRING
TAV. 8 - CAB WIRING - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)
475
KEY TO CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS

E
N
P
C
RA
RC
A
P
F
T
CO
S
R
B
A
CAB WIRING
476
TAV. 9 - CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM WIRING - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)
ELECTRONIC HEATING CONTROL UNIT

NTC TEMPERATURE SENSOR
FAN SPEED CONTROL RESISTOR
FAN SPEED CONTROL SWITCH
HEATING RELAY
AIR CONDITIONING RELAY
ELECTRIC HEATING ALTERNATOR
HEATER ELEMENT
POWER SUPPLY FUSE
AIR CONDITIONER PRESSURE SWITCH
COMPRESSOR
THERMOSTAT
OPTIONAL ELECTRIC HEATING CONNECTOR
POWER SUPPLY CONNECTOR
OPTIONAL CLIMATE CONTROL CONNECTOR
CAB WIRING
TAV. 10 - WORK LIGHTS - SCREEN WIPER - ROTATING LIGHTWIRING - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)
477
CAB WIRING
478
TAV. 11 - AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM WIRING - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)
CAB WIRING
TAV. 12 - AIR HEATING WIRING - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)
479
CAB WIRING
480
TAV. 13 - SCREENWASH PUMPS WIRING - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)
CAB WIRING
TAV. 14 - FRONT SCREEN WIPER WIRING
CAB WIRING
TAV. 15 - CAB POWER SUPPLY WIRING - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)
481
CAB WIRING
482
TAV. 16 - FUEL LEVEL SENDER - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)
APPENDIX
Appendix
Power lift tester
Power Lift Electronic Control Unit

TESTER manual
CONTENTS
Functional diagram .............................................................................................................................III
Presentation screen ...........................................................................................................................LV
Initialisation menu................................................................................................................................V
1 Main menu .......................................................................................................................................VI
1 Calibrations menu..........................................................................................................................VII
2 Monitor menu...................................................................................................................................X
1 Lift menu......................................................................................................................................XI
2 Draft menu.................................................................................................................................XIII
3 Position menu ...........................................................................................................................XIV
3 Tests menu ...................................................................................................................................XV
1 Sensors menu ...........................................................................................................................XVI
2 Power supply menu .................................................................................................................XVII
3 Inputs menu ............................................................................................................................XVIII
4 Alarms menu .................................................................................................................................XX
Scope
The scope of this document is:
- to present the diagnostic information that can be accessed through the All Round Tester (ART);
- to list the alarm conditions that the electronic control unit is able to diagnose, along with the possible causes of the
alarms and the relative actions of the electronic control unit.
II
Appendix
Power lift tester
PIN OUT
REAR LIFT ECU
5
11
10
Mix
Main Control
L. Speed
Draft
Position
+Vcc Sensors
Max H.
12
ISO 9141
Electrovalve DOWN
4
GND
2
Electrovalve UP
Vcc
1K2
Lock/Alarm
Extern up
Extern down
Down
V
+
Up
EVup
EVdown
Tester
In/Out
Position
Sensor
Draft
Sensor
Lowering
Speed
Maximum
Height
Mix
Draft/Pos
Main
Control
Down/Up
Control lever
Functional diagram of the lift ECU.

1 - Vdc
4 - GND
5 - Sensor Vdc
6 - Position
7 - Draft
8 - Speed limit
9 - Maximum height
10 - Mix
11 - Main control
12 - ISO 9141
A - UP solenoid valve
B - DOWN solenoid valve
C - Tester IN/OUT
D - Position sensor
E - Draft sensor
F - Lowering speed
G - Maximum height
H - DRAFT/POSITION MIX control
I - Main control
L - UP/DOWN control
III
Appendix
Power lift tester
Presentation screen
The presentation screen displays preliminary information about the electronic control unit:
Software version
Date of software issue
The screen appears as follows:
Where:
Version
Date:
t
=
software version
date of software issue
The various functions are described below:

Pressing "C"
displays the initialisation menu for the tractor type:
- lift for tractor 10N (Golden)
- lift for tractor 10S (Dorado)
As described on page V
Pressing "E"
displays the menu described on page vi
IV
Appendix
Power lift tester
Initialisation menu
From the Initialisation menu you can configure the lift in accordance wit the type of tractor.
The menu is displayed on the ART as follows:

I
Where:
Current parameters defines the configuration currently saved in memory
To change and save the configuration, press "1" or "2".
Press "1" to configure the lift for the 10N tractor. (Golden)
Press "2" to configure the lift for the 10S tractor. (Dorado)
Press "C" to pass to the main menu.
Appendix
Power lift tester
1 - Main menu
From this menu you can select the component on which diagnosis is to be performed or display the general list of alarms
detected up until that point.
The menu displayed on the ART is as follows:
The various menus and submenus are described below.
VI
Appendix
Power lift tester
1 - Calibrations menu
From this menu you can calibrate the lift system.
These operations are to be performed with the lift lock released.

The various calibration functions are described below.
VII
Appendix
Power lift tester
Maximum height calibration:
On pressing "1" on the ART, the following screen is displayed:
Where:
Current
New
The position value between 0 and 1000 saved in memory.

The position value between 0 and 1000 read by the position sensor.
Operation: To decontrol the lifter pressing for 3 second the key of command basculante on the position UP.
With the keys of controls manual, to position the lifter to the maximum desired height.
To press the key [E] on the tester and the key [C] to confirm the new value.
Press:
"A" to cancel the operation;
"C" to save the new value in the Eeprom.
VIII
Appendix
Power lift tester
Implement lifting speed
This parameter regulates the speed at which the lift is raised when using the manual controls only.
On pressing "2" on the ART, the following screen is displayed:
Where:
Current
New
The speed value between 300 and 400 saved in memory.

The actual speed value between 300 and 400.
Press:
"A" to cancel the operation;
"C" to save the new value in the Eeprom.
IX
Appendix
Power lift tester
2 - Monitor menu
From this menu you can display the operating parameters of the lift system.
The various functions are described below.
Appendix
Power lift tester
2 - Monitor Menu
1 - Lift menu
From this menu you can display the following values:
Set Point
Position
Draft
Maximum height
P W M
u
E
POTENTIOMETERS
Set Point
Reference value for automatic control of the lift.
On turning the potentiometer, the value displayed varies between 0 and 1000
(this operation must be performed with the lift lock released).
The value modifies the positions of equilibrium during the operation in control.
Max. height
Represents the maximum height to which the lift can be raised.

On turning the potentiometer, the value displayed varies between 0 and 100.
Lowering speed
Represents the lowering speed as a percentage of the maximum speed.

Mix
This parameter allows you to select the type of control, passing continuously from position
to draft control.
XI
Appendix
Power lift tester
SENSORS
Position
Signal read by the position sensor; values range from 0 to 100.
Draft
Signal read by the draft sensor; values range from 0 to 1000.
PWM OUTPUT
PWM
Value that controls the current supplied to the proportional solenoid valves.
Value ranges 290 to 600.
when the lfting is in movement; 0 if the elettrovalvoles are not commanded.
LIFT STATUS
Status
Displays the operating status of the lift system.
Press the control button to view the following status information
LOCK
lift locked
STOP
lift operative awaiting command
CNTRL
lift operating in automatic control mode
FLOAT
lift in float mode
XII
Appendix
Power lift tester
2 - Monitor menu
2 - Draft menu
Pwm Base Up
PWM Base Down
PWM Max Up
PWM Max Down
Gain Up
GainDown

D
P W M
P W M
P W M M
P W M M
w
w
n
n
These are the characteristic values of the electronic lift control system.
The default values are as follows:
Values
10N
10S
PWM BaseUp
390
360
PWM BaseDown
400
420
PWM MaxUp
600
600
PWM MaxDown
600
600
Gain Up
25
18
Gain Down
45
35
XIII
Appendix
Power lift tester
2 - Monitor Menu
3 - Position Menu
Pwm Base Up
PWM Base Down
PWM Max Up
PWM Max Down
Gain Up
GainDown
P W M
P W M
W M
W M
These are the characteristic values of the electronic lift control system.
The default values are as follows:
XIV
Values
10N
10S
PWM BaseUp
315
315
PWM BaseDown
310
320
PWM MaxUp
600
600
PWM MaxDown
600
600
Gain Up
10
10
Gain Down
50
50
Appendix
Power lift tester
3 - Tests Menu
From this menu you can test the operation of the:
1 - sensors
2 - actuators connected to the ECU.
3 - inputs
The various functions are described.
XV
Appendix
Power lift tester
3 - Tests Menu
1 - Sensors menu
In this menu you can check the operation of the sensors.

S
Where:
Position
Draft
XVI
Position sensor value ranging from 0 to 100

Draft sensor value ranging from 0 to 1000
Appendix
Power lift tester
3 - Tests Menu
2 - Power supply
In this menu you check the power supply to the ECU.
Where:
+10V
represents the output voltage value in the range 0 to 1000 mV.
XVII
Appendix
Power lift tester
3 - Tests menu
3 - Inputs
In this menu you can check the operation of the ECU inputs.

n
D W
Where:
Up/Down rocker switch on console
XVIII
e.
Appendix
Power lift tester
On pressing the UP side of the rocker switch with the lift lock released, the display will appear as follows:
U
D W
On pressing the DOWN side of the rocker switch with the lift lock released, the display will appear as follows:
U
D W
ExtUP/DW ground-operated pushbuttons
On pressing the button with the UP arrow when the lift lock is released, the display will appear as follows
E
D W
On pressing the button with the DOWN arrow when the lift lock is released, the display will appear as follows
E
D W
Set Point on turning the potentiometer, the value varies in the range 0 to 1000
Max. height on turning the potentiometer, the value varies in the range 0 to 100
Lowering speed on turning the potentiometer, the value varies in the range 0 to 100
CONTROL TYPE On pressing the control pushbutton, the following conditions are displayed
C
T RL
XIX
Appendix
Power lift tester
5 - Alarms menu
The screen displayed on the ART is as follows:
XX
M S
O G
Appendix
Power lift tester
Tester message
Possible cause of fault
ECU action
N of flashes
UPSV DISCONN.
UP proportional solenoid valve

disconnected.
- Wiring error.
Check electrical continuity
-Solenoid faulty.
Check solenoid
-ECU faulty.
Loss of lift system function.
11
UPSV S.C.
Short circuit of UP proportional

solenoid valve.
- Wiring error.
Check electrical continuity.
- Solenoid faulty.
Check solenoid.
- ECU faulty.
12
DWSV DISCONN.
DOWN proportional solenoid

valve disconnected.
- Wiring error.
- Solenoid faulty.
Check solenoid.
- ECU faulty.
13
DWSV S.C.
Short circuit of DOWN proportional solenoid valve.

- Wiring error.
- Solenoid faulty.
Check solenoid.
- ECU faulty.
14
EPROM CHECK
EPROM error.
- ECU faulty.
Total lockup of lift system
15
POS.SENS.S.C.
Short circuit of position sensor.

- Wiring error.
- Sensor faulty.
Check sensor.
- ECU faulty.
21
XXI
Appendix
Power lift tester
XXII
Tester message
Possible cause of fault
ECU action
N of flashes
POS.SENS. DIS.
Position sensor disconnected.

- Wiring error.
- Sensor faulty.
Check sensor.
- ECU faulty.
22
GEN.FAIL.CPU
General failure of CPU.

- ECU faulty.
23
DRAFT SENS. DIS.
Draft sensor not connected.

- Wiring error.
- Sensor faulty.
Check sensor.
- ECU faulty.
Loss of draft control function.
41
DRAFT SENS. S.C.
Draft sensor short circuit.

- Wiring error.
- Sensor faulty.
Check sensor.
- ECU faulty.
Loss of draft control function.
42
EEPROM CHECK
EEPROM error.
- ECU faulty
Default values (for 10N) utilised
45
NO V. SENSOR
No voltage at sensor.
- Wiring error.
- ECU faulty.
Check using Tests menu on
ART.
Der Nachdruck des Textes und der Abbildungen ist, auch auszugsweise, verboten.
La reproduction du prsent ouvrage, du texte et des llustratons, mme partelle est interdite.
Text and illustrations herewith enclosed may not be reproduced, not even in part and by any means.
E vietata la riproduzione, anche parziale, del testo e delle illustrazioni.
Se prohibe la reproduccin total o parcial del texto y de las ilustraciones.
A proibida a reproduo, at mesmo parcial, do texto e das ilustraces.
Der zeitliche Unterschied zwischen der Aktualisierung der Druckschriften und der Durchfhrung technischer Vernderungen (die stndig vorgenommen werden, um immer hochwertigere Erzeugnisse auf den Markt zu bringen) erfordern
aus Grnden der Korrektheit des Hinweises, dass die in dieser Ausgabe enthaltenen Daten jederzeit gendert werden
knnen und deshalb unverbindlich sind.
Le temps qui scoule entre la mise jour en impression et les modifications techniques (ces dernires changeant continuellement afin doffrir aux utilisateurs des produits toujours plus qualifis) nous oblige a vous signaler que les
donnes de la prsente publication pourraient tre susceptibles de variations. Elles sont donnes sans engagement de
notre part.
Because of the possible time lag between the introduction of technical modifications (an on-going process the aim of
which is to offer products which are being continually improved) and the latest update of the manual, we must point out,
for the sake of correctness,that the data contained in this edition are liable to change at any time and are therefore not
binding.
La differenza tra i tempi di aggiornamento in stampa e i tempi delle modifiche tecniche (variando queste ultime continuamente, ci al fine di offrire prodotti sempre pi qualificati) impongono di dichiarare, per correttezza, che i dati contenuti nella presente edizione sono suscettibili di variazione in qualsiasi momento e che quindi non sono impegnativi.
La diferencia entre los tiempos necesarios para poner al dia la impresin y los tiempos de las modificaciones tcnicas
(las que se verifican continuamente, con el objeto de ofrecer productos cada vez ms calificados) nos imponen
declarar, por correccin, que los datos contenidos en la presente edicin estn sujetos a variaciones en cualquier momento y que portanto no son obligativos.
A diferena entre os tempos necessrrios para actualizar a impresso e os tempos das modificaces tcnicas (que se
verificam continuamente, a fim de oferecer um produto cada vez mais qualificado), obrigam-nos a declarar, que os dados contidos neste manuel so susceptiveis de variaco em qualquer momento e que portanto no so vinculatrios.
NOTES
05 - 2003
By Personal computing
cod. 307.1064.3.6
Technical Publications Dep.
05 - 2003
307. 1064. 3. 6

AGROPLUS 60-70-80 Repair Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

AGROPLUS 60-70-80 Repair Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

AGROPLUS 60-70-80 Repair Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

WORKSHOP MANUAL

General safety directions......................................................................................................................................446

30 Forward + 15 Reverse: 5 speeds x 3 ranges (Hair-Tortoise-Snail)

MECHANICALLY OPERATED REAR POWER-LIFT

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Engine AGROPLUS 70/80

Gearbox and rear axle

(*)1 replace after 50 hours

Brakes and clutch control

PRESCRIBED LUBRICANTS AND FUELS AGROPLUS 60/70/80

PRESCRIBED LUBRICANTS AND FUELS

CONVERSION TABLE FROM

HOW TO ORDER SPARE PARTS

ENGINE TYPE AND

TRACTOR FRAME TYPE

AGROPLUS 60 and AGROPLUS 70 are powered by F3L 913 / F4L 913

Clutch and transmission

single disc dry

Minimum permissible thickness of disc

Thickness of friction disc

Spring specifications to Belleville washer for the

CAUTION: In the event the transmission being split to gain access

Fig. 1 - Engine rpm pickup.

Fig. 2 - Clutch unit for AGROPLUS 60

Clutch and transmission

Fig. 3 - Clutch unit for AGROPLUS 70-80

Clutch and transmission

Clutch unit for AGROPLUS 60-70-80 (USA) 6 blades

Clutch and transmission

Fig. 4 - Components of clutch assembly

Clutch and transmission

Fig. 5 - Checking clutch disk thickness.

Fig. 9 - Installing clutch assembly through n. 5.9030.256.4/10 equipment.

Fig. 6 - Clutch assembly hydraulic operating cylinder.

Fig. 7 - Checking operating cylinder inside spring

Adjusting clutch control pedal

Bleeding air from the hydraulic circuit

Clutch and transmission

Fig. 10 - Clutch operating cylinder

Stripping the slave cylinder (Fig. 10)

Clutch and transmission

Fig. 12 - Clutch hydraulic pump parts.

Stripping the master cylinder

Fig. 13 - Clutch pump control positioning.

Fig. 14 - Pump control seal ring.

Clutch and transmission

Inspections and checks

Fig. 15 - Section view of clutch master cylinder

Clutch greasing points.

Fitting the P.T.O. shaft oil seal

Clutch and transmission

renew the front gearbox oil seal and

clean oil seal contact surfaces with

fit new clutch as sembly

thrust bearing sticking

clean surfaces and

replace thrust bearing

clean or replace the

clutch disk surfaces dirty